2021-2022

REGULATIONS,
COURSE STRUCTURE
AND SYLLABUS
(Aligned with AICTE Model Curriculum &
APSCHE Curriculum)

SITE 21 REGULATIONS
For
B.Tech.
Mechanical Engineering

With effective from the Academic Year

2021-2022
 B.Tech. Regulations
1.1 Short title and Commencement
The regulations listed under this head are common for all degree level under graduate
programs (B.Tech.) offered by the college with effect from the academic year 2021-22 and they
are called as “SITE21” regulations.
The regulations here under are subject to amendments as may be made by the Academic
Council of the college from time to time, keeping the recommendations of the Board of Studies
in view. Any or all such amendments will be effective from such date and to such batches of
candidates including those already undergoing the program, as may be decided by the
Academic Council.
1.2. Definitions
a. “Commission” means University Grants Commission(UGC)
b. “Council” means All India Council for Technical Education(AICTE)
c. “University” Means Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University Kakinada(JNTUK)
d. “College” means Sasi Institute of Technology & Engineering, Tadepalligudem.
e. “Program” Means any combination of courses and /or requirements leading to award
of a degree
f. “Course” Means a subject either theory or practical identified by its course title and
code number and which is normally studied in asemester.
g. For example, (ELECTRONC DEVICES) is a course offered at third semester of
B.Tech (ECT) and its code is (21ETETT3030)
h. “Degree” means an academic degree conferred by the university upon those who
complete the undergraduate curriculum
i. “Regular Student” means student enrolled into the four year programme in the firstyear
j. “Lateral entry Students” Means student enrolled into the four year programme in the
secondyear
1.3. Academic Programs
1.3.1. Nomenclature of Programs
The nomenclature and its abbreviation given below shall continue to be used for the
degree programs under the University, as required by the Council and Commission. The name
of specialization shall be indicated in brackets after the abbreviation. For e.g. UG engineering
degree in Mechanical Engineering program is abbreviated as B.Tech. (ME). Bachelor of
Technology (B.Tech.) degree program offered in:
1. Artificial Intelligence & Machine Learning(AIM)
2. Civil Engineering(CE)
3. Computer Science and Engineering(Artificial Intelligence and Machine learning)-CSM
4. Computer Science and Engineering (IoT and Cyber Security including Block Chain
Technology) (CIS)
5. Computer Science and Engineering(Data Science)-CSD
6. Computer Science and Engineering(CSE)
7. Computer Science and Technology(CST)
8. Electronics and Communication Engineering(ECE)
9. Electronics and Communication Technology(ECT)
10. Electrical and Electronics Engineering(EEE)
11. Information Technology(IT)
12. Mechanical Engineering(ME)

 Curriculum framework is important in setting the right direction for a Degree program
 as it takes into account the type and quantum of knowledge necessary to be acquired by
a student to qualify for a award in his/her chosen branch or specialization.
 Besides, this also helps in assigning the credits for each course, sequencing the courses
semester-wise and finally arriving at the total number of courses to be studied and the
total number of credits to be earned by a student to fulfill the requirements for
conferment of degree.
 Each theory course shall consist of five units.
1.3.2. Curriculum Structure
The curriculum structure is designed in such a way that it facilitates the courses
required to attain the expected knowledge, skills and attitude by the time of their graduation as
per the needs of the stakeholders. The curriculum structure consists of various course
categories (as described in 1.6.3 to 1.6.9) to cover the depth and breadth required for the
program and for the attainment of program outcomes of the corresponding program. Each
Programme of study will be designed to have 40-45 theory courses and 16-18 laboratory
courses. The distribution and types of courses offered from the above is indicated in the
following table 3.
1.3.3. Induction Program
The Induction Program for two weeks is designed to make the newly joined students
feel comfortable, sensitize them towards exploring their academic interests and activities,
reducing competition and making them work for excellence, promote bonding within them,
build relations between teachers and students and building of character. Induction program
covers
Physical activity
Creative arts
Universal human values
Literary and Proficiency modules
Lectures by Eminent peoples
1.4Admission Criteria
The eligibility criteria for admission into UG engineering programs are as per the norms
approved by government of Andhra Pradesh from time to time. The sanctioned seats in each
program in the college are classified into CATEGORY-A and CATEGORY-B at first year level
and Lateral Entry at second year level.
 CATEGORY – A Seats: These seats will be filled as per the norms approved by the
Government of Andhra Pradesh.
 CATEGORY – B Seats: These seats will be filled by the College as per the norms
approved by the Government of Andhra Pradesh.
 CATEGORY – Lateral Entry Seats : Lateralentry candidates shall be admitted into
the Third semester directly as per the norms approved by government of Andhra
Pradesh. The percentages of Category-A, Category-B and Lateral Entry Seats are
decided time to time by the Government of Andhra Pradesh.

2. Award of B. Tech. Degree

a) A student will be declared eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree if
he fulfills the following academic regulations:
i. A student shall be declared eligible for the award of B. Tech Degree, if he pursues a
course of study in not less than four and not more than eight academic years. After
eight academic years from the year of their admission, he/she shall forfeit their seat in
B.Tech course and their admission stands cancelled.
ii. The candidate shall register for 160 credits and secure all the 160 credits.
b) The medium of instruction for the entire under graduate programmer in
 Engineering &Technology will be in English only.

3. Programme Pattern:
a) Total duration of the of B. Tech (Regular) Programme is four academic years
b) Each Academic year of study is divided into Two Semesters.
c) Minimum number of instruction days in each semester is 90.
d) Grade points, based on percentage of marks awarded for each course will form the
basis for calculation of SGPA (Semester Grade Point Average) and CGPA
(Cumulative Grade Point Average).
e) The total credits for the Programme is 160.
f) Three week induction program is mandatory for all first year UG students and shall be
conducted as per AICTE/UGC/APSCHE guidelines.
g) Student is introduced to “Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)”.
h) A pool of interdisciplinary and job-oriented mandatory skill courses which are
relevant to the industry are integrated into the curriculum of concerned
branch of engineering (total five skill courses: two basic level skill courses, one on
soft skills and other two on advanced level skill courses)
i) A student has to register for all courses in a semester.
j) All the registered credits will be considered for the calculation of final CGPA.
k) Each semester has - ‘Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)’ and ‘Semester End
Examination (SEE)’.Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) and Credit Based Semester
System (CBSS) as indicated by UGC and course structure as suggested by AICTE are
followed.
l) A 10 months industry/field mandatory internship, both industry and social,
during the summer vacation and also in the final semester to acquire the skills required
for job and make engineering graduates to connect with the needs of the industry and
society at large.
m) All the students shall be mandatorily registered for NCC, NSS activities and
Community Service Project as per the Government and University norms.
n) Each college shall assign a faculty advisor/mentor after admission to each
student or group of students from same department to provide guidance in
courses registration / career growth/placements/opportunities for higher studies/
GATE / other competitive exams etc.
4. Registration for Courses:
a) In each semester a student shall mandatorily register courses which he/she wishes to pursue
within a week from the starting of the class work with the advice of Head of the
Department and mentor of the student of the concerned department of the college.
b) If any student wishes to withdraw the registration of the course, he/she shall submit a letter
to the Principal of the college through the Head of the Department and mentor within
fifteen days.
c) The concerned college shall thoroughly verify and upload the data/courses registered by
each student in the university examination center within 20 days. The Principal of the
concerned college shall ensure that there no wrong registration courses by the student. The
university registration portal will be closed after 20 days.

5. (a) Award of B. Tech. Degree: A student will be declared eligible for the award of B.
Tech. Degree if he fulfills the following academic regulations:
i. A student shall be declared eligible for award of the B. Tech Degree, if he pursues a
course of study in not less than four and not more than eight academic years. After
eight academic years from the year of their admission, he/she shall forfeit their seat in
B. Tech course and their admission stands cancelled.
ii. The student shall register for 160 credits and must secure all the 160 credits.
iii. All students shall mandatorily register for the courses like Environmental Sciences,
Universal Human Values, Ethics, Indian Constitution, Essence of Indian Traditional
Knowledge etc., shall be included in the curriculum as non-credit mandatory courses.
Environmental Sciences is to be offered compulsorily as mandatory course for all
branches. A student has to secure at least 40% of the marks allotted in the internal
evaluation for passing the course and shall maintain 75% of attendance in the subject.
iv. All students shall mandatorily register for NCC/NSS activities and will be required to
participate in an activity specified by NSS officer during second and third semesters.
Grade shall be awarded as Satisfactory or Unsatisfactory in the mark sheet on the basis
of participation, attendance, performance and behavior. If a student gets an
unsatisfactory Grade, he/she shall repeat the above activity in the subsequent years, in
order to complete the degree requirements.
v. Credits are defined as per AICTE norms.
(b) Award of B. Tech. (Honor):
 Students of a Department/Discipline are eligible to opt for Honors Programme offered
by the same Department/Discipline
 A student shall be permitted to register for Honors program at the beginning of 4 th
semester provided that the student must have acquired a minimum of 8.0 SGPA upto
the end of 2 nd semester without any backlogs. In case of the declaration of the 3rd
semester results after the commencement of the 4th semester and if a student fails to
score the required minimum of 8 SGPA, his/her registration for Honors Programme
stands cancelled and he/she shall continue with the regular Programme.
 Students can select the additional and advanced courses from their respective branch in
which they are pursuing the degree and get an honors degree in the same. e.g. If a
Mechanical Engineering student completes the selected advanced courses from same
branch under this scheme, he/she will be awarded B.Tech. (Honors) in Mechanical
Engineering.
 In addition to fulfilling all the requisites of a Regular B.Tech Programme, a student
shall earn 20 additional credits to be eligible for the award of B. Tech (Honors) degree.
This is in addition to the credits essential for obtaining the Under Graduate Degree in
Major Discipline (i.e. 160 credits).
 Of the 20 additional Credits to be acquired, 16 credits shall be earned by undergoing
specified courses listed as pools, with four courses, each carrying 4 credits. The
remaining 4 credits must be acquired through two MOOCs, which shall be domain
specific, each with 2 credits and with a minimum duration of 8/12weeks as
recommended by the Board of studies.
 It is the responsibility of the student to acquire/complete prerequisite before taking the
respective course. The courses offered in each pool shall be domain specific courses
and advanced courses
 The concerned BoS shall decide on the minimum enrolments for offering Honors
program by the department. If minimum enrolments criteria are not met then the
students shall be permitted to register for the equivalent MOOC courses as approved by
the concerned Head of the department in consultation with BoS.
 Each pool can have theory as well as laboratory courses. If a course comes with a lab
component, that component has to be cleared separately. The concerned BoS shall 16
explore the possibility of introducing virtual labs for such courses with lab component.
 MOOC courses must be of minimum 8 weeks in duration. Attendance will not be
monitored for MOOC courses. Students have to acquire a certificate from the agencies
approved by the BOS with grading or marks or pass/fail in order to earn 4 credits. If the
 MOOC course is a pass/fail course without any grades, the grade to be assigned will be
as decided by the university/academic council.
 The concerned BoS shall also consider courses listed under professional electives of the
respective B. Tech programs for the requirements of B. Tech (Honors). However, a
student shall be permitted to choose only those courses that he/she has not studied in
any form during the Programme.
 If a student drops or is terminated from the Honors program, the additional credits so
far earned cannot be converted into free or core electives; they will remain extra. These
additional courses will find mention in the transcript (but not in the degree certificate).
In such cases, the student may choose between the actual grade or a “pass (P)” grade
and also choose to omit the mention of the course as for the following: All the courses
done under the dropped Minors will be shown in the transcript. None of the courses
done under the dropped Minor will be shown in the transcript.
 In case a student fails to meet the CGPA requirement for Degree with Honors at any
point after registration, he/she will be dropped from the list of students eligible for
Degree with Honors and they will receive regular B.Tech degree only. However, such
students will receive a separate grade sheet mentioning the additional courses
completed by them.
 Honors must be completed simultaneously with a major degree program. A student
cannot earn Honors after he/she has already earned bachelor’s degree.
(c) Award of B. Tech. (Minors):
 a)Students who are desirous of pursuing their special interest areas other than the
chosen discipline of Engineering may opt for additional courses in minor specialization
groups offered by a department other than their parent department. For example, If
Mechanical Engineering student selects subjects from Civil Engineering under this
scheme, he/she will get Major degree of Mechanical Engineering with minor degree of
Civil Engineering b) Student can also opt for Industry relevant tracks of any branch to
obtain the Minor Degree, for example, a B.Tech Mechanical student can opt for the
industry relevant tracks like Data Mining track, IOT track, Machine learning track etc.
 The BOS concerned shall identify as many tracks as possible in the areas of emerging
technologies and industrial relevance / demand. For example, the minor tracks can be
the fundamental courses in CSE, ECE, EEE,CE,ME etc or industry tracks such as
Artificial Intelligence (AI), Machine Learning (ML), Data Science (DS), Robotics,
Electric vehicles, Robotics, VLSI etc.
 The list of disciplines/branches eligible to opt for a particular industry relevant minor
specialization shall be clearly mentioned by the respective BoS.
 There shall be no limit on the number of programs offered under Minor. The
University/Institution can offer minor programs in emerging technologies based on
expertise in the respective departments or can explore the possibility of collaborating
with the relevant industries/agencies in offering the program.
 The concerned BoS shall decide on the minimum enrolments for offering Minor
program by the department. If a minimum enrolments criterion is not met, then the
students may be permitted to register for the equivalent MOOC courses as approved by
the concerned Head of the department in consultation with BoS.
 A student shall be permitted to register for Minors program at the beginning of 4th
semester subject to a maximum of two additional courses per semester, provided that
the student must have acquired 8 SGPA (Semester Grade point average) upto the end of
2nd semester without any history of backlogs. It is expected that the 3rd semester
results may be announced after the commencement of the 4th semester. If a student
fails to acquire 8 SGPA upto 3rd semester or failed in any of the courses, his
 registration for Minors program shall stand cancelled. An SGPA of 8 has to be
maintained in the subsequent semesters without any backlog in order to keep the
Minors registration active.
 A student shall earn additional 20 credits in the specified area to be eligible for the
award of B. Tech degree with Minor. This is in addition to the credits essential for
obtaining the Under Graduate Degree in Major Discipline (i.e. 160 credits).
 Out of the 20 Credits, 16 credits shall be earned by undergoing specified courses listed
by the concerned BoS along with prerequisites. It is the responsibility of the student to
acquire/complete prerequisite before taking the respective course. If a course comes
with a lab component, that component has to be cleared separately. A student shall be
permitted to choose only those courses that he/she has not studied in any form during
the Programme.
 In addition to the 16 credits, students must pursue at least 2 courses through MOOCs.
The courses must be of minimum 8 weeks in duration. Attendance will not be
monitored for MOOC courses. Student has to acquire a certificate from the agencies
approved by the BOS with grading or marks or pass/fail in order to earn 4 credits. If the
MOOC course is a pass/fail course without any grades, the grade to be assigned as
decided by the university/academic council.
 Student can opt for the Industry relevant minor specialization as approved by the
concerned departmental BoS. Student can opt the courses from Skill Development
Corporation (APSSDC) or can opt the courses from an external agency recommended
and approved by concerned BOS and should produce course completion certificate.
The Board of studies of the concerned discipline of Engineering shall review such
courses being offered by eligible external agencies and prepare a fresh list every year
incorporating latest skills based on industrial demand.
 A committee should be formed at the level of College/Universities/department to
evaluate the grades/marks given by external agencies to a student which are approved
by concerned BoS. Upon completion of courses the departmental committee should
convert the obtained grades/marks to the maximum marks assigned to that course. The
controller of examinations can take a decision on such conversions and may give
appropriate grades.
 If a student drops (or terminated) from the Minor program, they cannot convert the
earned credits into free or core electives; they will remain extra. These additional
courses will find mention in the transcript (but not in the degree certificate). In such
cases, the student may choose between the actual grade or a “pass (P)” grade and also
choose to omit the mention of the course as for the following: All the courses done
under the dropped Minors will be shown in the transcript. None of the courses done
under the dropped Minor will be shown in the transcript.
 In case a student fails to meet the CGPA requirement for B.Tech degree with Minor at
any point after registration, he/she will be dropped from the list of students eligible for
degree with Minors and they will receive B. Tech degree only. However, such students
will receive a separate grade sheet mentioning the additional courses completed by
them.
 Minor must be completed simultaneously with a major degree program. A student
cannot earn the Minor after he/she has already earned bachelor’s degree.
6. Attendance Requirements
a) A student is eligible to write the University examinations if he acquires a minimum of
40% in each subject and 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the subjects.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above, and
below 75%) may be granted by the College Academic Committee. However, this
 condonation concession is applicable only to any two semesters during the entire
programme.
c) Shortage of Attendance below 65% in aggregate shall not be condoned.
d) A student who is short of attendance in a semester may seek re-admission into that
semester when offered within 4 weeks from the date of commencement of class work.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester are not eligible
to write their end semester examination of that class.
f) A stipulated fee of Rs. 1000/- in the concerned semester shall be payable towards
condonation of shortage of attendance. Students availing condonation on medical
ground shall produce a medical certificate issued by the competitive authority.
g) A student will be promoted to the next semester if he satisfies the (i) attendance
requirement of the present semester and (ii) minimum required credits.
h) If any candidate fulfills the attendance requirement in the present semester, he shall
not be eligible for readmission into the same class.
i) For induction programme attendance shall be maintained as per AICTE norms.
j) For non-credit mandatory courses the students shall maintain the attendance similar to
credit courses
7. Evaluation-Distribution and Weightage of marks
i. Paper setting and evaluation of the answer scripts shall be done as per the procedures
laid down by the University Examination section from time to time.
ii. To maintain the quality, external examiners and question paper setters shall be
selected from reputed institutes like IISc, IITs, IIITs, IISERs, NITs and Universities.
iii. For non-credit mandatory courses, like Environmental Sciences, Universal Human
Values, Ethics, Indian Constitution, Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge, the
student has to secure 40% of the marks allotted in the internal evaluation for passing
the course. No marks or letter grade shall be allotted for all mandatory non-credit
courses.
iv. A student is deemed to have satisfied the minimum academic requirements if he has
earned the credits allotted to each theory/practical design/drawing subject/ project etc
by securing not less than 35% of marks in the end semester exam and minimum 40%
of marks in the sum total of the internal marks and end semester examination marks
together.

v. Distribution and Weightage of marks:The assessment of the student’s performance

in each course will be as per the details given:
S. No. Components Internal External Total
1 Theory 30 70 100
2 Engineering Graphics/Design/Drawing 30 70 100
3 Practical 15 35 50
4 Mini Project/Internship/Industrial Training/ - 50 50
Skill Development programs/Research Project
5 Project Work 60 140 200
vi. Continuous Internal Theory Evaluation:
a) For theory subjects, during a semester, there shall be two mid-term examinations. Each
mid-term examination consists of (i) one online objective examination (20 multiple
choice questions) for 10 marks for a duration of 20 minutes (ii) one descriptive
examination (3 full questions for 5 marks each) for 15 marks for a duration of 90
minutes and (iii) one assignment for 05 marks. All the internal exams shall be
conducted as per university norms from first 50% of the syllabi.
b) In the similar lines, the second online, descriptive examinations assignment shall be
 conducted on the rest of the 50% syllabus.
c) The total marks secured by the student in each mid-term examination are evaluated for
30 marks. The first mid marks (Mid-1) consisting of marks of online objective
examination, descriptive examination and assignment shall be submitted to the
University examination section within one week after completion of first mid
examination.
d) The mid marks submitted to the University examination section shall be displayed in the
concerned college notice boards for the benefit of the students.
e) If any discrepancy found in the submitted Mid-1 marks, it shall be brought to the notice
of university examination section within one week from the submission.
f) Second mid marks (Mid-2) consisting of marks of online objective examination,
descriptive examination and assignment shall also be submitted to University
examination section within one week after completion of second mid examination and it
shall be displayed in the notice boards. If any discrepancy found in the submitted mid-2
marks, it shall be brought to the notice of university examination section within one
week from the submission.
g) Internal marks can be calculated with 80% weightage for better of the two mids and
20% Weightage for other mid exam.
a. Example: Mid-1 marks = Marks secured in
b. (Online examination-1 + descriptive examination-1 +one assignment-1)
c. Mid-2 marks = Marks secured in
d. (Online examination-2+descriptive examination-2+one assignment-2)
e. Final internal Marks = (Best of (Mid-1/Mid-2) marks x 0.8 + Least of (Mid-
1/Mid-2) marks x 0.2)
h) With the above criteria, university examination section will send mid marks of all
subjects in consolidated form to all the concerned colleges and same shall be displayed
in the concerned college notice boards. If any discrepancy found, it shall be brought to
the notice of university examination section through proper channel within one week
with all proofs. Discrepancies brought after the given deadline will not be entertained
under any circumstances.

vii. Semester End Theory Examinations Evaluation:

a) The semester end examinations will be conducted university examination section for
70 marks consists of five questions carrying 14 marks each. Each of these questions is
from one unit and may contain sub-questions. For each question there will be an
“either” “or” choice, which means that there will be two questions from each unit and
the student should answer either of the two questions.
b) For practical subjects there shall be continuous evaluation during the semester for 15
internal marks and 35 end examination marks. The internal 15 marks shall be awarded
as follows: day to day work - 5 marks, Record-5 marks and the remaining 5 marks to
be awarded by conducting an internal laboratory test. The end examination shall be
conducted by the teacher concerned and external examiner appointed.
c) For the subject having design and / or drawing, (such as Engineering Graphics,
Engineering Drawing, Machine Drawing) and estimation, the distribution shall be 30
marks for internal evaluation (15 marks for continuous Assessment (day–to–day work)
and 15 marks for internal tests) and 70 marks for end examination. There shall be two
internal tests in a Semester for 15 marks each and final marks can be calculated with
80% weightage for better of the two tests and 20% weightage for other test and these
are to be added to the marks obtained in day to day work.
Evaluation of the summer internships:
 Two summer internships each with a minimum of six weeks duration, done at the end
 of second and third years, respectively are mandatory. The internship can be done by
the students at local industries, Govt. Organizations, construction agencies, Industries,
Hydel and thermal power projects and also in software MNCs.
 Evaluation of the summer internships shall be through the departmental committee. A
student will be required to submit a summer internship report to the concerned
department and appear for an oral presentation before the departmental committee.
The report and the oral presentation shall carry 40% and 60% weightages respectively.
 In the final semester, the student should mandatorily undergo internship and parallelly
he/she should work on a project with well-defined objectives. At the end of the
semester the candidate shall submit an internship completion certificate and a project
report. A student shall also be permitted to submit project report on the work carried
out during the internship. The project report shall be evaluated with an external
examiner
 The College shall facilitate and monitor the student internship programs. Completion
of internships is mandatory, if any student fails to complete internship, he/she will not
be eligible for the award of degree. In such cases, the student shall repeat and
complete the internship.
 It shall be evaluated for 50 external marks at the end of the semester. There shall be no
internal marks for Summer Internship. A student shall secure minimum 40% of marks
for successful completion.
d) Curricular Framework for Skill oriented:
 The job oriented skill courses may be registered at the college or at any accredited
external agency. A student shall submit a record/report on the on the list skills learned.
If the student completes job oriented skill course at external agency, a certificate from
the agency shall be included in the report. The course will be evaluated at the end of
the semester for 50 marks (record: 15 marks and viva-voce: 35 marks) along with
laboratory end examinations in the presence of external and internal examiner (course
instructor or mentor). There are no internal marks for the job oriented skill courses.
 For skill oriented/skill advanced course, one theory and 2 practical hours or two theory
hours may be allotted as per the decision of concerned BOS.
 Out of the five skill courses two shall be skill-oriented courses from the same domain
and shall be completed in second year. Of the remaining 3 skill courses, one shall be
necessarily be a soft skill course and the remaining 2 shall be skill-advanced courses
either from the same domain or Job oriented skill courses, which can be of inter
disciplinary nature.
 A pool of interdisciplinary job-oriented skill courses shall be designed by a common
Board of studies by the participating departments/disciplines and the syllabus along
with the pre requisites shall be prepared for each of the laboratory infrastructure
requirements. The list of such courses shall be included in the curriculum structure of
each branch of Engineering, so as to enable the student to choose from the list
 The student shall be given an option to choose either the skill courses being offered by
the college or to choose a certificate course being offered by industries/Professional
bodies/APSSDC or any other accredited bodies as approved by the concerned BoS
 The Board of studies of the concerned discipline of Engineering shall review the skill
advanced courses being offered by eligible external agencies and prepare a fresh list
every year incorporating latest courses based on industrial demand
 If a student chooses to take a Certificate Course offered by industries/Professional
bodies/APSSDC or any other accredited bodies, in lieu of the skill advanced course
offered by the Department, the credits shall be awarded to the student upon producing
the Course Completion Certificate from the agency/professional bodies as approved
 by the Board of studies.
 If a student prefers to take a certificate course offered by external agency, the
department shall mark attendance of the student for the remaining courses in that
semester excluding the skill course in all the calculations of mandatory attendance
requirements upon producing a valid certificate as approved by the concerned Board
of Studies, the student is deemed to have fulfilled the attendance requirement of the
course and acquire the credits assigned to the course.
 A committee shall be formed at the level of the college to evaluate the grades/marks
given for a course by external agencies and convert to the equivalent marks/grades.
The recommended conversions and appropriate grades/marks are to be approved by
the University/Academic Council.

e) Mandatory Course (M.C): Environmental Sciences, Universal Human Values, Ethics,

Indian Constitution, Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge etc non-credit (zero
credits) mandatory courses. Environmental Sciences shall be offered compulsorily as
mandatory course for all branches. A minimum of 75% attendance is mandatory in
these subjects. There shall be an external examination for 70 marks and it shall be
conducted by the college internally. Two internal examinations shall be conducted for
30 marks and a student has to secure at least 40% of the marks for passing the course.
There is no online internal exam for mandatory courses. No marks or letter grade shall be
printed in the transcripts for all mandatory non-credit courses, but only Completed
(Y)/Not-completed (N) will be specified.
f) Procedure for Conduct and Evaluation of MOOC: There shall be a Discipline
Centric Elective Course through Massive Open Online Course (MOOC) as Program
Elective course. The student shall register for the course (Minimum of 12 weeks)
offered by SWAYAM/NPTEL through online with the approval of Head of the
Department. The Head of the Department shall appoint one mentor for each of the
MOOC subjects offered. The student needs to register the course in the
SWAYAM/NPTEL portal. During the course, the mentor monitors the student’s
assignment submissions given by SWAYAM/NPTEL. The student needs to submit all
the assignments given and needs to take final exam at the proctor center. The student
needs to earn a certificate by passing the exam. The student will be awarded the credits
given in curriculum only by submission of the certificate. In case if student does not
pass subjects registered through SWAYAM/NPTEL, the same or alternative equivalent
subject may be registered again through SWAYAM/NPTEL in the next semester with
the recommendation of HOD and shall be pass.
g) Major Project (Project - Project work, seminar and internship in industry):
In the final semester, the student should mandatorily register and undergo internship and
in parallel he/she should work on a project with well-defined objectives. At the end of
the semester the candidate shall submit an internship completion certificate and a
project report. A student shall also be permitted to submit project report on the work
carried out during the internship. The project report shall be evaluated with an external
examiner.
Evaluation: The total marks for project work 200 marks and distribution shall be 60
marks for internal and 140 marks for external evaluation. The supervisor assesses the
student for 30 marks (Report: 15 marks, Seminar: 15 marks). At the end of the
semester, all projects shall be showcased at the department for the benefit of all
students and staff and the same is to be evaluated by the departmental Project Review
Committee consisting of supervisor, a senior faculty and HOD for 30 marks. The
external evaluation of Project Work is a Viva-Voce Examination conducted in the
presence of internal examiner and external examiner and is evaluated for 140 marks.
8 Results Declaration:
i. Before results declaration, an academic council meeting shall be conducted and results
shall be placed before the academic council for approval.
ii. With the approval of academic council, the results shall be submitted to the University
to get the Approval from Honorable Vice-Chancellor.
iii. The University may normalize the result, if required, before declaration of the result
(Guidelines for normalization will be provided separately)
iv. A copy of approved results in a CD shall be submitted to the University examination
Center.
9. Academic Audit: Academic audit in each semester will be conducted as per norms.
10. Recounting or Re-evaluation of Marks in the End Semester Examination: A
student can request for recounting of revaluation of his/her answer book on payment of a
prescribed fee as per norms.
11. Supplementary Examinations: A student who has failed to secure the required credits can
appear for a supplementary examination, as per the schedule announced by the University.
12. Malpractices in Examinations: Disciplinary action shall be taken in case of malpractices
during Mid/End examinations as per the rules framed by the University.
13. Promotion Rules: The following academic requirements have to be satisfied in addition
to the attendance requirements mentioned in item no.5 for promotion to higher classes
a) A student shall be promoted from first year to second year if he fulfills the minimum
attendance requirement as per University norm.
b) A student will be promoted from II year to III year if he fulfills the academic
requirement of 40% of credits up to either II year I-Semester or II year II-Semester
from all the examinations, whether or not the candidate takes the examinations and
secures prescribed minimum attendance in II year II semester.
c) A student shall be promoted from III year to IV year if he fulfills the academic
requirements of 40% of the credits up to either III year I semester or III year II
semester from all the examinations, whether or not the candidate takes the
examinations and secures prescribed minimum attendance in III year II semester.
14. Course Pattern
a) The entire course of study is for four academic years; all years are on semester pattern.
b) A student eligible to appear for the end semester examination in a subject, but absent
from it or has failed in the end semester examination, may write the exam in that
subject when conducted next.
c) When a student is detained for lack of credits / shortage of attendance, he may be re-
admitted into the same semester/year in which he has been detained. However, the
academic regulations under which he was first admitted shall continue to be applicable
to him.
15. Earning of Credit:
A student shall be considered to have completed a course successfully and earned
the credits if he/she secures an acceptable letter grade in the range A+ to E as given
below. Letter grade ‘F’ in any course implies failure of the student in that course and no
credits earned. Absent is also treated as no credits earned. For project same % percentages
will be followed for grading.

Marks Range Marks range Grade

Level Letter Grade
Max:100 Max:50 point
≥ 90 ≥ 45 Outstanding A+ 10
≥80 to <89 ≥40 to <44 Excellent A 9
≥70 to <79 ≥35 to <39 Very Good B 8
 ≥60 to <69 ≥30 to <34 Good C 7
≥50 to <59 ≥25 to <29 Fair D 6
≥40 to <49 ≥20 to <24 Satisfactory E 5
<40 <20 Fail F 0
- Absent AB 0

16. Award of Class:

After a student has satisfied the requirements prescribed for the completion of the
program and is eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree, he shall be placed in one of the
following four classes:
Class Awarded CGPA to be secured Remarks
≥7.75 (Without any supplementary
First Class with Distinction From the
appearance)
CGPA
First Class ≥ 6.75 secured
Second Class ≥ 5.75 to < 6.75 from
Pass Class ≥ 5.00 to < 5.75 160 Credits

17. Minimum Instruction Days:

The minimum instruction days for each semester shall be 90 working days. There shall
be no branch transfers after the completion of the admission process. There shall be no transfer
from one college/stream to another within the Constituent Colleges and Units of Jawaharlal
Nehru Technological University Kakinada.
18. Withholding of Results:
If the student is involved in indiscipline/malpractices/court cases, the result of the
student will be withheld.
19. Transitory Regulations
a) Discontinued or detained candidates are eligible for re-admission as and when next
offered.
b) The re-admitted candidate will be governed by the rules & regulations under which the
candidate has been admitted.
c) In case of transferred students from other Universities, credits shall be transferred to
JNTUK as per the academic regulations and course structure of JNTUK.
d) The students seeking transfer to colleges affiliated to JNTUK from various other
Universities / Institutions haveto obtain the credits of any equivalent subjects as
prescribed by JNTUK. In addition, the transferred candidates have to pass the failed
subjects at the earlier Institute with already obtained internal/sessional marks to be
conducted by JNTUK.
20. Gap – Year:
Gap Year concept of Student Entrepreneur in Residence shall be introduced and
outstanding students who wish to pursue entrepreneurship are allowed to take a break of
one year at any time after I/II/III year to pursue entrepreneurship full time. This period
shall be counted for the maximum time for graduation. An evaluation committee at
university level shall be constituted to evaluate the proposal submitted by the student and
the committee shall decide on permitting the student for availing the Gap Year.
21. General:
a) Wherever the words “he”, “him”, “his”, occur in the regulations, they include “she”,
“her”, “hers”.
 b) The academic regulation should be read as a whole for the purpose of any
interpretation.
c) In case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of
the Vice-Chancellor is final.
d) The University may change or amend the academic regulations or syllabi at any time
and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students with effect
from the dates notified by the University.

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS (SITE21) FOR B.Tech

(LATERAL ENTRY SCHEME)
Applicable for the students admitted into II year B. Tech. from the Academic Year 2022-23
onwards
1. Award of B. Tech. Degree
A student will be declared eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree if he fulfills the
following academic regulations:
a) A student shall be declared eligible for the award of the B. Tech Degree, if he pursues a
course of study in not less than three academic years and not more than six academic
years. After six academic years from the year of their admission, he/she shall forfeit
their seat in B. Tech course and their admission stands cancelled.
b) The candidate shall register for 121 credits and secure all the 122 credits.
2. The attendance regulations of B. Tech. (Regular) shall be applicable to B.Tech
(lateral entry)
3. Promotion Rules: A student shall be promoted from second year to third year
if he fulfills the minimum attendance requirement.
A student shall be promoted from III year to IV year if he fulfills the academic
requirements of 40% of the credits up to either III year I semester or III year II semester
from all the examinations, whether or not the candidate takes the examinations and secures
prescribed minimum attendance in III year II semester.
4. Award of Class
After a student has satisfied the requirement prescribed for the completion of the
program and is eligible for the award of B. Tech. Degree, he shall be placed in one of the
following four classes:
Class Awarded CGPA to be secured Remarks
First Class with ≥ 7.75 (Without any supplementary
Distinction appearance) From the CGPA
secured from 121
First Class ≥ 6.75 Credits from
Second Class ≥ 5.75 to < 6.75 II Year to IV Year
Pass Class ≥ 5.00 to < 5.75
The Grades secured, Grade points and Credits obtained will be shown separately in the
memorandum of marks.
5. All the other regulations as applicable to B. Tech. 4-year degree course (Regular) will
hold good for B. Tech. (Lateral Entry Scheme

COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT

Introduction
1. Community Service Project is an experiential learning strategy that integrates meaningful
community service with instruction, participation, learning and community development
2. Community Service Project involves students in community development and service
activities and applies the experience to personal and academic development.
3. Community Service Project is meant to link the community with the college for mutual
benefit. The community will be benefited with the focused contribution of the college
students for the village/ local development. The college finds an opportunity to develop
social sensibility and responsibility among students and also emerge as a socially
responsible institution.
Objective
Community Service Project should be an integral part of the curriculum, as an
alternative to the 2 months of Summer Internships / Apprenticeships / On the Job Training,
whenever there is an exigency when students cannot pursue their summer internships. The
specific objectives are;
1. To sensitize the students to the living conditions of the people who are around them,
2. To help students to realize the stark realities of the society.
3. To bring about an attitudinal change in the students and help them to develop societal
consciousness, sensibility, responsibility and accountability
4. To make students aware of their inner strength and help them to find new /out of box
solutions to the social problems.
5. To make students socially responsible citizens who are sensitive to the needs of the
disadvantaged sections.
6. To help students to initiate developmental activities in the community in coordination with
public and government authorities.
7. To develop a holistic life perspective among the students by making them study culture,
traditions, habits, lifestyles, resource utilization, wastages and its management, social
problems, public administration system and the roles and responsibilities of different
persons across different social systems.

Implementation of Community Service Project

1. Every student should put in a minimum of 180 hours for the Community Service Project
during the summer vacation
2. Each class/section should be assigned with a mentor.
3. Specific Departments could concentrate on their major areas of concern. For example,
Dept. of Computer Science can take up activities related to Computer Literacy to different
sections of people like - youth, women, house-wives, etc.
4. A log book has to be maintained by each of the student, where the activities
undertaken/involved to be recorded. The log book has to be countersigned by the
concerned mentor/faculty in charge.
5. Evaluation to be done based on the active participation of the student and grade could be
awarded by the mentor/faculty member.
6. The final evaluation to be reflected in the grade memo of the student.
7. The Community Service Project should be different from the regular programs of
NSS/NCC/Green Corps/Red Ribbon Club, etc.
8. Minor project report should be submitted by each student. An internal Viva shall also be
conducted by a committee constituted by the principal of the college.
9. Award of marks shall be made as per the guidelines of Internship/apprentice/ on the job
training

Procedure
1. A group of students or even a single student could be assigned for a particular habitation or
 village or municipal ward, as far as possible, in the near vicinity of their place of stay, so as
to enable them to commute from their residence and return back by evening or so.
2. The Community Service Project is a twofold one –
a) First, the student/s could conduct a survey of the habitation, if necessary, in terms of
their own domain or subject area. Or it can even be a general survey, incorporating all
the different areas. A common survey format could be designed. This should not be
viewed as a duplication of work by the Village or Ward volunteers, rather, it could be
another primary source of data.
b) Secondly, the student/s could take up a social activity, concerning their domain or
subject area. The different areas, could be like –
▪ Agriculture
▪ Health
▪ Marketing and Cooperation
▪ Animal Husbandry
▪ Horticulture
▪ Fisheries
▪ Sericulture
▪ Revenue and Survey
▪ Natural Disaster Management
▪ Irrigation
▪ Law & Order
▪ Excise and Prohibition
▪ Mines and Geology
▪ Energy
▪ Internet
▪ Free Electricity
▪ Drinking Water
EXPECTED OUTCOMES BENEFITS OF COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT TO
STUDENTS
Learning Outcomes
1. Positive impact on students’ academic learning.
2. Improves students’ ability to apply what they have learned in “the real world”.
3. Positive impact on academic outcomes such as demonstrated complexity of
understanding, problem analysis, problem-solving, critical thinking, and cognitive
development.
4. Improved ability to understand complexity and ambiguity.
Personal Outcomes
1. Greater sense of personal efficacy, personal identity, spiritual growth, and moral
development.
2. Greater interpersonal development, particularly the ability to work well with others, and
build leadership and communication skills
Social Outcomes
1. Reduced stereotypes and greater inter-cultural understanding
2. Improved social responsibility and citizenship skills
3. Greater involvement in community service after graduation
Career Development
1. Connections with professionals and community members for learning and career
opportunities
2. Greater academic learning, leadership skills, and personal efficacy can
lead to greater opportunity
Relationship with the Institution
1. Stronger relationships with faculty
2. Greater satisfaction with college
3. Improved graduation rates
BENEFITS OF COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT TO FACULTY MEMBERS
1. Satisfaction with the quality of student learning
2. New avenues for research and publication via new relationships between faculty and
community
3. Providing networking opportunities with engaged faculty in other disciplines or institutions
4. A stronger commitment to one’s research
BENEFITS OF COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT TO COLLEGES AND UNIVERSITIES
1. Improved institutional commitment
2. Improved student retention
3. Enhanced community relations
BENEFITS OF COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT TO COMMUNITY
1. Satisfaction with student participation
2. Valuable human resources needed to achieve community goals
3. New energy, enthusiasm and perspectives applied to community work
4. Enhanced community-university relations.
SUGGESTIVE LIST OF PROGRAMMES UNDER COMMUNITY SERVICE PROJECT
The following the recommended list of projects for engineering students. The lists are not
exhaustive and open for additions, deletions and modifications. Colleges are expected to focus
on specific local issues for this kind of projects. The students are expected to carry out these
projects with involvement, commitment, responsibility and accountability. The mentors of a
group of students should take the responsibility of motivating, facilitating, and guiding the
students. They have to interact with local leadership and people and appraise the objectives and
benefits of this kind of projects. The project reports shall be placed in the college website for
reference. Systematic, Factual, methodical and honest reporting shall be ensured.
For Engineering Students
1. Water facilities and drinking water availability
2. Health and hygiene
3. Stress levels and coping mechanisms
4. Health intervention programs
5. Horticulture
6. Herbal plants
7. Botanical survey
8. Zoological survey
9. Marine products
10. Aqua culture
11. Inland fisheries
12. Animals and species
13. Nutrition
14. Traditional health care methods
15. Food habits
16. Air pollution
17. Water pollution
18. Plantation
19. Soil protection
20. Renewable energy
21. Plant diseases
22. Yoga awareness and practice
23. Health care awareness programs and their impact
 24. Use of chemicals on fruits and vegetables
25. Organic farming
26. Crop rotation
27. Floury culture
28. Access to safe drinking water
29. Geographical survey
30. Geological survey
31. Sericulture
32. Study of species
33. Food adulteration
34. Incidence of Diabetes and other chronic diseases
35. Human genetics
36. Blood groups and blood levels
37. Internet Usage in Villages
38. Android Phone usage by different people
39. Utilization of free electricity to farmers and related issues
40. Gender ration in schooling level- observation.
Complementing the community service project, the students may be involved to
take up some awareness campaigns on social issues/special groups. The suggested list of
programs are;
Programs for School Children:
1. Reading Skill Programme (Reading Competition)
2. Preparation of Study Materials for the next class.
3. Personality / Leadership Development
4. Career Guidance for X class students
5. Screening Documentary and other educational films
6. Awareness Programme on Good Touch and Bad Touch (Sexual abuse)
7. Awareness Programme on Socially relevant themes.
Programs for Women Empowerment
1. Government Guidelines and Policy Guidelines
2. Women’s’ Rights
3. Domestic Violence
4. Prevention and Control of Cancer
5. Promotion of Social Entrepreneurship
General Camps
1. General Medical camps
2. Eye Camps
3. Dental Camps
4. Importance of protected drinking water
5. ODF awareness camp
6. Swatch Bharat
7. AIDS awareness camp
8. Anti-Plastic Awareness
9. Programs on Environment
10. Health and Hygiene
11. Hand wash programs
12. memoration and Celebration of important days
Programs for Youth Empowerment
1. Leadership
2. Anti-alcoholism and Drug addiction
3. Anti-tobacco
 4. Awareness on Competitive Examinations
5. Personality Development
Common Programs
1. Awareness on RTI
2. Health intervention programs
3. Yoga
4. Tree plantation
5. Programs in consonance with the Govt. Departments like –
i. Agriculture
ii. Health
iii. Marketing and Cooperation
iv. Animal Husbandry
v. Horticulture
vi. Fisheries
vii. Sericulture
viii. Revenue and Survey
ix. Natural Disaster Management
x. Irrigation
xi. Law & Order
xii. Excise and Prohibition
xiii. Mines and Geology
xiv. Energy
Role of Students:
1. Students may not have the expertise to conduct all the programmes on their own. The
students thencan play a facilitator role.
2. For conducting special camps like Health related, they will be coordinating with the
Governmental agencies.
3. As and when required the College faculty themselves act as Resource Persons.
4. Students can work in close association with Non-Governmental Organizations like Lions
Club, Rotary Club, etc or with any NGO actively working in that habitation.
5. And also, with the Governmental Departments. If the programme is rolled
out, the District Administration could be roped in for the successful deployment of the
programme.
6. An in-house training and induction programme could be arranged for the faculty and
participating students, to expose them to the methodology of Service Learning.

Timeline for the Community Service Project Activity

Duration: 8 weeks
1. Preliminary Survey (One Week)
a) A preliminary survey including the socio-economic conditions of the allotted habitation
to be conducted.
b) A survey form based on the type of habitation to be prepared before visiting the
habitation with the help of social sciences faculty. (However, a template could be
designed for different habitations, rural/urban.
c) The Governmental agencies, like revenue administration, corporation and municipal
authorities and village secretariats could be aligned for the survey.
2. Community Awareness Campaigns (Two Weeks)
Based on the survey and the specific requirements of the habitation, different
awareness campaigns and programmes to be conducted, spread over two weeks of time. The
list of activities suggested could be taken into consideration.
3. Community Immersion Programme (Four Weeks)
 Along with the Community Awareness Programmes, the student batch can also work
with any one of the below listed governmental agencies and work in tandem with them.
This community involvement programme will involve the students in exposing themselves
to the experiential learning about the community and its dynamics. Programmes could be
in consonance with the Govt. Departments.
4. Community Exit Report (One Week)
During the last week of the Community Service Project, a detailed report of the
outcome of the 8 weeks works to be drafted and a copy shall be submitted to the local
administration. This report will be a basis for the next batch of students visiting that
particular habitation. The same report submitted to the teacher-mentor will be evaluated by
the mentor and suitable marks are awarded for onward submission to the University.
Throughout the Community Service Project, a daily log-book need to be maintained by
the students batch, which should be countersigned by the governmental agency
representative and the teacher-mentor, who is required to periodically visit the students and
guide them.
Course Numbering Scheme
The Course number code consists of 11alphabets. A typical course number code is
illustrated in the followingFigure-1.
Mechanical Engineering (ME)

Figure 1: Course Numbering Scheme

The department codes are in given in following table 1.
Table 1: Department Codes
Department Two-character code
Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning AM
Civil Engineering CE
Electrical & Electronics Engineering EE
Mechanical Engineering ME
Electronics & Communications Engineering EC
Electronics & Communications Technology ET
Computer Science and Engineering
CA
(Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning)
Computer Science and Engineering
CI
(IoT and Cyber Security including Block Chain Technology)
Computer Science and Engineering (Data Science) CD
Computer Science and Engineering CS
 Computer Science and Technology CT
Information Technology IT
Management Science MS
Mathematics MA
Physics PH
Chemistry CH
English EG
Biology BI
Common to All Branches CM
Example: ED in 3rd semester for ECT with S. No. 3
Course Code: 21ETETT3030

Table-2: Comparison of Suggested breakup of Credits AICTE, APSCHE and SITE

Curriculum

No of Credits
S. No. Category Suggested by Suggested by Approved
AICTE APSCHE SITE-21
1 Humanities and Social Sciences 12 10.5 10.5
2 Basic Science Courses 25 21 21
3 Engineering Science Courses 24 24 24
4 Professional Core Courses 48 51 51
5 Professional Elective Courses 18 15 15
6 Open Elective Courses 18 12 12
7 Project Work, Seminar and Internship 15 16.5 16.5
8 Skill oriented Courses - 10 10
9 Mandatory Courses - - -
Total Credits 160 160 160

Malpractice
DISCIPLINARY ACTION FOR MALPRACTICES/IMPROPER CONDUCT IN
EXAMS
S. Nature of Malpractices/Improper
Punishment
No. conduct
If the candidate:
1. (a) Possesses or keeps accessible in Expulsion from the examination
examination hall, any paper, note book, hall and cancellation of the
programmable calculators, Cell phones, performance in that subject only.
pager, palm computers or any other form
of material concerned with or related to
the subject of the examination (theory or
practical) in which he is appearing but
has not made use of (material shall
include any marks on the body of the
candidate which can be used as an aid in
the subject of the examination)
1. Gives assistance or guidance or receives Expulsion from the examination
(b) it from any other candidate orally or by hall and cancellation of the
any other body language methods or performance in that subject only
 communicates through cell phones with of all the candidates involved. In
any candidate or persons in or outside the case of an outsider, he will be
exam hall in respect of any matter. handed over to the police and a
case is registered against him.
2. Has copied in the examination hall from Expulsion from the examination
any paper, book, programmable hall and cancellation of the
calculators, palm computers or any other performance in that subject and
form of material relevant to the subject of all other subjects the candidate
the examination (theory or practical) in has already appeared including
which the candidate is appearing. practical examinations and project
work and shall not be permitted to
appear for the remaining
examinations of the subjects of
that Semester/year.The Hall
Ticket of the candidate is to be
cancelled and sent to the
University.
3. Impersonates any other candidate in The candidate who has
connection with the examination. impersonated shall be expelled
from examination hall. The
candidate is also debarred and
forfeits the seat. The performance
of the original candidate who has
been impersonated, shall be
cancelled in all the subjects of the
examination (including practicals
and project work) already
appeared and shall not be allowed
to appear for examinations of the
remaining subjects of that
semester/year. The candidate is
also debarred for two consecutive
semesters from class work and all
University examinations. The
continuation of the course by the
candidate is subject to the
academic regulations in
connection with forfeiture of seat.
If the imposter is an outsider, he
will be handed over to the police
and a case is registered against
him.
4. Smuggles in the Answer book or Expulsion from the examination
additional sheet or takes out or arranges hall and cancellation of
to send out the question paper during the performance in that subject and
examination or answer book or additional all the other subjects the candidate
sheet, during or after the examination. has already appeared including
practical examinations and project
work and shall not be permitted
for the remaining examinations of
the subjects of that semester/year.
 The candidate is also debarred for
two consecutive semesters from
class work and all University
examinations. The continuation of
the course by the candidate is
subject to the academic
regulations in connection with
forfeiture of seat.
5. Uses objectionable, abusive or offensive Cancellation of the performance
language in the answer paper or in letters in that subject.
to the examiners or writes to the
examiner requesting him to award pass
marks.
6. Refuses to obey the orders of the Chief In case of students of the college,
Superintendent/Assistant – they shall be expelled from
Superintendent / any officer on duty or examination halls and
misbehaves or creates disturbance of any cancellation of their performance
kind in and around the examination hall in that subject and all other
or organizes a walk out or instigates subjects the candidate(s) has
others to walk out, or threatens the (have) already appeared and shall
officer-in charge or any person on duty in not be permitted to appear for the
or outside the examination hall of any remaining examinations of the
injury to his person or to any of his subjects of that semester/year.
relations whether by words, either spoken The candidates also are debarred
or written or by signs or by visible and forfeit their seats. In case of
representation, assaults the officer-in- outsiders, they will be handed
charge, or any person on duty in or over to the police and a police
outside the examination hall or any of his case is registered against them.
relations, or indulges in any other act of
misconduct or mischief which result in
damage to or destruction of property in
the examination hall or any part of the
College campus or engages in any other
act which in the opinion of the officer on
duty amounts to use of unfair means or
misconduct or has the tendency to disrupt
the orderly conduct of the examination.
7. Leaves the exam hall taking away answer Expulsion from the examination
script or intentionally tears of the script hall and cancellation of
or any part thereof inside or outside the performance in that subject and
examination hall. all the other subjects the candidate
has already appeared including
practical examinations and project
work and shall not be permitted
for the remaining examinations of
the subjects of that semester/year.
The candidate is also debarred for
two consecutive semesters from
class work and all University
examinations. The continuation of
the course by the candidate is
 subject to the academic
regulations in connection with
forfeiture of seat.
8. Possess any lethal weapon or firearm in Expulsion from the examination
the examination hall. hall and cancellation of the
performance in that subject and
all other subjects the candidate
has already appeared including
practical examinations and project
work and shall not be permitted
for the remaining examinations of
the subjects of that semester/year.
The candidate is also debarred
and forfeits the seat.
9. If student of the college, who is not a Student of the colleges expulsion
candidate for the particular examination from the examination hall and
or any person not connected with the cancellation of the performance in
college indulges in any malpractice or that subject and all other subjects
improper conduct mentioned in clause 6 the candidate has already
to 8. appeared including practical
examinations and project work
and shall not be permitted for the
remaining examinations of the
subjects of that semester/year.
The candidate is also debarred
and forfeits the seat.
Person(s) who do not belong to
the College will be handed over to
police and, a police case will be
registered against them.
10. Comes in a drunken condition to the Expulsion from the examination
examination hall. hall and cancellation of the
performance in that subject and
all other subjects the candidate
has already appeared including
practical examinations and project
work and shall not be permitted
for the remaining examinations of
the subjects of that semester/year.
11. Copying detected on the basis of internal Cancellation of the performance
evidence, such as, during valuation or in that subject and all other
during special scrutiny. subjects the candidate has
appeared including practical
examinations and project work of
that semester/year examinations.
12. If any malpractice is detected which is
not covered in the above clauses 1 to 11
shall be reported to the University for
further action to award suitable
punishment.
 MALPRACTICES
 The Principal shall refer the cases of malpractices in Continuous Evaluation and
Semester-End Examinations, to Malpractice Enquiry Committee, constituted by
him/her for the purpose. Such committee shall follow the approved scales of
punishment. The Principal shall take necessary action, against the erring students based
on the recommendations of the committee.
 Any action on the part of student at an examination trying to get undue advantage in
the performance or trying to help another, or derive the same through unfair means is
punishable according to the provisions contained hereunder. The involvement of the
Staff, who are in charge of conducting examinations, valuing examination papers and
preparing/keeping records of documents relating to the examinations in such acts
(inclusive of providing incorrect or misleading information) that infringe upon the
course of natural justice to one and all concerned at the examination shall be viewed
seriously and recommended for award of appropriate punishment after thorough
enquiry.

Ragging
Prohibition of ragging in educational institutions Act 26 of 1997 Salient Features
 Ragging within or outside any educational institution is prohibited.

 Ragging means doing an act which causes or is likely to cause Insult or Annoyance of
Fear or Apprehension or Threat or Intimidation or outrage of modesty or Injury to a
student.
LET US MAKE SITE RAGGING FREE INSTITUTE
Program Outcomes for an Engineering Graduates:
1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems
and design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with
appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and
research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data,
and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities
relevant to the professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and
need for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and
write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member
and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological
change.
COURSE STRUCTURE

SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
Mechanical Engineering

With effective from the

Academic Year
2021-22
 I B. Tech. I Semester Proposed Course Structure for the
Regulation SITE 21
S.
CC Course code Course Title L T P C
No.
1 BSC Engineering Mathematics – I 3 0 0 3
21CMMAT1010 (Calculus and Differential
Equations)
2 BSC 21EEPHT1020 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3
3 BSC 21CMCHT1030 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3
4 ESC Programming for Problem 3 0 0 3
21CMCST1040
Solving
5 ESC 21CMMEL1050 Engineering Graphics 2 0 2 3
6 BSC 21EEPHL1060 Engineering Physics Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 BSC 21CMCHL1070 Engineering Chemistry Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 ESC Programming for Problem 0 0 3 1.5
21CMCSL1080
Solving Lab
Constitution of India,
9 MC 2 0 0 0
21CMMSN1090 Professional Ethics &
Human Rights
TOTAL 16 0 11 19.5

I B. Tech. II Semester Proposed Course Structure for the

Regulation SITE 21
S. CC Course code Course Title L T P C
No.
1 HSC 21CMEGT2010 Technical English 3 0 0 3
2 Engineering Mathematics – II 3 0 0 3
(Linear algebra, Laplace
BSC 21CMMAT2020
Transforms and Numerical
Methods)
3 ESC 21CMEET2030 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 0 0 3
4 ESC 21CMCST2040 Python Programming 1 0 4 3
5 ESC 21EEMET2050 Engineering Mechanics 3 0 0 3
6 English Communication Skills 0 0 3 1.5
HSC 21CMEGL2060
Lab
7 Basic Electrical Engineering 0 0 3 1.5
ESC 21CMEEL2070
Lab
8 ESC 21CMMEL2080 Engineering Workshop Lab 0 0 3 1.5
9 MC 21CMCHN2090 Environmental Science 2 0 0 0
TOTAL 15 0 13 19.5
 II B. Tech. III Semester Proposed Course Structure for the
Regulation SITE 21
S.
CC Course Code Course Title L T P C
No.
Engineering Mathematics -III
1 BSC 21CMMAT3010 (Vector Calculus and Complex 3 0 0 3
Analysis)
2 ESC 21MEMET3020 Materials Engineering 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 21MEMET3030 Mechanics of Solids 3 0 3 3
4 PCC 21MEMET3040 Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
PCC Fluid Mechanics and Fluid
5 21MEMET3050 3 0 3 3
Machines
Mechanics of Solids &Materials
6 ESC 21MEMEL3060 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
PCC Fluid Mechanics and Fluid
7 21MEMEL3070 0 0 3 1.5
Machine s Lab
Computer Aided Engineering
8 SOC 21MEMES3080 1 0 2 2
Drawing and Drafting (CAEDP)
9 MC 21MEECN3090 Basic Electronics Engineering 3 0 0 0
Total 19 0 14 20
II B. Tech. IV Semester Proposed Course Structure for the
Regulation SITE 21
S.
CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
Engineering Mathematics –IV
21 CMMAT
1. BSC (Fourier series, Applications of 3 0 0 3
4010
PDE and Probability &
2. PCC Statistics)
21MEMET4020 Applied Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
3. PCC 21MEMET4030 Design of Machine Elements -I 3 0 0 3
4. PCC 21MEMET4040 Production Technology 3 0 0 3
5. PCC 21MEMET4050 Kinematics of Machinery 3 0 0 3
Engineering Economics and
6. HSC 21MEMST4060 3 0 0 3
Financial Management
7. PCC 21MEMEL4070 Thermal Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8. PCC 21MEMEL4080 Production Technology Lab 0 0 3 1.5
Computer Aided Three-
9. SOC 21MEMES4090 Dimensional Interactive 1 0 2 2
Application (CATIA)
10. Total 19 0 8 23
Honors/Minor courses (The
H/M hours distribution can be 3-0- 4 0 0 4
2 or 3-1-0 also)

III B. Tech. V Semester Course Structure for the

 Regulation SITE 21
S. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
1 PCC 21MEMET5010 Machine Tools and Metrology 3 0 0 3
2 PCC 21MEMET5020 Dynamics of Machinery 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 21MEMET5030 Design of Machine Elements- 3 0 0 3
II
4 PEC 21MEMEP504X Professional Elective-I 3 0 0 3
5 OEC 21MEXXO505X Open Elective Course-I 3 0 0 3
6 PCC 21MEMEL5060 Machine Tools and Metrology 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
7 PCC 21MEMEL5070 Theory of Machines Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 SOC 21CMAHS5080 Soft Skills & Aptitude Builder 1 0 2 2
-1
9 MC 21MEMEN5090 Machine Drawing Practice 0 0 3 0
Lab
Summer Internship (2
10 SI 21MEMER5100 months) after II year to be 0 0 0 1.5
evaluated during V semester
Total 16 0 11 21.5
Honors/Minor courses (The
11 H/M hours distribution can be 3- 4 0 0 4
0-2 or 3-1-0 also)

Professional Elective Course -I

S. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
Conventional and Non- 3 0 0 3
1 21MEMEP504A
Conventional Power Stations
2 21MEMEP504B Nano Technology 3 0 0 3
PEC Industrial Robotics with 3 0 0 3
3 21MEMEP504C
Artificial Intelligence
4 21MEMEP504D Advanced Materials 3 0 0 3
5 21MEMEP504E Industrial Management 3 0 0 3
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered

III B. Tech. VI Semester Course Structure for the

 Regulation SITE 21
S. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
1 PCC 21MEMET6010 CAD/CAM/CIM 3 0 0 3
2 PCC 21MEMET6020 Finite Element Methods 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 21MEMET6030 Heat Transfer 3 0 0 3
4 PEC 21MEMEP604X Professional Elective-II 3 0 0 3
5 OEC 21MEXXO605X Open Elective Course-II 3 0 0 3
6 PCCL 21MEMEL6060 CAD/CAM Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 PCCL 21MEMEL6070 Heat Transfer Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 PCCL 21MEMEL6080 Instrumentation and 0 0 3 1.5
Mechatronics Lab
9 SOC 21CMAHS6090 Soft Skills & Aptitude Builder - 1 0 2 2
2
10 MC 21CMBIN6100 Biology for Engineers 2 0 0 0
Research Internship - 2 Months (Mandatory) after Third year (to be
11 I/RI
evaluated during VII semester
Total 18 0 11 21.5
Honors/Minor courses (The
12 H/M hours distribution can be 3-0- 4 0 0 4
2 or 3-1-0 also)

Professional Elective-II
S. CC Subject Code Name of the subject L T P Cr
No.
1 21MEMEP604A Gas Dynamics and Jet 3 0 0 3*
Propulsion
2 21MEMEP604B Mechanical Vibrations 3 0 0 3*
3 21MEMEP604C Instrumentation and 3 0 0 3*
PEC
Mechatronics
4 21MEMEP604D Unconventional Machining 3 0 0 3*
Processes
5 21MEMEP604E Energy Management 3 0 0 3*
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered

IV B. Tech. VII Semester Course Structure for the

 Regulation SITE 21
S. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
1 PEC 21MEMEP701X Professional Elective-III 3 0 0 3
2 PEC 21MEMEP702X Professional Elective-IV 3 0 0 3
3 PEC 21MEMEP703X Professional Elective-V 3 0 0 3
4 OEC 21MEXXO704X Open Elective Course-III 3 0 0 3
5 OEC 21MEXXO705X Open Elective Course-IV 3 0 0 3
6 HSC 21MEMET7060 Operation Research 3 0 0 3
7 SOC 21MEMES7070 Modelling and Analysis (FEA) 1 0 2 2
Research Internship - 2 Months
(Mandatory) after Third year (to
8 I/RI 21MEMER7080 0 0 6 3
be evaluated during VII
semester
Total 19 0 8 23
Honors/Minor courses (The
9 H/M hours distribution can be 3-0-2 4 0 0 4
or 3-1-0 also)

Professional Elective Course -III

S. Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
CC
No.
1 21MEMEP701A Prime Movers for Automobiles 3 0 0 3
2 21MEMEP701B Mechanics of Composites 3 0 0 3
3 PEC 21MEMEP701C Non – Destructive Evaluation 3 0 0 3
4 21MEMEP701D Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 3 0 0 3
5 21MEMEP701E Product Design and Development 3 0 0 3
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered

Professional Elective Course -IV

S. Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
CC
No.
1 21MEMEP702A
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 3 0 0 3
2 21MEMEP702B
Synthesis and Characterization of 3 0 0 3
Materials
PEC
3 21MEMEP702C Smart Manufacturing and IIOT 3 0 0 3
4 21MEMEP702D Tribology 3 0 0 3
5 21MEMEP702E Hydrogen & Fuel Cells 3 0 0 3
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered

Professional Elective Course -V

S. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
1 PEC 21MEMEP703A Solar Energy Engineering and 3 0 0 3
 Applications
2 21MEMEP703B Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
3 21MEMEP703C Production Planning and Control 3 0 0 3
4 21MEMEP703D Machine Tool Design 3 0 0 3
5 21MEMEP703E Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered

IV B. Tech. II Semester Course Structure for the

Regulation SITE 21
S. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
1 Project 21MEMER8010 Project, Seminar and 0 0 0 12
Internship in Industry (6
months)
Total 0 0 0 12
Comparison of suggested breakup of AICTE, APSCHE and SITE21Curriculum
Credit Distribution for B.Tech. Mechanical Engineering Program
No. of Credits
S.No. Category Suggested by Proposed
APSCHE
AICTE SITE-21
1 Humanities and Social Sciences 9 10.5 10.5
2 Basic Science Courses 30 21 18
3 Engineering Science Courses 27 24 24
4 Professional Core Courses 50.5 51 54
5 Professional Elective Courses 18 15 15
6 Open Elective Courses 9 12 12
Project Work , Seminar and
7 15 16.5 16.5
Internship
8 Skill oriented Courses - 10 10
9 Mandatory Courses - - -
Total Credits 160 160 160

Semester Wise Number of Credits of AICTE, APSCHE and

SITE21Curriculum
CREDITS
SEMESTER
AICTE APSCHE JNTUK R20 SITE-21
I 17.5 19.5 19.5 19.5
II 20.5 19.5 19.5 19.5
III 23 21.5 21.5 20
IV 19 21.5 21.5 23
V 20.5 21.5 21.5 21.5
VI 21.5 21.5 21.5 21.5
VII 18.5 23 23 23
VIII 18 12 12 12
TOTAL 160 160 160 160
COURSE STRUCTUREAND
SYLLABUS
SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
I B.Tech. I Semester
Mechanical Engineering
 I B. Tech. I Semester Proposed Course Structure for the
Regulation SITE 21
S.
CC Course code Course Title L T P C
No.
1 BSC Engineering Mathematics – I 3 0 0 3
21CMMAT1010 (Calculus and Differential
Equations)
2 BSC 21EEPHT1020 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3
3 BSC 21CMCHT1030 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3
4 ESC Programming for Problem 3 0 0 3
21CMCST1040
Solving
5 ESC 21CMMEL1050 Engineering Graphics 2 0 2 3
6 BSC 21EEPHL1060 Engineering Physics Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 BSC 21CMCHL1070 Engineering Chemistry Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 ESC Programming for Problem 0 0 3 1.5
21CMCSL1080
Solving Lab
Constitution of India,
9 MC 2 0 0 0
21CMMSN1090 Professional Ethics &
Human Rights
TOTAL 16 0 11 19.5
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I
(Calculus & Differential Equations)
(Syllabus for the academic year 2021 -2022)
Common to all the branches
SEMESTER - I/I
Subject Code 21CMMAT1010/20 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
1. To solve the differential equations related to various engineering fields
2. To enlighten the learners in the concept of differential equations.
3. To familiarize with functions of several variables which is useful in
optimization
4. To solve the partial partial differential equations of first order
5. To apply double integration techniques in evaluating areas bounded by
region.
Unit -1
Differential Equations of first order and first degree:
Linear differential equations - Bernoulli’s equations – Exact Hours –
equations and Equations reducible to exact form. 10
Applications: Newton's law of cooling - Law of natural growth and
decay - Orthogonal trajectories.
Unit -2
Linear differential equations of higher order: Homogeneous and
Non-homogeneous differential equations of higher order with
Hours –
constant coefficients – with non-homogeneous term of the type eax,
10
sin ax, cos ax, polynomials in xn, eax V(x) and xn V(x) – Method of
Variation of parameters.
Applications: LCR circuit.
Unit – 3
Partial differentiation:
Introduction – Homogeneous function – Euler’s theorem– Total
Hours –
derivative– Chain rule– Jacobian – Functional dependence –Taylor’s
10
and MacLaurin’s series expansion of functions of two variables.
Applications: Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables
without constraints and Lagrange’s method.
Unit – 4
PDE of first order:
Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary Hours –
constants and arbitrary functions – Solutions of first order linear 08
(Lagrange) equation and nonlinear (standard types) equations.
Unit – 5
Multiple integrals: Double and Triple integrals – Change of order of Hours –
integration in double integrals – Change of variables to polar, 12
cylindrical and spherical coordinates.
Applications: Finding Areas and Volumes.
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students are able to
1. Solve the differential equations related to various engineering fields (L3)
2. Solve the differential equations of higher C order related to various
engineering fields (L3)
3. familiarize with functions of several variables which is useful in
optimization (L3)
4. Solve the partial partial differential equations of first order (L3)
5. Apply double integration techniques in evaluating areas bounded by
region (L3).
Question paper pattern:
1.Question paper consists of 10 questions.
2.Each full question carrying 14 marks.
3.Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a unit.
4.The student will have to answer 5 full questions selecting one full
question from each unit.
Text Books:
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 44th Edition, Khanna
Publishers.
2. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 2007 Edition, Tata Mc.
Graw Hill Education.
Reference Books:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th Edition, Wiley-
India.
2. Joel Hass, Christopher Heil and Maurice D. Weir, Thomas calculus,
14thEdition, Pearson.
3. Lawrence Turyn, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, CRC Press, 2013.
4. Srimantha Pal, S C Bhunia, Engineering Mathematics, Oxford University
Press.
 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
(Introduction to Mechanics)
(Common for ME & CE in I-Semester)
21CEPHT1020
Subject Code IA Marks 30
21MEPHT1020
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objectives of this course, help the students
 To explore the knowledge of fundamental vibrations.
 To impart the concept of Newton’s law of motion in central force
field.
 To enable the students to understand the Rigid body dynamics.
 To study the structure- property relationship exhibited by solid
materials with in the elastic limits.
Unit -1
One Dimensional motion: Newton’s Equation of motion in one
dimension-examples of particle falling under a gravity, Simple
harmonic motion (Mechanical oscillator) and its characteristics, Hours
damped harmonic motion (Mechanical oscillator) and damping – 11
conditions (over-damped, critically damped and under damped
conditions), Forced oscillations (Mechanical oscillator) - un
damped and damped conditions, Resonance.
Unit -2
Two dimensional motions: Two-Dimensional motion in the
Cartesian coordinate system – Example of Projectile motion
without air drag; Two-Dimensional motion in Radial polar Hours
coordinate system- Example of planetary motion, Kepler’s laws – 11
and their deduction, Newton equations for variable mass system
(rocket), Calculations of Centre of mass and its characteristics.
Unit -3
Conservative & Non-Conservative motion: Invariance of
Newton’s equations-Under shift of coordinate system - Galileo
transformation - Accelerating frames of reference, Reference Hours
frame rotating with a constant angular velocity, Centrifugal –9
Force-Apparent gravitational acceleration, Coriolis force -Effect of
Coriolis force on a freely falling body. Conservative and Non-
Conservative forces.
Unit – 4
Rigid body dynamics: Angular momentum of a single particle
and system of particle, conservation of angular momentum;
Equation of motion of a rigid body; Kinetic energy of a rigid
Hours
rotating body; Moment of Inertia, Calculations of moment of
– 10
inertia-rectangular lamina and Uniform cylinder (rod, circular
disc); Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem and
their applications; Euler’s equation describing rigid body motion.
Unit – 5
Elasticity: Stress, Strain, Hook’s law, stress strain curve,
generalized Hook’s law with and without thermal strains for
isotropic materials, Factors affecting the elastic behavior, energy Hours
stored per unit volume in stretched wire, different types of –9
moduli and their relations, bending of beams, Bending moment
of a beam, Depression of cantilever.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will able to
1. Distinguish the various harmonic motions and resonance.
2. Apply Newton’s law of motion to understand the motions of
mechanical systems.
3. Verify the invariance of Newton’s equation of motion.
4. Understand the concept of conservative and non-conservative
motions.
5. Formulate the rigid body dynamics.
6. Study the structure- elastic property correlation under load within
the elastic limits.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. It will have 5 questions with internal choice.
2. Each question carries 14 marks.
3. Each full question comprises sub questions covering all topics
under a unit.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Introduction to Mechanics — MK Verma.
2. A Text Book of Engineering Physics- M.N.Avadhanulu, 11e ,
S.CHAND,
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. S.L Gupta& D.L. Gupta, Unified physics
2. An Introduction to Mechanics — D Kleppner & R Kolenkow
3. Principles of Mechanics — JL Synge & BA Griffiths.
4. Engineering Physics- Ch. Srinivas, Ch. Sesubabu Cengage learning.
WEB SOURCES:
W1: http://www.physics.org/news.asp
W2: http://www.phys.lsu.edu/newwebsite/lecturedemo/
W3: http://www.nptl.ac.in
W4: American Association of Physics Teachers [ http://www.aapt.org/ ]
 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
SEMESTER - I/I
Subject Code 21CMCHT1030/ IA Marks 30
2030
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 48 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objectives of this course, help the students to
1. Explain the mechanism of corrosion
2. Interpret various boiler troubles and importance of water quality
standards.
3. Learn preparation of semiconducting materials, nanomaterials and
liquid crystals – their applications
4. Acquire knowledge on nonconventional energy resources and
different types of batteries
5. Know various spectroscopic techniques.
6. Acquire knowledge on volumetric analysis.
Module-1
ELECTROCHEMISTRY AND CORROSION
Electro chemistry: Introduction, electrode potential, standard
electrodes – Hydrogen and Calomel electrodes, Nernst equation
and applications.
Hours –9
Corrosion: Introduction, Mechanism of Wet chemical
corrosion, control methods – proper designing, cathodic
protection- Sacrificial anodic and impressed current cathodic
protection.
Module -2
WATER CHEMISTRY AND SURFACE PROPERTIES
Water chemistry: Surface and subsurface water quality
parameters – turbidity, pH, total dissolved salts, chloride
content, Hardness of water, Temporary and Permanent
hardness, Units, determination of hardness by complexometric Hours –9
method. Boiler troubles, Caustic Embrittlement, Priming and
foaming, Boiler corrosion. Break point chlorination.
Surface properties: Determination of surface tension and
viscosity of liquids.
Module -3
MATERIAL CHEMISTRY
Non-elemental semiconducting materials: Stoichiometric,
controlled valency and chalcogen photo/semiconductors and
preparation of semiconductors (distillation, zone refining,
Czochralski crystal pulling, epitaxy, diffusion and ion
Hours –
implantation).
10
Liquid crystals: Introduction, types and applications.
Nanoparticles: Introduction, preparation methods – Sol-gel
method, Chemical reduction method – Preparation of carbon
nanotubes (Arc discharge, chemical vapour deposition and
laser ablation methods) properties and applications.
Module – 4
ENERGY SOURCES:
Non-conventional energy sources,
Design, working, schematic diagram, advantages and
disadvantages of photovoltaic cell,hydropower, geothermal
Hours –
power, tidal and wave power, ocean thermal energy conversion.
10
Batteries and fuel cells: Primary and secondary batteries -
Dry cell, Lead Acid Cell, Lithium-ion battery and Zinc air cells
and fuel cells - H2-O2, CH3OH-O2, Phosphoric acid and molten
carbonate.
Module – 5
SPECTROSCOPY AND CHROMATOGRAPHY TECHNIQUES
Regions of electromagnetic spectrum - Principles of vibrational
and rotational spectroscopy. Vibrational and rotational
spectroscopy of diatomic molecules: Rigid diatomic molecules -
Hours –
selection rule - simple Harmonic Oscillator - diatomic vibrating
10
rotator. Nuclear magnetic resonance –
Principle and Instrumentation.
Principles of chromatography – Thin Layer & Paper
Chromatography.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will be able to
1. Interpret the mechanism of corrosion
2. Summarize the problems faced in industries due to boiler troubles.
3. Recall the properties and applications of advanced materials.
4. Summarize the advantages of non-conventional energy resources
and batteries.
5. Able to gain knowledge on spectroscopic techniques and the ranges
of the electromagnetic spectrum used for exciting different molecular
energy levels.
6. Determine the strength of acid, base and some elements by
 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING
SEMESTER - I/I

volumetric and instrumental analysis.

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. It will have 5 questions with internal choice.
2. Each question carries 14 marks.
3. Each full question comprises sub questions covering all topics under
a unit.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. P.C. Jain and M. Jain “Engineering Chemistry”, 15/e, Dhanpat Rai
& Sons,Delhi,
2. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cambridge University
Press, (2019)
3. S.S. Dara, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S.Chand & Co,
(2010).
4. Shashi Chawla, “Engineering Chemistry”, Dhanpat Rai Publicating
Co. (Latest edition).
5. Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, by C. N. Banwell.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. K. Sesha Maheshwaramma and Mridula Chugh, “Engineering
Chemistry”, Pearson India Edn.
2. O.G. Palana, “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw Hill
Education Private Limited, (2009).
3. CNR Rao and JM Honig (Eds) “Preparation and characterization of
materials” Academic press, New York (latest edition)
Subject Code 21CMCST1040 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The Objectives of Programming for problem solving are:
 To learn about C programming language syntax, semantics, and the
runtime environment.
 To be familiarized with general computer programming concepts like
data types, conditional statements, loops and functions.
 To be familiarized with general coding techniques and procedure-
oriented programming.

Unit -1
History& Hardware: (TB 1: 1-22) Computer Hardware,
Components, Types ofSoftware, Memory Units.
Introduction to Problem solving:(TB1:33-50) Algorithm,
Characteristics of Algorithms, Basic Operations of
Algorithms, Pseudo Code, Flowchart, Types of Languages, Hours –
Relation between Data, Information, Input and Output. 11
Basics of C: (TB1:58-67) History and Features of C,
Importance of C, Procedural Language, Compiler versus
Interpreter, Structure of C Program, Program Development
Steps, Programming Errors.

Unit -2
Overview of C:(TB:68-125) Character Set, C-Tokens, Data
Types, Variables, Constants, Operators, Operator Precedence
and Associativity, Converting Mathematical Expressions to
C-expressions, Evaluation of C-Expressions,
Input/Output Functions.
Hours –
Conditional Branching:(TB1:143-152) if statement, if...else
11
statement, Nested if...else statement, if…else…if ladder, switch
statement.
Unconditional Branching:(TB1:174-175) goto. Control flow
Statements: break, continue.
Looping Constructs:(TB1:156-170) do-while statement, while
statement, for statement.

Unit -3
Arrays:(TB1:188-222) Introduction, 1-D Arrays,
Character arrays and string representation, 2-D Arrays
(Matrix), Multi-Dimensional Arrays.
Strings: Working with Strings, String Handling Functions (both
Hours – 9
library and user defined).
Functions:(TB1:230-260) Basics, Necessity and Advantages,
Types of Functions, Parameter Passing Mechanisms, Recursion,
Storage Classes, Command Line Arguments, Conversion from
Recursion to Iteration and Vice-Versa.
Unit – 4
Pointers:(TB1:288-347) Understanding Pointers, Pointer
Expressions, Pointer and Arrays, Pointers and Strings, Pointers
to Functions. Dynamic Memory Allocation:
Introduction to Dynamic Memory Allocation- malloc (), calloc (),
realloc (), free ().
Structures and Unions:(TB1:370-394) Defining a Structure, Hours –
typedef, Advantage of Structure, Nested Structures, Arrays of 10
Structures, Structures and Arrays, Structures and Functions,
Structures and Pointers, Defining Unions, Union with in Union,
Structure within Union, Union within Structure,
Self-Referential Structures, Bitfields, Enumerations.
Unit – 5
Preprocessing Directives:(TB2:325-333) Macro Substitution,
File Inclusion, Conditional Compilation and Other Directives
File Management In C:(TB1:408-422) Introduction to File Hours –9
Management, Modes and Operations on Files, Types of Files,
Error Handling during I/O Operations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student can able to
1. Demonstrate computer components, algorithms, translate them into programs.
2. Choose the suitable control structures for the problem to be solved.
3. Make use of arrays, pointers, structures, and unions effectively.
4. Organize reusable code in a program into functions.
5. Demonstration of file operations.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. It will have 5 questions with internal choice.
2. Each question carries 14 marks.
3. Each full question comprises sub questions covering all topics under a
unit.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Programming in C ,Pradip Dey ,Manas
ENGINEERING Ghosh, OXFORD
GRAPHICS
2. Programming in ,C Reema SEMESTER - I/I Edition, OXFORD
Thareja,Second
3. Programming
Subject Code for Problem Solving, Behrouz A. Forouzan,
21CMMEL1050 IA Marks Richard 30
F.Gilberg, CENGAGE.
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 2(L)+02(P) Exam Marks 70
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
1. Computer Fundamentals Credits
and Programming,
– 03 Sumithabha Das, Mc
Graw Hill.
2. Programming in C, Ashok N. Kamthane, Amit Kamthane, Pearson.
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to
1. construct polygons, scales, engineering curves (parabola, ellipse,
hyperbola, cycloids, involutes)
2. draw orthographic projections of points, lines and planes.
3. draw the orthographic projections of simple solids
4. draw sectional views of solids
5. convert given isometric view into orthographic view and vice versa using
AutoCAD software.
Unit -1
Introduction to Engineering Drawing covering Principles of
Engineering Graphics and their significance, usage of drawing
Hours
instruments, lettering, Conic sections – Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola
– 10
(Eccentricity method only); plain Cycloid, and Involutes; Scales –
Plain and Vernier scales only.

Unit -2
Projections of Points, Projections of straight lines and the line Hours
inclined to both planes; Projections of planes (inclined to one –8
reference plane only).
Unit -3
Projections of regular polyhedrons – tetrahedron, hexahedron,
Hours
octahedron (axis inclined to one reference plane only).
–8
Projections of irregular polyhedrons – Prisms, Pyramids, Cones and
Cylinders (axis inclined to one reference plane only).
Unit – 4
Sectional Views of Right Angular Solids covering Prism, Cylinder, Hours
Pyramid and Cone – 12
Unit – 5
Introduction to AutoCAD - The Menu System, Toolbars (Standard,
Object Properties, Draw, Modify and Dimension Tools), Drawing Area
(Background, Crosshairs, Coordinate System), Dialog boxes and
Windows. Isometric Projections, Principles of Isometric projection – Hours
–12
Isometric Scale, Isometric Views, Conventions; Isometric Views of
lines, Planes, Simple and compound Solids; Conversion of Isometric
Views to Orthographic Views and Vice-versa.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the successful completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Construct polygons, scales and engineering curves
2. Draw the orthographic views of points, lines and planes
3. Construct the projections of regular and irregular polyhedrons
4. Draw the sectional views of solids
5. Draw isometric/orthographic views using AutoCAD
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
 1. It will have 5 questions with internal choice.
2. Each question carries 14 marks.
3. Each full question comprises sub questions covering all topics under a
unit.
TEXT/REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. N.D. Bhatt, Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publications
2. R.B.Choudary, Engineering Drawing, Anuradha Publishers
3. Agarwal & Agarwal, Engineering Drawing , Tata McGraw Hill Publishers
4. K.L.Narayana & P.Kannaiah, Engineering Drawing Scitech Publishers
5. K.C. John, Engineering Graphics for Degree, PHI Publishers
6. PI Varghese, Engineering Graphics, McGrawHill Publishers
7. K Venugopal, V. Prabhu Raja, Engineering Drawing + AutoCAD, New
Age

ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB

(Common for ME & CE in I-Semester)
21MEPHL1060
Subject Code IA Marks 15
21CEPHL1060
Number of Practice Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Practice Hours 36 Exam Hours 03
 Credits – 1.5
TEXT BOOKS:
1. “Physics Laboratory Manual” Prepared by Department of Physics,
SITE.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objectives of this course, help the students
 To apply the theoretical knowledge of Physics through hands on
the experimental instruments
 To improve the experimental knowledge in the later studies
 To understand the basic need of experiments.
 To know how to measure the different physical quantities.
 To acquire ability to use instrumentation techniques.
 To train the students to develop techniques based on the
principles related to various devices or components.
List of Experiments
1. Investigation of the Motion of Coupled Oscillators.
2. Determination of the rigidity modulus  of wire-Torsional
pendulum.
3. Determination of acceleration due to gravity g and radius of
gyration K - Compound pendulum.
4. Determination of the Frequency of an electrically maintained
tuning fork by Melde’s Experiment.
5. Determination of the velocity of sound in air-Volume resonator.
6. Verification of the laws of transverse vibrations of stretched wire.
7. Determination of the Young’s modulus and draw load depression
graph in uniform bending.
8. Determination of the Moment of Inertia of a Flywheel.
9. Verification of the parallel axis and perpendicular axis theorems
and determine the moment of inertia of a regular rectangular body
-Bifilar pendulum.
10. Determination of the frequency of the AC Source using
Sonometer.
Demonstration experiments:
1. Determination of Young’s Modulus, Modulus of rigidity and
Poisson’s ratio of the material of a given wire by Searle’s dynamical
method
2. Study of the variation of moment of inertia of a system with the
variation in the distribution of mass and hence to verify the
theorem of parallel axes (Maxwell’ needle method).
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. S. Balasubrahmanian, M.N. Srinivasan ‘’A Text book of Practical
Physics’’- S. Chand Publishers, 2017.
2. Advanced Practical Physics Vol 1& 2 SP Singh & M.S Chauhan Pragati
Prakashan, Meerut.
WEB SOURCES:
1. http://vlab.amrita.edu/index.php -Virtual Labs, Amrita University
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will able to
1. Compare the theory and correlated with experiments
2. Design experiments
3. Analyze the experimental result
4. Apply appropriate techniques to perform the experiments
5. Apply the knowledge in simple harmonic motions and resonance to
understand the rigid body dynamics.
6. Verify the parallel axis and perpendicular theorems of moment of
inertia.
 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
SEMESTER - I/I
21CMCHL1070/
Subject Code IA Marks 15
2070
Number of Practice Hours/Week 3 Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Practice Hours 36 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 1.5
List of Experiments
(Any 10 experiments must be conducted)
1. Determination of HCl using standard Na2CO3 solution
2. Determination of alkalinity of a sample containing Na2CO3 and
NaOH
3. Determination of surface tension
4. Determination of viscosity of a liquid by Ostwald viscometer
5. Determination of chloride content of water
6. Determination total hardness of water by EDTA.
7. Determination of Mg+2using standard oxalic acid solution.
8. Determination of Cu+2using standard hypo solution.
9. Determination of the rate constant of first order reaction (Ester
hydrolysis)
10. Determination of strength of strong acid using
conductometeric titration.
11. Determination of strength of weak acid using
conductometeric titration .
12. Determination of Ferrous iron using potentiometer.
13. Chemical oscillations- Iodine clock reaction
14. Estimation of Vitamin C.
Demonstration Experiments
1. Thin Layer Chromatography
2. Determination of Fe+3by a colorimetric method.
 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING LAB
SEMESTER - I/I
Subject Code 21CMCSL1080 IA Marks 15
Number of Practice 03 Exam Marks 35
Hours/Week
Total Number of Practice Hours 48 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objectives of this course, help the students
1. To understand the various steps in Program development.
2. To understand the basic concepts in C Programming Language.
3. To learn how to write modular and readable C Programs.
4. To learn to write programs (using structured programming
approach) in C to solve problems.
5. To introduce basic data structures such as lists, stacks and
queues.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Exercise 1 (Familiarization with programming environment)
a) Familiarization of CODE BLOCKS C++ Editor to edit, compile,
execute, test and debugging C programs.
b) Familiarization of RAPTOR Tool to draw flow charts and
understand flow of control.
c) Acquaintance with basic LINUX commands.
Exercise 2 (Simple computational problems using arithmetic
expressions)
a) Write a C Program to display real number with 2 decimal places.
b) Write a C Program to convert Celsius to Fahrenheit and vice versa.
c) Write a C Program to calculate the area of triangle using the
formula
area = √ ( s(s−a)( s−b)(s −c ) where s=a+b+c/2.
d) Write a C program to find the largest of three numbers using
ternary operator.
e) Write a C Program to swap two numbers without using a
temporary variable.
Exercise 3 (Problems involving if-then-else structures)
a) Write a C Program to check whether a given number is even or
odd using bitwise operator, shift operator and arithmetic operator.
b) Write a C program to find the roots of a quadratic equation.
c) Write a C Program to display grade based on 6 subject marks
using if…else…if ladder.
d) Write a C program, which takes two integer operands and one
operator form the user, performs the operation and then prints
the result using switch control statement.(Consider the operators
 +, -,*,/, %)
Exercise 4 (Iterative problems)
a) Write a C Program to count number of 0’s and 1’s in a binary
representation of a given number.
b) Write a C program to generate all the prime numbers between two
numbers supplied by the user.
c) Write a C Program to print the multiplication table corresponding
to number supplied as input
Exercise 5 (Iterative problems)
a) Write a C Program to Find Whether the Given Number is
i)Armstrong Number ii)
Palindrome Number
b) Write a C Program to print sum of digits of a given number
Exercise 6 (Series examples)
a) Write a C Program to calculate sum of following series
b) 1+2+3+…. n b)1+1/2+1/3+……+1/n c)1+x+x2+x3……+xn
Exercise 7 (1D Array manipulation)
a) Write a C program to interchange the largest and smallest
numbers in the array.
b) Write a C program to search an element in an array (linear
search).
c) Write a C Program to print the following pattern using a character
array SA SAS
SASI
Exercise 8 (Matrix problems, String operations)
a) Write a C program to add two matrices.
b) Write a C program to multiply two matrices if they are compatible
or print an error message “incompatible matrix sizes” otherwise.
c) Write a C program to check given matrix is symmetric or not.
d) Implement the following string operations with and without library
functions. i)copy
ii) concatenate iii) lengthiv) compare
Exercise 9 (Simple functions)
a) Write a C Program demonstrating the following function types
i. With arguments and with return value.
ii. With arguments and without return value.
iii. Without arguments and without return
value.
iv. Without arguments and with return value.
b) Write a C Program illustrating call by reference.
Exercise 10 (Recursive functions)
Write a C Program illustrating the following with Recursion without
Recursion
a) Factorial b) GCD c) Power d) Fibonacci
Exercise 11(Pointers and structures)
 a) Write a C program to find sum of n elements entered by user. To
perform this program, allocate memory dynamically using malloc ()
function.
b) Write a C program to find sum of n elements entered by user. To
perform this program, allocate memory dynamically using calloc ()
function.
Note: Understand the difference between the above two programs.
c)Write a C Program to read and print student details using
structures.
Exercise 12 (File operations)
a) Write a C program to open a file and to print it contents on
screen.
b) Write a C program to copy files.
c)Write a C program merges two files onto a new file.
d)Write a C program to delete a file.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Attain knowledge on using CODE BLOCKS and RAPTOR tools in
solving problems.
2. Examine and analyze alternative solutions to a problem.
3. Design an algorithmic solution to a problem using problem
decomposition and step- wise refinement.
4. Demonstrate conversion of iterative functions to recursive and
vice-versa.
5. Implement the concepts of arrays, structures, Unions and files.
Text Books:
1. Computer Programing ANSI C, E Balagurusamy, Mc
Graw Hill Education (Private), Limited
2. Programming in C, ReemaThareja, Second Edition, Oxford Higher
Education
Reference Books:
1. Computer Basics and C Programming, V Raja Raman, Second
Edition, PHI (RB1)
 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA, PROFESSIONAL ETHICS & HUMAN
RIGHTS
SEMESTER - I/I
Subject Code 21CMMSN1090 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objectives of this course help the students to
1. To provide basic information about Indian constitution.
2. To identify individual role and ethical responsibility towards society.
3. To understand human rights and its implications.
Unit - I
Introduction to the Constitution of India, The Making of the
Hours –
Constitution and Salient features of the Constitution.
10
Preamble to the Indian Constitution Fundamental Rights &
its limitations.
Unit - II
Directive Principles of State Policy & Relevance of Directive
Hours –
Principles State Policy Fundamental Duties.
10
Union Executives – President, Prime Minister Parliament
Supreme Court of India.
Unit – III
State Executives – Governor, Chief Minister, State Legislature
Hours –
High Court of State. Electoral Process in India, Amendment
10
Procedures, 42nd, 44th, 74th, 76th, 86th &91st
Amendments.
Unit –IV
Special Provision for SC & ST Special Provision for Women,
Children & Backward Classes Emergency Provisions.
Human Rights –Meaning and Definitions, Legislation Specific
Hours –
Themes in Human Rights- Working of National Human
10
Rights Commission in India
Powers and functions of Municipalities, Panchyats and Co -
Operative Societies.
Unit – V
Scope & Aims of Engineering Ethics, Responsibility of
Engineers Impediments to Responsibility. Hours –
Risks, Safety and liability of Engineers, Honesty, Integrity & 10
Reliability in Engineering.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will
1. Have general knowledge and legal literacy and thereby to take up
competitive examinations.
2. Understand state and central policies, fundamental duties.
3. Understand Electoral Process, special provisions.
4. Understand powers and functions of Municipalities, Panchayats
and Co-operative Societies, and
5. Understand Engineering ethics and responsibilities of Engineers
6. Understand Engineering Integrity & Reliability
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. It will have 5 questions with internal choice.
2. Each question carries 14 marks.
3. Each full question comprises sub questions covering all topics
under a unit.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Durga Das Basu: “Introduction to the Constitution on India”,
(Students Edn.) Prentice –Hall EEE, 19th / 20th Edn., 2001
2. Charles E. Haries, Michael S Pritchard and Michael J. Robins
“Engineering Ethics” Thompson Asia, 2003-08-05.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. M.V.Pylee, “An Introduction to Constitution of India”, Vikas
Publishing, 2002.
2. M.Govindarajan, S.Natarajan, V.S.Senthilkumar, “Engineering
Ethics”, Prentice –Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2004
3. Brij Kishore Sharma, “Introduction to the Constitution of
India”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.
4. Latest Publications of Indian Institute of Human Rights, New Delhi
COURSE STRUCTUREAND
SYLLABUS
SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
I B.Tech. II Semester
Mechanical Engineering
 I B. Tech. II Semester Proposed Course Structure for the
Regulation SITE 21
S. CC Course code Course Title L T P C
No.
1 HSC 21CMEGT2010 Technical English 3 0 0 3
2 Engineering Mathematics – II 3 0 0 3
(Linear algebra, Laplace
BSC 21CMMAT2020
Transforms and Numerical
Methods)
3 ESC 21CMEET2030 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 0 0 3
4 ESC 21CMCST2040 Python Programming 1 0 4 3
5 ESC 21EEMET2050 Engineering Mechanics 3 0 0 3
6 English Communication Skills 0 0 3 1.5
HSC 21CMEGL2060
Lab
7 21CMEEL2070 Basic Electrical Engineering 0 0 3 1.5
ESC
Lab
8 ESC 21CMMEL2080 Engineering Workshop Lab 0 0 3 1.5
9 MC 21CMCHN2090 Environmental Science 2 0 0 0
TOTAL 15 0 13 19.5
 TECHNICAL ENGLISH
(Approved Syllabus for the Academic Year 2021-22
Semester I/II
21CMEGT
Subject Code IA Marks 30
1010/ 2010
Number of Lecture Hours/ Week 03 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exams Hours 03
Credits -03
Course Objectives:
To enable the students to learn and apply fundamental principles in
Technical English & Communication by focusing on:
1. Technical English Vocabulary
2. Writing Skills
3. Common Errors in Writing
4. Nature and Style of Sensible Technical Writing
5. Writing Technical Reports and Letters
Unit I
Principles of Scientific Vocabulary
 Principles of Scientific vocabulary: short and simple words-
compact substitutes for wordy phrases- redundant words
10
and expressions-Avoid hackneyed and stilted phrases,
hours
verbosity and incorrect use of words
 The role of roots in word building, prefixes and suffixes,
confusing words and expressions.
Unit II
Writing Skills
 Distinguishing between academic and personal styles of
writing
10
 Use of clauses in technical phrases and sentences
hours
 Techniques of Sentence and paragraph writing
 Measuring the clarity of a text through Fog Index or Clarity
Index
Unit III
Common Errors in Writing
 Subject-verb agreement and concord of nouns, pronouns
and possessive adjectives
 Common errors in the use of articles, prepositions, adjectives 10
and adverbs hours
 Punctuation
 Technical Guidelines for Communication
 Avoiding the pitfalls
Unit IV
Nature and Style of Sensible Technical Writing 10
 Academic Writing Process hours
  Describing, processes and products
 Defining, Classifying
 Effective use of charts, graphs, and tables
Unit V
Report writing and Letter writing
 Writing Technical Reports
10
 Précis writing
Hours
 Letter Writing
 Essay writing
COURSE OUTCOMES
On Completion of the course student will acquire
1. Ability to understand Scientific vocabulary and use them confidently
2. Familiarity with the basic principles of writing clear sentences and
paragraphs
3. Ability to write error free simple technical passages
4. Knowledge of writing different writing styles
5. Confidence to write letters and technical reports clearly and
coherently
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN
Section –A
1. 10 questions carrying one mark each
2. Five questions each from Units I and III
Section –B
1. 5 questions carrying 12 marks each (one compulsory question from
non-detailed text)
2. Each question will have two or three sub questions covering all the
units
TEXT BOOKS
1. Effective Technical Communication by Barun K Mitra, Oxford
University Publication
Non-detailed Text
1. Karmayogi: A Biography of E Sreedharan by M S Ashokan
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Communication Skills by Sanjay Kumar & Pushpa Latha, OUP
2. Study Writing by Liz Hamp-Lyons and Ben Heasly, Cambridge
University Press.
3. Remedial English Grammar by F T Wood, Macmillian 2007
4. Practical English Usage by Michael Swan Oxford University Press
5. English Collocations in Use by Michael McCarthy & Felicity O’Dell
6. Effective Technical Communication by Arsahf Rizvi,
7. Essential English Grammar by Raymond Murphy, CUP, 2017
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II
(Linear algebra, Laplace transforms & Numerical Methods)
SEMESTER - I/II
Subject Code 21CMMAT2020 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course objectives:
To enable students to apply the knowledge of Mathematics in various
engineering
fields by making them to learn the following’
1. To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by
engineers for practical applications and solve system of linear
equations
2. To find the inverse and power of a matrix by Cayley-Hamilton
theorem and reduce the Quadratic form
3. To solve initial value problems by using Laplace transforms
4. To find the solution of algebraic/ transcendental equations and
also interpolate the functions.
5. To apply different algorithms for approximating the solutions of
ordinary differential equations with initial conditions to its
analytical computations.
Unit -1
Solving systems of linear equations: Rank of a matrix by
echelon form and normal form – Solving system of homogeneous 10
and non homogeneous linear equations – Gauss Elimination Hours
method- Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel methods for solving system of
equations numerically.
Unit -2
Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Cayley–Hamilton theorem
and Quadratic forms: Eigen values and Eigen vectors and
properties- Cayley-Hamilton theorem (without proof) – Reduction 10
to Diagonal form – Quadratic forms and nature of the quadratic Hours
forms – Reduction of quadratic form to canonical forms by
orthogonal transformation, Diagonalisation and Lagrange’s
reduction
Unit – 3
Laplace Transforms: Laplace transforms – Definition and
Laplace transforms of some certain functions– Shifting theorems
– Transforms of derivatives and integrals – Unit step function – 10
Dirac’s delta function Periodic function – Inverse Laplace Hours
transforms– Convolution theorem (without proof).
Applications: Solving ordinary differential equations (initial value
problems) using Laplace transforms.
Unit – 4
Numerical Methods: Introduction - Method of false position -
Newton-Raphson method (One Variable) Introduction– Errors in
polynomial interpolation – Finite differences– Forward 10
differences– Backward differences –Central differences – Hours
Relations between operators – Newton’s forward and backward
formulae for interpolation – Interpolation with unequal intervals –
Lagrange’s interpolation formula.
Unit – 5
Numerical integration, Solution of ordinary differential
equations with initial conditions: Trapezoidal rule - Simpson’s 10
1/3rd and 3/8th rule - Solution of initial value problems by Hours
Taylor’s series– Picard’s method of successive approximations–
Euler’s method – Runge -Kutta method (second and fourth order).
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students are able to,
1. Develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by
engineers for practical applications and solve system of linear
equations (L6)
2. Find the inverse and power of a matrix by Cayley-Hamilton
theorem and reduce the Quadratic form (L3)
3. Solve initial value problems by using Laplace transforms (L3)
4. Find the solution of algebraic/ transcendental equations and also
interpolate the functions(L3)
5. Apply different algorithms for approximating the solutions of
ordinary differential equations with initial conditions to its
analytical computations (L3).
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper consists of 10 questions.
2. Each full question carrying 14 marks.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under
a unit.
4. The student will have to answer 5 full questions selecting one full
question from each unit.
Text Books:
1. B. S. Grewal," Higher Engineering Mathematics", Khanna
publishers, 44th Edition, 2016.
2. Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics " - Wiley, 9th Edition,
2013.
3. B.V.Ramana "Higher Engineering M athematics" Tata Mc Graw-Hill,
2006
Reference Books:
1. Dr.K.V.Nageswara Reddy and Dr.B.Rama Bhupal Reddy,
“Engineering Mathematics, Volume II” Scitech Publications, 2017.
2. Steven C. Chapra, Applied Numerical Methods with MATLAB for
 Engineering and Science, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 4th Edition,
2018
3. M. K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar and R.K. Jain, Numerical Methods for
Scientific and Engineering Computation, New Age International
Publications, 3rd Edition, 2020.
4. Lawrence Turyn, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, CRC Press,
1st Edition 2014.
 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
SEMESTER I/II
Common for ECE, CSE, IT/ CE, EEE, ME, ECT, CST, AI & ML
Subject Code 21CMEET1030 IA Marks
30
/2030
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3L + 1T Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits-03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This course will enable student to
1. Understand basic electrical circuit operation.
2. Understand the concept of Alternating Voltage and Current.
3. Understand the operation of DC machines.
4. Understand the working of measuring instruments.
5. Understand the operation of different types of ac machines.
6. Understand the concept of Electrical Safety.
Unit -1
Basic Electrical Circuits:
Basic definitions (Electric Charge, Current, Electro Magnet
Force, Potential Difference; Electric Power and Energy) – types
of network elements – Ohm’s Law – Kirchhoff’s Laws –series & Hours –
parallel circuits - network theorems (Super position, 10
Thevinen’s, Norton’s, Maximum power transfer theorems)
Unit -2
AC Fundamentals & Basic Electromagnetic Laws:
Study of AC Voltage and Current, RMS and Average Values,
Three phase Star-Delta connections, Alternating Voltage Hours –
applied to Pure Resistance, Inductance, Capacitance and their 10
combinations, Concept of Power and Power Factor in AC
Circuit.
Concept of Magnetic Field, Magneto Motive Force (MMF),
Permeability; Self and Mutual Induction, Basic
Electromagnetic laws,
Unit – 3
DC Machines:
DC Machine -Principle of operation & construction – emf
equation- torque equation - speed control methods – losses Hours –
and efficiency – brake test. applications of DC motors. 10
Unit – 4
AC Machines:
Single Phase Transformers - Construction and Operation-
Principles - Classification - Applications-OC & SC test of
single phase transformer-regulation & Efficiency. Hours –
Three Phase Induction Motors: working principle- 10
construction, speed- torque characteristics-losses and
efficiency.
Unit – 5
Electrical Safety: Electrical Shock and Precautions against
it, Treatment of Electric Shock; Concept of Fuses and Their Hours –
Classification, Selection and Application; Concept of 10
Earthing.
Course Outcomes: The student should be able to
1. Understand basic electrical circuit operation.
2. Understand the concept of Alternating Voltage and Current.
3. Understand the operation of DC machines.
4. Understand the working of measuring instruments.
5. Understand the operation of different types of ac machines.
6. Understand the concept of Electrical Safety.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper consists of 10 questions.
2. Each full question carrying 14 marks.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a
unit.
4. The student will have to answer 5 full questions selecting one full
question from each unit.
Text Books:
1. Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology by John Bird, Routledge
Taylor &Francis Group.
2. Principles of Electrical Machines by V.K. Mehta & Rohit Mehta,
S.Chand and Company Limited.
Reference Books:
1. Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines by J.B. Gupta,
S.K.Kataria & Sons.
2. A Textbook of Electrical Technology – Volume II: AC & DC Machines
by B.L.Theraja & A.K. Theraja, S.Chand and Company Limited.
3. Basic Electrical Engineering by Nagsarkar, Sukhija, Oxford
Publications, 2nd edition.
4. Basic Electrical Engineering by M.S.Naidu and S.Kamakshiah, TMH
Publications
5. Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering by Rajendra Prasad, PHI
Publications, 2nd edition.
6. Electrical Technology by Surinder Pal Bali, Pearson Publications.
 PYTHON PROGRAMMING
SEMESTER I/II
Subject Code 21CMCST2040 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits-03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The Objectives of Python Programming are:
 To learn about Python programming language syntax, semantics,
and the runtime environment.
 To be familiarized with general computer programming concepts like
data types, conditional statements, loops and functions.
 To be familiarized with general coding techniques and object-
oriented programming and Graphical User Interfaces.
Unit -1
Introduction:(TB1:22-30, TB2:1.1-1.4, TB2:1.21-1.33)
Introduction to Python, Program Development Cycle, Input,
Processing, and Output, Displaying Output with the Print
Function, Variables, Reading Input from the Keyboard, Hours –
Operators. 10
Data Types, and Expression: (TB1:41-59) Strings
Assignment, and Comment, Numeric Data Types andCharacter
Sets, Type conversions, Expressions, Using functions and
Modules.
Decision Structures and Boolean Logic:(TB1:77-85) if, if-
else, if-elif-else Statements, Nested Decision Structures,
Comparing Strings, Logical Operators, Boolean Variables.

Unit -2
Control Statement:(TB1:65-72, TB1:86-91)
Definite iteration for Loop Formatting Text for output, Selection
if and if else Statement Conditional Iteration, The While Loop, Hours –
Nested Loops. 10
Strings and Text Files:(TB1:103-125) Accessing Character
and Substring in Strings, Data Encryption, Strings and
Number Systems, String Methods, Text Files.
Unit – 3
List and Dictionaries:(TB1:135-145, TB1:153-158) Lists,
Tuples, Sets, Dictionaries.
Design with Function:(TB1:146-149, TB1:169-190) Hours –
Functions as Abstraction Mechanisms, Problem Solving with 10
Top-Down Design, Design with Recursive Functions, Case
Study Gathering Information from aFile System. Modules:
(TB2:8.1-8.5) Modules, Standard Modules, Packages.

Unit – 4
File Operations:(TB1:122-123)Reading config files in python,
Writing log files in python, Understanding read functions,
read(), readline() and readlines(), Understanding write
functions, write() and writelines().Object Oriented Hours –
Programming:(TB2:5.1-5.20, TB2:6.1-6.17) Concept of class, 10
object and instances, Constructor, class attributes and
destructors, Inheritance.
Design with Classes:(TB1:294-301, TB1:309-330) Objects
and Classes, Data modeling Examples, Case Study an ATM.

Unit – 5
Errors and Exceptions:(TB2:7.1-7.8) Syntax Errors,
Exceptions, Handling Exceptions, Raising Exceptions, User- Hours –
defined Exceptions, Defining Clean-up Actions, Redefined 10
Clean-up Actions.
Graphical User Interfaces:(TB1:245-288) The Behavior of
Terminal Based Programs and GUI -Based,Programs, Coding
Simple GUI-Based Programs, Other Useful GUI Resources.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course student will able to learn
1. Explain the fundamental concepts in the Python language.
2. Implementation of python iterative statements and strings.
3. Demonstrate python lists, dictionaries, and functions.
4. Understand the concepts of modules and packages in python.
5. Complete coding challenges related to object-oriented programming.
6. Apply variety of error handling and GUI programming techniques.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper consists of 10 questions.
2. Each full question carrying 14 marks.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a
unit.
4. The student will have to answer 5 full questions selecting one full
question from each unit.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Python First Programs, Kenneth. A. Lambert,
Cengage.
2. Python Programming: A Modern Approach, Vamsi Kurama, Pearson.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Introduction to Python Programming, Gowrishankar.S, Veena A,
CRC Press.
2. Introduction to Programming Using Python, Y. Daniel Liang,
Pearson.
E-RESOURCES:
https://www.tutorialspoint.com/python3/python_tutorial.pdf

ENGINEERING MECHANICS
SEMESTER I/II
Subject Code 21CMMET2050 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits - 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
On successful completion of the course, the students should be able to
1. understand the effect of forces and moments on the solid rigid bodies
2. analyze static problems using free body diagrams by considering friction.
3. locate centroid and calculate moment of inertia for different cross
sections.
4. calculate velocity and acceleration of particles having rectilinear motion
and rotation
5. analyze dynamic problems using work energy method and impulse-
momentum method.
Unit -1 Teaching
Hours
Introduction to engineering mechanics: Basic terminologies
in mechanics, laws of mechanics, characteristics of force,
system of force. Resultant system of forces: Resolution of
forces, method of composition of forces, resultant of coplanar
concurrent force system, moment of a force and couple. 10 Hours
Friction: Frictional force, laws of Coulomb friction, angle of
friction, limiting friction and angle of repose, problems on
blocks resting on horizontal and inclined planes.

Unit -2
Equilibrium of system of forces: Equilibrium of a rigid body
subjected to coplanar concurrent forces and coplanar non-
concurrent forces, free body diagrams, Lami’s theorem, 9 Hours
equilibrium of connected bodies.

Unit – 3
Centroid and centre of gravity: Centre of gravity, centroid,
use of axis symmetry determination of centroid of simple
figures from first principles, centroid of composite sections.
Moment of inertia: Moment of inertia, polar moment of
inertia, theorems of moment of inertia, moment of inertia of 12 Hours
rectangle, triangle, circle, semi circle, quarter circle from first
principles, moment of inertia of L, T and I sections only. Mass
moment of inertia, radius of gyration, mass moment of inertia
of uniform rod, rectangular plate and circular plate only.
Unit-4
Kinematics: General principles in dynamics, types of motion,
rectilinear motion, motion curves, motion with uniform
velocity, motion with uniform acceleration, motion with varying
acceleration, angular motion, relationship between linear and
10 Hours
angular motions.
Kinetics: Bodies in rectilinear translation, kinetics of bodies
rotating about fixed axes, Newton’s second law of motion, D-
Alembert’s principle.
Unit - 5
Work-Energy Method: Equation of Translation, work energy
application to particle motion, connected system - Fixed axis 9 Hours
rotation and plane motion, Impulse momentum method.
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of this course, students will be able to
1. determine resultant force and moment for different force systems.
2. analyse the rigid bodies associated with frictional forces using
conditions of equilibrium
3. locate the centroid / center of gravity and determine the moment of
inertia of plane sections/solids.
4. understand the behaviour of moving bodies in rectilinear motion and
solve kinematic equations of motion curves.
5. solve the problem using work energy method and impulse momentum
method.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper consists of 10 questions.
2. Each full question carrying 14 marks.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a
unit.
4. The student will have to answer 5 full questions selecting one full
question from each unit.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.S. Bhavikatti and K.G. Rajashekarappa, Engineering Mechanics2.
N.H. Dubey, Engineering Mechanics, Mc Graw Hill, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1 F. L. Singer, Engineering Mechanics, Harper–Collins, 1994
 ENGLISH & COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB
Semester I/II

Subject Code 21CMEGL1050/ IA Marks 15

2. B. Bhattacharya, Engineering Mechanics, Oxford University Press, 2008

3. A.K.Tayal, Engineering Mechanics, Umesh Publications, 2012.
4. R.K.Bansal, Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publications, 1996.
5. R.K.Rajput, A Text book of Applied Mechanics, Laxmi Publications,
2011.
6. S.Timoshenko and D.H.Young, Engineering Mechanics, 4th Ed. 7.
A.Nelson, Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, TMG,
WEB REFERENCES
W1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses
W2. http://learnmech.com/
 2050

Number of Practical Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 35

Total Number of Practical Hours 36 Exam Hours 03

Credits – 1.5

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to learn communication skills of Listening,
Speaking, Reading and Writing by focusing on:
 Listening Comprehension
 Pronunciation
 Functional English in formal and Informal Situations
 Interpersonal Communication Skills
 Presentations

List of Experiments
UNIT I Listening Comprehension
UNIT II Pronunciation, Stress, Intonation & Rhythm
UNIT III Common Everyday Situations: Conversations & Dialogues;
Communication at Workplace: Job Application letter, Email &
Resume
UNIT IV Interpersonal Communication Skills-
UNIT V Formal Presentations

COURSE OUTCOMES:
By the end of the course the students will be able to acquire basic
Proficiency in English by practicing the following:
1. Listening Comprehension
2. Pronunciation
3. Dialogues
4. Interpersonal Communication Skills
5. Presentations

LEARNING RESOURCES:
1. Interact – English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students by Orient
Black Swan
2. Ted Talks, Interviews with Achievers and select movies
3. Toastmaster’s speeches and table topics
4. Book Reviews and movie reviews
5. Exercises in Spoken English Parts: I-III, CIEFL, Hyderabad.
6. Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking by John Seely
7. https://www.ted.com/talk
 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
SEMESTER I/II
Common for ECE, CSE, IT/ CE, EEE, ME, ECT, CST, AI & ML
Subject Code 21CMEEL1070 IA Marks 15
/2070
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3P Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 36 Exam Hours 03
Credits-1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This course will enable the student to
1. Verify the Kirchoff’s laws, network theorems for a given circuit.
2. Analyze the performance of DC shunt generator.
3. Control the speed of DC motor.
4. Predetermine the efficiency DC machine.
5. Analyze performance of three phase induction motor.
6. Determine the regulation of an alternators.
List of Experiments (Any ten experiments must be conducted)
1. Verification of Kirchoff’s laws.
2. Verification of Thevenin’s Theorem.
3. Verification of Norton’s Theorem.
4. Verification of Superposition theorem.
5. Verification of Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.
6. Speed control of D.C. shunt motor.
7. Brake test on DC shunt motor.
8. Calibration of wattmeter.
9. OC & SC tests on single-phase transformer.
10. Brake test on 1-phase Induction motor.
11. Brake test on 3-phase Induction motor.
12. Study experiment on Ear thing.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will be able to:
1. Verify the Kirchoff’s laws.
2. Verify network theorems for a given circuit.
3. Control the speed of DC motor.
4. Analyze performance of single-phase induction motor
5. Analyze performance of three phase induction motor.
6. Identify different types of earthings
 WORKSHOP PRACTISE LABORATORY
Subject Code 21CMMEL2080 IA Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week L (0) +T(0) +P(3) Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 36 Exam Hours 3
Credits – 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course students should be able to
1. Learn basic use of hand tools along with the techniques and methods
applicable to the carpentry trade
2. Learn basic use of hand tools along with the techniques and methods
applicable to the fitting trade
3. Learn basic use of hand tools along with the techniques and methods
applicable to the forging trade
4. Learn basic use of hand tools along with the techniques and methods
applicable to the casting trade
5. Learn basic use of hand tools along with the techniques and methods
applicable to the welding trade
EXPERIMENTS
1. Preparation of T Lap joint using carpentry.
2. Preparation of Cross Lap joint using carpentry.
3. Preparation of Square fit using mild steel specimen.
4. Preparation of V fit using mild steel specimen.
5. Conversion of round rod to square rod by forging operation.
6. Preparation of S hook by forging operation.
7. Preparation of green sand mould for a single piece pattern
8. Preparation of green sand mould for a split piece pattern
9. Preparation of a Butt joint using arc welding
10. Preparation of a Lap joint using arc Welding
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENTS
1. Preparation of electrical wiring connections using wiring (one lamp
controlled by one switch)
2. Preparation of house wiring (stair case wiring)
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. perform the joinery work of wooden pieces using carpentry.
2. perform the joinery work of metallic pieces using fitting.
3. produce the required shaped metallic products using black smithy.
4. make the green sand moulds using different patterns
5. fabricate different components using welding.
 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Subject Code 21CMCHN1090/2090 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 2 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 32 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objectives of this course, help the students to
1. Acquire knowledge on global environmental challenges.
2. Learn different types of natural resources
3. Create awareness on biodiversity and ecology.
4. Gain scientific knowledge on environmental pollution
5. Acquire knowledge on water conservation methods and environmental
legislation
Module -1
MULTIDISCIPLINARY NATURE OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Environment - Definition, Introduction - Scope and Importance - Hours –
Global environmental challenges, global warming & climate change 6
- Acid rains, ozone layer depletion - Role of Information Technology
in Environment and human health.
Module -2
NATURAL RESOURCES
Renewable and non-renewable resources – Natural resources and
associated problems –
Forest resources – Use, deforestation - Timber extraction – Mining,
dams and other effects on forest and tribal people
Water resources – Floods, drought, , dams – benefits and problems
Hours –6
Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of
extracting and using mineral resources.
Food resources: Effects of modern agriculture - fertilizer-pesticide
problems, water logging, eutrophication, biological magnification
and salinity.
Energy resources: Renewable and non-renewable energy resources
Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources.
Module – 3
ECOSYSTEM AND BIODIVERSITY
Ecosystem - Concept of an ecosystem. - Structure and function of
an ecosystem. - Producers, consumers and decomposers. - Energy
flow in the ecosystem - Food chains, food webs and ecological
Hours –8
pyramids. - Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure
and function of the Forest and grassland ecosystem.
Biodiversity - Introduction - Definition: genetic, species and
ecosystem diversity. – Value of biodiversity: consumptive use,
productive use, social, ethical and optional values - Hot-spots of
biodiversity - Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss - Endangered and
endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and
Ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.
Module – 4
ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION
Definition, Cause, effects and control measures of :
a. Air pollution
b. Water pollution
c. Soil pollution
Hours –6
d. Noise pollution
e. Nuclear hazards
Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of
urban and industrial wastes - Role of an individual in prevention of
pollution.
Module – 5
SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Urban problems related to energy -Water conservation, rain water
harvesting, Resettlement and rehabilitation of people its problems
Hours –6
and concerns. Environment Protection Act - Air (Prevention and
Control of Pollution) Act. – Water (Prevention and control of
Pollution) Act -Wildlife Protection Act -Forest Conservation Act .
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will be able to
1. Obtain knowledge on global warming & climate change - Acid rains,
ozone layer depletion.
2. Preserve several natural resources
3. Summarize the concept of ecosystem
4. Control different types of pollution
5. Understand social issues and environmental legislation

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

1. Question paper consists of 10 questions.
2. Each full question carrying 14 marks.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a
unit.
4. The student will have to answer 5 full questions selecting one full
question from each unit.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. E. Bharucha (2003), “Environmental Studies”, University Publishing
Company, New Delhi.
2. J.G. Henry and G.W. Heinke (2004), “Environmental Science and
Engineering”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
3. G.M. Masters (2004)” Introduction to Environmental Engineering and
 Science”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Text Book of Environmental Studies by Deeksha Dave & P. Udaya
Bhaskar, Cengage Learning.
2. Environmental Studies by K.V.S.G. Murali Krishna, VGS Publishers,
Vijayawada.
3. Environmental Studies, P.N. Palaniswamy, P. Manikandan, A. Geeta and
K. Manjula Rani, Pearson Education, Chennai.
COURSE STRUCTURE AND
SYLLABUS
SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
II B.Tech. III Semester
Mechanical Engineering
 II B. Tech. III Semester Proposed Course Structure for the
Regulation SITE 21
S.
CC Course Code Course Title L T P C
No.
Engineering Mathematics -III
1 BSC 21CMMAT3010 (Vector Calculus and Complex 3 0 0 3
Analysis)
2 ESC 21MEMET3020 Materials Engineering 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 21MEMET3030 Mechanics of Solids 3 0 3 3
4 PCC 21MEMET3040 Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
PCC Fluid Mechanics and Fluid
5 21MEMET3050 3 0 3 3
Machines
Mechanics of Solids &Materials
6 ESC 21MEMEL3060 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
PCC Fluid Mechanics and Fluid
7 21MEMEL3070 0 0 3 1.5
Machine s Lab
Computer Aided Engineering
8 SOC 21MEMES3080 1 0 2 2
Drawing and Drafting (CAEDP)
9 MC 21MEECN3090 Basic Electronics Engineering 3 0 0 0
Total 19 0 14 20
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III
(Vector Calculus and Complex analysis)
SEMESTER - III
Subject Code 21CMMAT3010/20 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To Interpret the physical meaning of different operators such as gradient, curl
and divergence.
2. To Estimate the work done against a field, verify integral theorems.
3. To apply Cauchy-Riemann equations to complex functions in order to
determine whether a given continuous function is analytic
4. To find the differentiation and integration of complex functions used in
engineering problems.
5. To make use of the Cauchy residue theorem to evaluate certain integrals.
Unit -1
Vector Differentiation: Gradient– Directional derivative – 10
Divergence – Curl - Scalar Potential.
Unit -2
Vector Integration: Line integral - Work done – Area - Surface and
volume integrals – Vector integral theorems: Greens, Stokes and 10
Gauss Divergence theorems (without proof) and problems on above
theorems.
Unit – 3
Function of a complex variable
Introduction –continuity –differentiability- analyticity – properties –
10
Cauchy –Riemann equations in Cartesian and polar coordinates.
Harmonic and conjugate harmonic functions – Milne – Thompson
method.
Unit – 4
Integration and series expansions
Complex integration: Line integral – Cauchy’s integral theorem,
Cauchy’s in integral formula, generalized integral formula (all 10
without proofs) Radius of convergence – expansion in Taylor’s series,
Maclaurin’s series and Laurent series.
Unit – 5
Singularities and Residue Theorem
Zeros of an analytic function, Singularity, Isolated singularity,
Removable singularity, Essential singularity, pole of order m, simple
pole, Residues, Residue theorem, Calculation of residues, Residue at 10
a pole of order m, Evaluation of real definite integrals: Integration
around the unit circle, Integration around semi-circle.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, students are able to
1. Interpret the physical meaning of different operators such as gradient, curl
and divergence(L5)
2. Estimate the work done against a field, and verify integral theorems (L5)
3. apply Cauchy-Riemann equations to complex functions in order to determine
whether a given continuous function is analytic (L3)
4. find the differentiation and integration of complex functions used in
engineering problems(L3)
5. Make use of the Cauchy residue theorem to evaluate certain integrals (L3)
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
Question paper consists of 10 questions.
1. Each full question carrying 14 marks.
2. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a unit.
3. The student will have to answer 5 full questions selecting one full question
from each unit.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 44th Edition, Khanna
Publishers.
2. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 2007 Edition, Tata Mc. Graw
Hill Education.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th Edition, Wiley-India.
2. Srimantha Pal, S C Bhunia, Engineering Mathematics, Oxford University
Press.
3. J. W. Brown and R. V. Churchill, Complex Variables and Applications, 9th
edition,
4. N.P.Bali and Manish Goyal, "A text book of Engineering mathematics”, Laxmi
publications, 7th Edition.
5. H.K. Dass and Er. Rajnish Verma, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", S.Chand
publishing, 1st edition, 2011.
 MATERIALS ENGINEERING
SEMESTER-III
Subject code 21MEMET3020 Internal marks 30
Number of lecture hours/Week 3(L) External marks 70
Total No Of lecture hours 50 Exam hours 03
Credits-03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Enable the students to
1. Classify different bonds in solids and understand crystallization of the metals
for the formation of the solid solutions and alloy phases.
2. Understand about phase diagrams to identify the number and their variations
of phases in Metallographic Structure.
3. Recognize the property requirements of a given application and suggest a
suitable ferrous and non-ferrous metal and their alloys.
4. Understand about various heat treatment processes and its microstructure
formation.
5. Understand the need for different polymers, ceramics and composites and their
uses in the engineering field.
Unit-1 Hours
Structure of metals: Bonds in Solids – Metallic bond -
crystallization of metals, grain and grain boundaries, effect of grain
boundaries on the properties of metal / alloys – determination of
grain size. 8
Constitution of alloys: Necessity of alloying, types of solid
solutions, Hume Rothery’s rules, intermediate alloy phases,
ductility, resilience, toughness and elastic recovery
Unit-2
Phase Diagrams: Methods of construction of equilibrium diagrams,
Isomorpous alloy systems, equilibrium cooling and heating of
alloys, lever rule, eutectic systems, congruent melting intermediate
phases, peritectic reaction Transformations in the solid state – 10
allotropy, eutectoid, peritectoid reactions, phase rule, relationship
between equilibrium diagrams and properties of alloys. Study of
important binary phase diagrams of Fe-Fe3C.
Unit-3
Cast Irons: Structure and properties of white cast iron, malleable
cast iron, grey cast iron, spheroid graphite cast iron, alloy cast
irons.
Non-ferrous metals and alloys: Classification of steels, structure
12
and properties of plain carbon steels, low alloy steels, Hadfield
manganese steels, tool and die steels. Structure and properties of
copper and its alloys, Aluminum and its alloys, Titanium and its
alloys
Unit-4
Heat Treatments: Annealing, normalizing, hardening, TTT
diagrams, tempering, hardenability, surface-hardening methods
(carburizing, carbo-nitriding, cyaniding, induction hardening and 10
flame hardening), age hardening treatment, and cryogenic
treatment of alloys. vacuum and plasma hardening.
Unit-5
Ceramics, Polymers and composites: Crystalline ceramics,
glasses, cermets, abrasive materials, nano materials –properties
and applications. Classification, properties and applications of
10
composites, Reinforced materials, fiber reinforced materials, metal
ceramic mixtures, metal matrix composites. Structure, properties,
and applications of polymers.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. understand the basic crystal structures and their relationship with the
properties
2. Identify the phases, present in different alloy systems by analyzing the phase
diagrams
3. understand the structure and properties of cast iron and nonferrous metals
and alloys
4. Analyze various heat treatment process to change in physical properties in
metals
5. Student is able to Know the structure and properties of different polymers,
ceramic and composite materials
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 questions,2 from each course outcomes,
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal choice)
3. All question carries 14 marks each
4. Each full question will have subquestion covering all topics under a course
outcome
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy, Sidney H. Avener, McGrawHill
2. Essential of Materials Science and Engineering, Donald R. Askeland, Thomson
3. Materials Science and Metallurgy, R.B.Choudary, Khanna Publishers
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Material Science and Metallurgy – V.D.Kodgire and S.V.Kodgire, Everest
PublishingHouse
2. Materials Science and Engineering - Callister &Baalasubrahmanyam, Willey
publications
3. Material Science for Engineering Students, Fischer, Elsevier Publishers

MECHANICS OF SOLIDS
SEMESTER - III
Subject Code 21MEMET3030 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture
3(L) External Marks 70
Hours/Week
Total Number of
50 Exam Hours 03
Lecture Hours
Credits – 03
Course Objectives: Students should be able to
1. Calculate the stress and strain developed in any structural member due to
applied external load.
2. Analyze the principal stress and principal strain at a point of a stressed
member and draw shear force diagram and bending moment diagram for
different types of beams under various loading and support conditions
3. Analyze shear stress distribution in solid members and Determine section
modulus for various beam cross-sections
4. Calculate the slope, deflection and torsion at a specified point of a beam and
design shafts subjected to different loads.
5. Analyze thin and thick shells under different pressure conditions
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Stress and strain definitions, types of stresses and
strains, elasticity and plasticity. Hooke’s law, stress-strain diagrams for
10
engineering materials, modulus of elasticity. Poisson’s ratio, relationship
between elastic constants, linear and volumetric strains, bars of uniform
strength, temperature stresses, compound bars.
Unit -2
Compound stresses, principal stresses and strains. Mohr’s circle of
stresses
10
Beams: Shear force and bending moment; relationship between intensity
of loading, shear force and bending moment; bending moment and shear
force diagrams for cantilever, simply supported beams.
Unit – 3
Theory of Bending: Simple theory of bending, moment of resistance,
modulus of section.
10
Shear Stresses in Beams: Distribution of shear stresses in rectangular,
triangular, circular, I and T-sections.

Unit – 4
Slopes and Deflections: Slope and deflection measurements of
cantilever, simply supported beams with Macaulay’s and double
integration methods subjected to point loads and uniformly distributed
loads. 10
Torsion: Derivation of torsion formula for circular section, torsional
stresses, angle of twist, power transmission, effect of combined bending
and torsion.
Unit – 5
Cylinders: Stresses in thin and thick cylinders with internal and 10
external pressures. Hoop and longitudinal stresses in cylinders, stresses
in compound cylinders.
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students able to
1. Estimate the stress and strain developed in any structural member due to
applied external load.
2. Analyze the principal stress and principal strain at a point of a stressed
members and draw shear force diagram and bending moment diagram for
different types of beams under various loading and support conditions
3. Analyze shear stress distribution in solid members and calculate section
modulus for various beam cross-sections
4. Calculate the slope, deflection and torsion at a specified point of a beam
under different loads
5. Analyze thin and thick cylinders under different boundary conditions
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carry 14 marks each
Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
TEXT BOOKS
1. S. S. Bhavikatti, Strength of Materials, Second Edition, Vikas Publishing
House (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2002
2. R.K. Rajput, Strength of Materials, Revised Edition, S. Chand & Co., New
Delhi, 2007
REFERENCES BOOKS
1. R.K. Bansal, Introduction to Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications, 2004
2. B.C. Punmia, A. K.Jain, and A. K. Jain, Strength ofMaterials and Theory of
Structures, Vols. I & II, XIEdition, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd, New Delhi,
2002.
3. E. J. Hearn, Strength of Materials, Pergamon Press,Oxford, 1997
 THERMODYNAMICS
SEMESTER III
Subject Code 21MEMET3040 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Enable the students to
1. Gain the knowledge on the fundamentals of thermodynamics and temperature
scales.
2. Apply First law of thermodynamics to various thermal engineering devices.
3. Understand the direction of second law of thermodynamics and concept of
increase in entropy of universe.
4. Develop an idea on properties during various phases of pure substances using
steam tables, Mollier chart and psychometric charts.
5. Acquire the knowledge of thermodynamics to air standard cycles, vapour
power cycle and the properties of gas mixtures.
Unit -1 Teaching
Hours
Introduction: Basic Concepts Fundamentals - System &
Control volume; Property, State & Process; Exact & Inexact
differentials; Work - Thermodynamic definition of work;
examples; Displacement work; Path dependence of displacement Hours – 10
work and illustrations for simple processes; various forms of
work. Temperature, Definition of thermal equilibrium and Zeroth
law; Temperature scales; Various Thermometers.
Unit -2
First Law of Thermodynamics: Definition of heat; examples of
heat/work interaction in systems- First Law for Cyclic & Non-
cyclic processes; Concept of total energy-Demonstration as a
property; Various modes of energy, Internal energy and
Enthalpy. First Law for Flow Processes - Derivation of general
Hours – 10
energy equation for a control volume; Steady state steady flow
processes including throttling; Examples of steady flow devices;
Unsteady processes; examples of steady and unsteady, first law
applications for system and control volume. Compressibility
charts- Properties of two-phase systems.
Unit – 3
Second law of Thermodynamics: Definitions of direct and
reverse heat engines; Definitions of thermal efficiency and COP;
Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statements; Definition of reversible
process; Internal and external irreversibility; Carnot cycle; Hours – 12
Absolute temperature scale.
Clausius inequality: Definition of entropy; Demonstration that
entropy is a property; Principle of increase of entropy;
Illustration of processes in T-S coordinates;
Irreversibility and Availability: Availability function for
systems and Control volumes undergoing different processes,
Second law analysis for a control volume and energy balance
equation.
Unit – 4
Pure Substance: Definition of Pure substance, - Const.
temperature and Const. pressure heating of water; Definitions of
saturated states; P-v-T surface; Use of steam tables and R134a
Hours – 08
tables; Saturation tables; Superheated tables; Identification of
states & determination of properties, Mollier’s chart.
Determination of entropy from steam tables
Unit-5
Mixtures of Perfect Gases: Ideal Gases and ideal gas mixtures,
Real gases and real gas mixtures and Basics of compressible
flow.
Thermodynamic Cycles: Otto, Diesel, Dual Combustion cycles,
Sterling Cycle, Atkinson Cycle, Ericcson Cycle, Lenoir Cycle –
Description and representation on P–V and T-S diagram, Hours – 10
Thermal Efficiency, Mean Effective Pressures on Air standard
basis – comparison of Cycles. Brayton and Rankine cycles –
Performance Evaluation-improving methods – combined cycles,
Bell- Coleman Cycle, Vapour compression cycle-performance
Evaluation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Identify type of thermodynamic systems in the energy perspective.
2. Solve the practical thermodynamic problems by applying first law and steady
flow energy equation.
3. Analyze the problems on heat engines, refrigeration and entropy by applying
direction of second law and illustrate the concept of entropy by using second
law of thermodynamics.
4. Calculate the thermodynamic properties of the pure substances.
5. Measure the performance of air standard cycles and vapor power cycle and
analyze the properties of gas mixtures.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Engineering Thermodynamics, PK Nag 4thEdn, TMH.
2. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics- Sonntag, R. E, Borgnakke, C. and Van
 Wylen, G. J, 2003, 6th Edition, John Wiley and Sons.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Engineering Thermodynamics – Jones & Dugan PHI
2. Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach with student resources DVD
Y.A.Cengel & M.A.Boles , 6thEdn – McGraw Hill
3. Basic Engineering Thermodynamics – A.Venkatesh – Universities press.
4. An Introduction to Thermodynamics – Y.V.C.Rao – Universities press.
5. Engineering Thermodynamics – P.Chattopadhyay – Oxford Higher Edn Publ.
6. Engineering Thermodynamics – D.P.Misra, CengagePubl.
 FLUID MECHANICS AND FLUID MACHINES
SEMESTER - III
Subject Code 21MEMET3050 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
1. Understand the fundamental properties of fluid and calculate fluid pressure
using the manometer.
2. Apply the differential conservation equations of mass, momentum, and energy
to fluid flow problems.
3. Evaluate major and minor losses in pipes and also discuss boundary layer
concepts.
4. Solve problems on the turbo machines like turbines using analytical method
and velocity triangles.
5. Discuss the Classification and working principles of pumps and evaluate the
performance of hydraulic machines.
Unit -1 Hours
Fluids: Definition of fluid, Fluid properties, Atmospheric gauge and
vacuum pressure – measurement of pressure. Manometers- Piezometer, 10
U-tube, inverted and differential manometers. Pascal’s law, hydrostatic
law. Buoyancy, forces on submerged bodies, stability of floating bodies.
Unit -2
Fluid Kinematics: Introduction, flow types. Equation of continuity for
one dimensional flow. Stream line, path line and streak lines and stream
tube. Stream function and velocity potential function. 10
Fluid Dynamics: surface and body forces –Euler’s and Bernoulli’s
equations for flow along a stream line, momentum equation and its
applications, force on pipe bend.
Unit – 3
Closed Conduit Flow: Reynold’s experiment- Darcy Weisbach equation,
Minor losses in pipes- pipes in series and pipes in parallel- total energy
line hydraulic gradient line.
10
Basics of Turbo Machinery: Hydrodynamic force of jets on stationery
and moving flat, inclined, and curved vanes, jet striking centrally and at
tip, velocity diagrams, work done and efficiency, flow over radial vanes.

Unit – 4
Turbines: Hydraulic Turbines: classification of turbines, Working and
efficiencies of Pelton wheel, Francis and Kaplan turbines. Importance of
Draft Tube.
10
Hydraulic Quantities: Unit and specific quantities, characteristic curves,
governing of turbines, selection of type of turbine, cavitation, surge tank,
water hammer.
Unit – 5
Pumps: Centrifugal Pumps: Classification, working, work done – 10
manometric head losses and efficiencies- specific speed- pumps in series
and parallel performance characteristic curves, cavitation & NPSH.
Reciprocating Pumps: Working, Discharge, slip, indicator diagrams.
Course outcomes:
1. Demonstrate various properties of fluids, pressure measurement devices and
their applications.
2. Identify the kinematics and dynamics properties of fluids flowing in different
conditions and its effects on the bodies.
3. Estimate the effect of various losses in fluids due to flowing and obstructions
understand using the concepts of pipe losses and Boundary layer theory.
4. Analyze the performance of hydraulic turbines, unit and specific quantities
based on the design by applying the knowledge of turbo machinery using
analytical methods and velocity triangles.
5. Analyze the performance of various hydraulic pumps based on workings and
design.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries 14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
TEXT BOOKS
1. Hydraulics, fluid mechanics and Hydraulic machinery Modi and Seth
2. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines/ RK Bansal/Laxmi Publications (P)
Ltd.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines by Rajput
2. Fluid Mechanics & Turbo machinery by Dixon, 7th Edn, Elesvier
3. Fluid Mechanics and Machinery by D. Rama Durgaiah, New Age International
4. Fluid Mechanics- Fundementals and Applications by Y.A. Cengel,
J.M.Cimbala, 6th Edn, McGrawHill
5. Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Power Engineering by D.S. Kumar, Kotaria& Sons.
 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS & MATERIALS LAB
SEMESTER - III
Subject Code 21MEMEL3060 Internal Marks 15
Number of Practical Hours/Week 03 External Marks 35
Total Number of practice Hours 48 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 1.5
Course Objectives: Students Should be able to
1. Conduct Tensile and compression test using Universal Testing Machine.
2. Calculate Modulus of rigidity and stiffness of the spring using tensile spring
tester.
3. Determine the impact resistance of the given material using Impact tester.
4. Find the RHN & BHN using Rockwell and Brinell Hardness testers.
5. Identify different metallographic structures of different ferrous alloys
List of experiments
1. Tension test
2. Compression test
3. Test on helical Spring to determine the rigidity modulus & stiffness
4. Torsion Test to determine the rigidity modulus of a shaft
5. Izod Impact test
6. Charpy Impact test
7. Brinell’s hardness test
8. Rock well hardness test
9. Preparation and study of the Microstructure of pure metals like Iron, Cu
and Al.
10. Preparation and study of the Microstructure of mild steels, low
carbon steels, high – C steels.
11. Study of the micro structures of cast Irons.
12. Study of the micro structures of non-ferrous alloys.
13. Study of the micro structures of heat-treated steels
Course Outcomes: Students will be able to
1. Conduct Tensile and compression test using Universal Testing Machine
2. Calculate Modulus of rigidity and stiffness of the spring using tensile spring
tester and Torsion tester
3. Determine the impact resistance of the given material using Impact tester
4. Find the RHN & BHN using Rockwell and Brinell Hardness testers
5. Identify different metallographic structures of different ferrous alloys
 FLUID MECHANICS & MACHINES LAB
SEMESTER - III
Subject Code 21MEMEL3070 IA Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 48 Exam Hours 3
Credits –1.5
Course objectives: On successful completion of the course, students shall be
able to:
1. Calculate different parameters such as coefficient of discharge, coefficient of
impact, power, efficiency, etc. of various experiments.
2. Estimate pressure variation in a flowing fluid using Bernoulli’s principle
applications such as Venturi meter, Orifice meter.
3. Compute the head losses in various diameter pipes.
4. Calculate different parameters such as coefficient of impact.
5. Analyze the working of hydraulic turbines and pumps their performance
curves.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of coefficient of discharge of Venturi meter
2. Determination of coefficient of discharge of Orifice meter
3. Determination of coefficient of discharge of a pipe line using Turbine flow
meter
4. Determination of coefficient of discharge through an open channel using V –
notch apparatus.
5. Determination of friction factor of a pipe
6. Verification of Bernoulli’s equation
7. Determination of coefficient of impact of a jet striking a flat vane
8. Conduct performance test on Pelton Wheel
9. Conduct performance test on Francis turbine
10. Conduct performance test on single stage Centrifugal Pump
11. Conduct performance test on Reciprocating Pump
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENTS
1. Conduct performance test on Kaplan turbine
Course Outcomes: On successful completion of the course, students will be able
to
1. Calculate different parameters such as coefficient of discharge, coefficient of
impact, power, efficiency, etc. of various experiments.
2. Estimate pressure variation in a flowing fluid using Bernoulli’s principle
applications such as Venturi meter, Orifice meter.
3. Compute the head losses in various diameter pipes.
4. Calculate different parameters such as coefficient of impact.
5. Analyze the working of hydraulic turbines and pumps their performance
curves.
 COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING DRAWING AND DRAFTING
(Skill Oriented Course)
SEMESTER III
Course Code 21MEMES3080 IA Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/week 1(L)+ 2(P) Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 48 Exam Hours 03
Credits-2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student will acquire knowledge
1. To enhance the student’s knowledge and skills in engineering drawing and to
introduce drafting packages and commands for computer aided drawing and
modeling.
2. To introduce various commands in AutoCAD to draw the geometric entities
and to create 2D wire frame models.
3. To introduce various commands in AutoCAD to draw the geometric entities
and to create 3D wireframe models.
4. To create geometrical model of simple solids, machines & machine parts
5. To interpret viewpoints and view ports, view point coordinates and views
displayed and develop computer aided solid models with isometric and
orthographic projections.
COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING:
1. Generation of points, lines, curves, polygons, dimensioning. Development of
part drawings for various components in the form of orthographic and
isometric. Representation of dimensioning and tolerances, Study of DXE,
IGES files
2. Types of modeling: object selection commands – edit, zoom, cross hatching,
pattern filling, utility commands in 2D modeling
3. Object selection commands – edit, zoom, cross hatching, pattern filling, utility
commands in 3D modeling.
4. Development of part drawings for various components in the form of
orthographic representation of dimensioning and tolerances using wireframe
and surface modeling.
5. Development of part drawings for various components in the form of isometric
representation of dimensioning and tolerances using wireframe and surface
modeling.
6. View point coordinates and view ports displayed, examples to exercise
different options like save, restore, delete, joint, single option.
7. COMPUTER AIDED SOLID MODELING: Development of part drawings for
various components in the form of isometric representation. PART
MODELING: Generation of various 3D models through Pad, revolve, shell,
sweep, parent child relation, Boolean operations and various standard
translators.
8. Development of part drawings for various components in the form of
orthographic projections.
9. Modeling of simple solids,
10. Modeling of Machines & Machine Parts. Assembly drawings: (Any four of
the following using solid model software) Generation of various
Parts/assemblies: like Screw Jack, Oldham’s Coupling, Foot step bearing,
Couplings, knuckle and cotter joints, Crankshaft, Connecting Rod, Piston and
Cylinder.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will be able to:
1. Understand skills in engineering drawing and to introduce drafting packages
and commands for computer aided drawing and modeling
2. Utilize various commands in AutoCAD to draw the geometric entities and to
create 2D wire frame models.
3. Interpret various commands in AutoCAD to draw the geometric entities and to
create 3D wire frame models
4. Construct geometrical model of simple solids, machines & machine parts
5. Understand view points and view ports, view point coordinates and views
displayed and develop computer aided solid models with isometric and
orthographic projections.
 BASIC ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
SEMESTER III
Subject Code 21MEECM3090 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 00
Course Objectives:
This course will enable the students to:
1. Understand the basics of analog electronics circuits
2. Describe the basics of digital electronics.
3. Discuss the concepts of electronic communications.
Unit -1
Semiconductor Devices and Applications: Introduction to P-N
junction Diode and V-I characteristics, Half wave and Full-wave
rectifiers, capacitor filter. Zener diode and its characteristics, Zener Hours –
diode as voltage regulator. Regulated power supply IC based on 78XX 12
and 79XX series, Introduction to BJT, its input-output and transfer
characteristics, BJT as a single stage CE amplifier, frequency
response and bandwidth.
Unit -2
Operational amplifier and its applications: Introduction to
operational amplifiers, Op-amp input modes and parameters, Op-
Hours –
amp in open loop configuration, op-amp with negative feedback,
12
study of practical op-amp IC 741, inverting and non-inverting
amplifier applications: summing and difference amplifier, unity gain
buffer, comparator, integrator and differentiator.
Unit – 3
Timing Circuits and Oscillators: RC-timing circuits, IC 555 and its
applications as a stable and mono-stable multi-vibrators, positive
Hours – 8
feedback, Barkhausen's criteria for oscillation, R-C phase shift and
Wein bridge oscillator.
Unit – 4
Digital Electronics Fundamentals: Difference between analog and
digital signals, Boolean algebra, Basic and Universal Gates, Symbols,
Hours –
Truth tables, logic expressions, Logic simplification using K- map,
10
Logic ICs, half and full adder/subtractor, multiplexers, de
multiplexers, flip-flops, shift registers, counters, Block diagram of
microprocessor/microcontroller and their applications.
Unit – 5
Electronic Communication Systems: The elements of
communication system, IEEE frequency spectrum, Transmission
Hours – 8
media: wired and wireless, need of modulation, AM and FM
modulation schemes, Mobile communication systems: cellular
concept and block diagram of GSM system.
Total 50
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will be able to:
1. Understand the basics of semiconductor devices and their applications.
2. Describe the application using Operational amplifier.
3. Discuss the working of timing circuits and oscillators.
4. Understand building block of digital systems.
5. Summarize the basics of Electronic communication system.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries 14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Integrated Electronics - Jacob Millman, C. Halkies, C.D.Parikh, Tata Mc-
Graw Hill, 2009.
2. Linear Integrated Circuits – D. Roy Choudhury, New Age International (p)
Ltd.
3. Digital Design – M Morris Mano, Third Edition, Pearson Publications.
4. Electronic Communication Systems-George Kennedy,5th Edition, Tata Mc-
Graw Hill
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Electronic Devices and Circuits – K Venkata Rao ,K Rama Sudha, Tata Mc-
Graw Hill.
2. Electronic Devices and Circuits - Salivahanan, Kumar, Vallavaraj, 2nd
Edition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill.
3. Fundamentals of Logic Design- Charles H.Roth,Jr., 5th Edition, India
Edition
COURSE STRUCTURE AND
SYLLABUS
SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
II B.Tech. IV Semester
Mechanical Engineering
 II B. Tech. IV Semester Proposed Course Structure for the
Regulation SITE 21
S.
CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
Engineering Mathematics –IV
21 CMMAT
1. BSC (Fourier series, Applications of 3 0 0 3
4010
PDE and Probability &
2. PCC Statistics)
21MEMET4020 Applied Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
3. PCC 21MEMET4030 Design of Machine Elements -I 3 0 0 3
4. PCC 21MEMET4040 Production Technology 3 0 0 3
5. PCC 21MEMET4050 Kinematics of Machinery 3 0 0 3
Engineering Economics and
6. HSC 21MEMST4060 3 0 0 3
Financial Management
7. PCC 21MEMEL4070 Thermal Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8. PCC 21MEMEL4080 Production Technology Lab 0 0 3 1.5
Computer Aided Three-
9. SOC 21MEMES4090 Dimensional Interactive 1 0 2 2
Application (CATIA)
10. Total 19 0 8 23
Honors/Minor courses (The
H/M hours distribution can be 3-0- 4 0 0 4
2 or 3-1-0 also)
 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-IV
(Fourier series, Applications of PDE and Probability & Statistics)
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21CMMAT4010/20 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 48 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
1. To Find the Fourier series of a periodic functions.
2. To Identify solution methods for partial differential equations that model
physical processes
3. To know the Basic Concepts of Probability and corresponding Discrete and
Continuous probability distributions
4. To obtain the estimate of a parameter from sample statistic
5. To test the hypothesis.
Unit -1
Fourier Series: Periodic functions, Dirichlet’s condition, Fourier
Hours –
Series of periodic functions with period 2π and with arbitrary
10
period. Fourier series of even and odd functions, Half range
Fourier Series.
Unit -2
Applications of PDE: Method of Separation of variables, Solution Hours –
of One-dimensional wave, Heat and two-dimensional Laplace 08
equation.
Unit – 3
Discrete random Variables and Distributions: Introduction
Random variables -Discrete random variables-Distribution
Function-Mathematical Expectation. Discrete distributions:
Hours –
Binomial and Poisson distributions and their fitting to data.
10
Continuous random Variables and Distributions: Introduction -
Continuous random variables-Distribution function- Expectation.
Continuous distributions: Uniform and Normal distributions,
Normal approximation to Binomial distribution.
Unit – 4
Sampling theory
Introduction-Population and samples-Sampling distribution of Hours –
means and Variance (definition only)-Central limit theorem 10
(without proof).
Unit – 5
Test of Hypothesis:
Introduction-Hypothesis-Null and Alternative Hypothesis-Type I
and Type II Errors-Level of Significance-One tail and two tail tests- Hours –
Tests concerning one mean and two means (Large and Small 10
samples), z test, t-distribution, Test of Goodness of fit - Tests on
proportions- z-test.
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students are able to
1. Find the Fourier series of a periodic functions (L3)
2. Identify solution methods for partial differential equations that model
physical processes (L3).
3. Apply the Concepts of Probability and Find the statistical Parameters of
Discrete and Continuous distributions (L3)
4. Estimate the properties of population from samples. (L5)
5. Design the Components of classical Hypothesis test, Conclude the
statistical inferential methods based on small and large samples. (L6)
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper consists of 10 questions.
2. Each full question carrying 14 marks.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a unit.
4. The student will have to answer 5 full questions selecting one full question
from each unit.
Text Books:
1. Miller and Freund’s, Probability and Statistics for Engineers,7/e, Pearson,
2008.
2. S.C.Gupta and V.K.Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, 11/e,
Sultan Chand
& Sons Publications, 2012.
3. B.V.Ramana "Higher Engineering Mathematics" Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2006.
Reference Books:
1. Shron L. Myers, Keying Ye, Ronald E Walpole, Probability and Statistics for
Engineers and the Scientists,8th edition, Pearson 2007.
2. Jay L Devore, Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences,
8thEdition, Cengage.
3. Sheldon M. Ross, Introduction to probability and statistics Engineers and
Scientists,4thEdition, Academic Foundation, 2011.
4. Johannes Ledolter and Robert V. Hogg, Applied Staistics for Engineers and
Physical Scientists, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2010.
 APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS
SEMESTER IV
Subject Code 21MEMET4020 IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits - 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Enable the students to
1. Understand the working of various IC engines and associated systems such as
lubricating system, cooling system, fuel injection system and ignition system.
2. Describe the working of steam power plant and their components and evaluate
the performance and analysis of boilers.
3. Classify the steam nozzles and their performance evaluation.
4. Sketch the velocity diagrams of steam turbines and illustrate the
compounding.
5. Analyze the performance of gas turbine and explain the working of air
compressors.
Unit -1 Teaching
Hours
I.C. ENGINES: Classification, Working principles of Four & Two
stroke engine- SI & CI engines, Valve and Port Timing Diagrams,
Hours – 08
Engine systems- Carburetor, Fuel injection systems for CI
engines, Ignition, Cooling and Lubrication system.
Unit -2
Vapour Power Cycles: Rankine cycle, Performance evaluation
and improving methods.
Boilers: Classification working principles of L.P & H.P boilers
with sketches, mountings and accessories – working principles,
Hours – 12
boiler horse power, equivalent evaporation, efficiency and heat
balance – draught, classification – height of chimney for given
draught and discharge, condition for maximum discharge,
efficiency of chimney – artificial draught, induced and forced.
Unit - 3
Steam Nozzles: Function of a nozzle – applications - types, flow
through nozzles, thermodynamic analysis – assumptions -
velocity of fluid at nozzle exit-Ideal and actual expansion in a
nozzle, velocity coefficient, condition for maximum discharge, Hours – 08
critical pressure ratio, criteria to decide nozzle shape: Super
saturated flow, its effects, degree of super saturation and degree
of under cooling - Wilson line
Unit – 4
Steam Turbines: Classification and principle of operation -
Impulse turbine mechanical details and velocity diagrams, effect
Hours – 12
of friction.
Reaction Turbine: Mechanical details, thermodynamic analysis
of a stage, degree of reaction – velocity diagram - Analysis of
steam turbines, velocity and pressure compounding of steam
turbines
Unit-5
Gas Turbines: Gas power cycles, Brayton cycle, effect of reheat,
regeneration and intercooling- Combined gas and vapor power
cycles.
Compressors: Reciprocating compressors, staging of Hours – 10
reciprocating compressors, optimal stage pressure ratio, effect of
intercooling and minimum work for multistage reciprocating
compressors
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Explain various internal combustion engines working principles and analyze
various engine systems.
2. Determine the methods of improving Rankine cycle efficiency and design the
constructional features of various types of boilers.
3. Evaluate critical pressure and other properties of steam in a steam nozzle.
4. Compute the efficiency of steam turbines through graphical and analytical
methods.
5. Analyze, compare simple and modified Brayton cycles and estimate the
performance of different types of compressors.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics, Sonntag, R. E, Borgnakke, C. and Van
Wylen, G. J., 2003, 6th Edition, John Wiley and Sons.
2. Thermal Engineering-R.S Khurmi/JS Gupta/S.Chand.
3. Gas Turbines / V Ganesan/3rd edition, TMH/2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Heat Engineering – V.P Vasandani and D.S Kumar Metropolitan Book
Company, New Delhi.
2. Thermodynamics and Heat Engines, Volume 2 - R.Yadav - Central book depot.
3. Engineering Thermodynamics, PK Nag 4th Edn, TMH.
4. Thermal Engineering – S. Domkundwar – 5th Edn – Dhanpat Rai publ.
5. Thermal Engineering-P.L.Bellaney/ Khanna publishers.
6. Thermal Engineering- M.L.Mathur-Jain publ.
7. Steam tables by C.P Kodandaraman – New age International.
DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS-I
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21MEMET4030 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
Students will be able to
1. Understand the customers’ need, formulate the problem and observe the
behavior of components subjected to loads, different types of modes of failure.
2. Gain the knowledge of fluctuating stresses, endurance limit and fatigue
failure.
3. Design and analyze permanent joints (riveted, welded, etc.) under concentric
and eccentric loading conditions.
4. Develop the knowledge of designing detachable joints (bolts, cotters, etc.)
under various loading conditions.
5. Design and analyze coil springs (compression, tension, torsion) under various
loads.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Principles of mechanical design; Factor of safety, strength,
rigidity, fracture, wear, and material considerations; Stress
concentrations; Design for fatigue; Limits and fits. 10
Design: Types of loads, stresses and strain, modes of failure, Principal
stresses, theories of failure, Rankine theory, Guests theory, Von Mises
theory, selection of failure theories.
Unit -2
Strength of Machine Elements: Theoretical stress concentration factor –
fatigue stress concentration factor, notch sensitivity – design for 8
fluctuating stresses – endurance limit – estimation of endurance strength
– Goodman’s line – Soderberg’s line – modified Goodman’s line methods.
Unit – 3
Design of Riveted Joints: Types of riveted joints, rivet heads,
terminology, caulking and fullering, analysis of riveted joints, efficiency of
riveted joints, eccentrically loaded riveted joints.
Design of Welded Joints: Welding process, merits and demerits of 12
welded joints over riveted joints, Types of welded joints, weld symbols,
strength of parallel and fillet weld, strength of a welded joint,
eccentrically loaded welded joints, welds subjected to bending moment,
torsional moment.
Unit – 4
Design of simple machine parts, design of cotter and knuckle joints.
Design of Threaded Joints: Forms of screw threads, nomenclature,
thread series, designation, power screws, and advantages over v-threads, 10
stress in screwed threads, bolts of uniform strength, empirical relation
for initial tightening, eccentrically loaded joints.
Unit – 5
Mechanical Springs:
Stresses and deflections of helical springs, extension, compression
springs, springs for fatigue loading, Wahl’s stress concentration factor, 10
energy storage capacity – helical torsion springs – co-axial springs, leaf
springs, Nipping of leaf springs.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On the completion of this course, students are able to
1. Identify the customers’ need, formulate the problem and different types of
failure modes and criteria to observe the behavior of component subjected to
loads.
2. Define fluctuating stresses, endurance limit and fatigue failure.
3. Analyze permanent joints (riveted, welded, etc.) under concentric and eccentric
loading conditions.
4. Analyze detachable joints (bolts, cotters, etc.) under various loading
conditions.
5. Evaluate stiffness, number of coils and length etc., of coil springs
(compression, tension, torsion) under various loads.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice).
3. All questions carries 14 marks each.
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Machine Design/V.Bandari/ TMH Publishers
2. Machine design / NC Pandya& CS Shah/Charotar Publishing House Pvt.
Limited
REFERENCES BOOKS
1. Design of Machine Elements / V.M.Faires /McMillan
2. Machine design / Schaum Series/McGraw Hill Professional
3. Machine Design/ Shigley, J.E/McGraw Hill
4. Machine Design –Norton/ Pearson publishers

PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21MEMET4040 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Enable the students:
1. To understand different casting techniques for product development.
2. To know about the applications of special casting processes
3. To understand basic manufacturing processes of welding
4. To understand the concepts of advanced welding processes for various
applications.
5. To select appropriate metal forming and plastic working processes for a given
application.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Manufacturing processes and classification.
Casting: Steps involved in making a casting. Patterns and Pattern
making: Types of patterns, Materials used for patterns, Pattern 10
allowances. Moulding sand: Molding sand composition, sand properties
and Sand preparation. Core: Core sands, Types of cores, Core prints,
Chaplets. Principles of Gating, Gating ratio and Design of Gating
systems.
Unit -2
Melting and Solidification of casting: Cupola furnace, Solidification of
pure metal and alloys, Short & long freezing range alloys. Risers:
Types function and design, Casting designs. 10
Special casting processes: Centrifugal, Die and Investment casting.
Casting defects-Causes and remedies.
Advanced Casting Techniques: Stir Casting, Squeeze casting
Unit – 3
Welding: Introduction, classification of welding processes, types of
welded joints and their characteristics. Gas welding: Different types
of flames and uses, Oxy–Acetylene gas welding, metal arc welding,
10
sub merged arc welding.
Advanced weldings: TIG & MIG welding. Resistance welding: Spot
welding, Seam welding, Projection welding, Upset welding, and Flash
butt welding.
Unit – 4
Special welding processes: Thermit welding, Friction welding, Friction
stir welding, Electron beam welding, and Laser beam welding. Soldering 10
and Brazing, Welding defects, causes and remedies.
Unit – 5
Metal Forming: Nature of plastic deformation, Hot and cold working.
Rolling: Principle, Types of rolling mills and products, Forces in rolling
and power requirements. Extrusion process, Hot extrusion and cold
extrusion, Impact extrusion. Forging, Tools and dies, Forging hammers, 10
Rotary forging. Wire and tube drawings.
Sheet metal forming: Blanking, Bending, Piercing, Stamping, Drawing,
Coining, Embossing, Stretch forming, Hot and cold spinning. Blow and
Injection moulding.
Course outcomes:
1. Students able to understand the knowledge of various casting processes
2. Students should be able to identify various casting technique parameters and
their design effect on processes.
3. Students should be able to understand the equipment to complete specified
welding processes efficiently and correctly
4. Students should be able to apply knowledge of welding safety standards to
both field and factory environments.
5. Students should be able to understand the metal forming and sheet metal
forming processes and their relevance in current manufacturing industry
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries 14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Text Books:
1. P.N. Rao,Manufacturing Technology, Vol I, TMH
2. Kalpakjian S & Steven RSchmid, Manufacturing Processes for Engineering
Materials, 5thEd.PearsonPubl.
3. B.S.Raghuwanshi, Workshop Technology, Vol I, Dhanpatrai& Co
4. Kalpakjain S.& Steven R Schmid,Manufacturing Engineering and Technology,
4th Ed., Pearson Publ.
Reference Books:
1. P C Sharma,Production Technology, S. Chand
2. R.K. Jain and S.C. Gupta, Production Technology, Khanna Publishers
3. Production Technology, H.M.T. (Hindustan Machine Tools).
 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21MEMET4050 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Students will be able to
1. Understand the purpose of kinematics, Kinematic joint and mechanism and to
study the relative motion of parts in a machine without considering the forces
involved.
2. Understand various mechanisms for straight line motion and their
applications including steering mechanism
3. Understand the velocity and acceleration concepts and the methodology using
graphical methods and principles and application of four bar chain. To
understand the application of slider crank mechanism etc. And study of plane
motion of the body
4. Understand the theories involved in cams. Further the students are exposed to
the applications of cams and their working principles
5. Understand gears, power transmission through different types of gears
including gear profiles.
Unit -1 Hours
MECHANISMS: Elements or Links – Classification – Rigid Link, flexible
and fluid link – Types of kinematic pairs – sliding, turning, rolling, screw
and spherical pairs – lower and higher pairs – closed and open pairs –
constrained motion – completely, partially or successfully constrained
10
and incompletely constrained .Grublers criterion ,Grashoff’s law ,
Degrees of freedom, Kutzbach criterion for planar mechanisms,
Mechanism and machines – classification of machines – kinematic chain
– inversion of mechanism – inversions of quadric cycle, chain – single
and double slider crank chains.
Unit -2
LOWER PAIR MECHANISM: Exact and approximate copiers and
generated types – Peaucellier, Hart and Scott Russel – Grasshopper –
Watt T. Chebicheff and Robert Mechanisms and straight-line motion, 10
Pantograph. Conditions for correct steering – Davis Steering gear,
Ackerman’s steering gear – velocity ratio; Hooke’s Joint: Single– Universal
coupling problems
Unit – 3
KINEMATICS: Velocity and acceleration – Motion of a link in machine –
Determination of Velocity and acceleration diagrams – Graphical method
– Application of relative velocity method four bar chain. Velocity and 10
acceleration analysis of for a given mechanism, Kleins construction,
Coriolis acceleration, determination of Coriolis component of
acceleration.
Plane motion of body: Instantaneous centre of rotation, centroids and
axodes – relative motion between two bodies – Three centres in line
theorem – Graphical determination of instantaneous centre, diagrams for
simple mechanisms and determination of angular velocity of points and
links.
Unit – 4
CAMS Definitions of cam and followers – their uses – Types of followers
and cams – Terminology –Types of followers motion: Uniform velocity,
Simple harmonic motion and uniform acceleration and retardation.
10
Maximum velocity and maximum acceleration during outward and
return strokes in the above 3 cases. Analysis of motion of followers:
Roller follower – circular cam with straight, concave and convex flanks.
Unit – 5
GEARS Higher pairs, friction wheels and toothed gears–types – law of
gearing, condition for constant velocity ratio for transmission of motion,
Form of teeth: cycloidal and involute profiles. Velocity of sliding –
phenomena of interferences – Methods of interference. Condition for
10
minimum number of teeth to avoid interference, expressions for arc of
contact and path of contact –Introduction to gear Trains, Train value,
Types – Simple and reverted wheel train – Epicyclic gear Train. Methods
of finding train value or velocity ratio – Epicyclic gear trains.
Course outcomes:
1. To understand the relative motions of different kinematic mechanisms
2. To evaluate different straight line motion mechanisms and steering gear
mechanisms
3. To determine the velocity and acceleration using IC, velocity methods
4. To draw the profiles of cams and followers
5. To know the methodology of gears and its transmission
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries 14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mechanism and Machine Theory by Ashok G. Ambekar, PHI Publishers
2. Theory of Machines – S. S Rattan- TMH
REFERENCES:
1. Theory of Machines Sadhu Singh, PearsonsEdn
2. Theory of machines and Machinery /Vickers /Oxford
3. Theory of Machines by Thomas Bevan/ CBS
 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
SEMESTER IV
Subject Code 21MEMST4060 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This course will enable the students to
1. Understand the concept and nature of Managerial Economics and Concept of
Demand and Demand forecasting.
2. Analyse the Cost Concepts, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis and Market
structures.
3. Learn different Accounting Systems, preparation of Financial Statements and
Capital Budgeting proposals by using different methods.
Unit -I Hours
Introduction to Managerial Economics and demand Analysis:
Definition of Managerial Economics and Scope-Managerial Economics
and its relation with other subjects-Concept of Demand-Types- 10
Determents-Law of Demand its Exception-Elasticity of Demand-Types
and Measurement- Demand forecasting and its Methods.
Unit –II
Production and Cost Analysis: Production Function-Isoquants and
Isocost-Law of Variable proportions- Cobb-Douglas Production
Function-Economics of Sale-Cost Concepts- Opportunity Cost-Fixed vs 10
Variable Costs-Explicit Costs vs Implicit Costs- Cost Volume Profit
analysis- Determination of Break-Even Point (Simple Problems).
Unit-III
Introduction To Markets, Pricing Policies & forms Organizations
and Business Cycles: Market Structures: Perfect Competition,
Monopoly and Monopolistic and Oligopoly – Features – Price Output
Determination – Methods of Pricing: Market Skimming Pricing, And
12
Internet Pricing: Flat Rate Pricing. Features and Evaluation of Sole
Trader – Partnership – Joint Stock Company – State/Public Enterprises
and their forms – Business Cycles – Meaning and Features – Phases of
Business Cycle
Unit –IV
Introduction to Accounting & Financing Analysis: Introduction to
Double Entry Systems – Preparation of Financial Statements- Analysis
10
and Interpretation of Financial Statements-Ratio Analysis (Simple
Problems)
Unit-V
Capital and Capital Budgeting: Capital Budgeting: Meaning of Capital-
Capitalization-Meaning of Capital Budgeting-Need for Capital Budgeting- 08
Techniques of Capital Budgeting-Traditional and Modern Methods.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will be able to:
1. Equipped with the knowledge of managerial economics and estimating
demand for a product.
2. Examine the Production Concept and familiar with the concepts of iso-
quants, iso-cost lines and MRTS
3. Predict the cost of production and its relevance to managerial decision
making
4. Differentiate various the Markets and Pricing methods along with Business
Cycles.
5. Prepare Financial Statements along with Analysis
6. Analyse and interpret various investment project proposals with the help of
Capital Budgeting techniques.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from
each course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries 14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dr. A. R. Aryasri – Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, TMH
2011.
2. Dr. B. Kuberudu and Dr. T. V. Ramana: Managerial Economics & Financial
Analysis, Himalaya Publishing House 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Dr. P. Vijaya Kumar & Dr. N. Apparao Management Science Cengage,
Delhi, 2012.
2. S. A. Siddiqui & A. S. Siddiqui: Managerial Economics and Financial
Analysis, New Age International Publishers, 2012
3. Vanitha Agarwal : Managerial Economics, Pearson Publications 2011.
WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.iare.ac.in/sites/default/files/lecture_notes/IARE_MEFA_LEC
TURE_NOTES_1.pdf
2. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction-to-managerial-economics
 THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB
SEMESTER - IV
Course Code 21MEMEL4070 IA Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/week 3(P) Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 36 Exam Hours 03
Credits 1.5
Course Objectives:
This course will enable student to :
1. Impart knowledge in testing of fuels properties.
2. Understand the working scenario of Port and Valve timing of IC engines
3. Study different performance parameters of four stroke diesel engines.
4. Know different performance parameters of petrol engines.
5. Recognize the performance parameters of Air compressors & Learn the
working of different types of boilers.
Syllabus
1. To find the flash point / fire point, viscosity, calorific value & carbon
residue by using fuel property testing apparatus
2. Valve timing diagram of a four-stroke diesel engine
3. Valve timing diagram of a four-stroke petrol engine
4. Port timing diagram of 2-stroke petrol engine
5. Performance test on four stroke diesel engine test rig
6. Heat balance test on four stroke diesel engine test rig
7. Retardation test on four stroke diesel engine test rig
8. Morse test on four stroke multi cylinder petrol engine test rig
9. Performance test on variable compression ratio petrol engine test rig
10. Assembly and disassembly of a four stroke single cylinder petrol engine.
11. Performance test on two stroke petrol engine test rig
12. Economical speed test on two stroke petrol engine test rig.
13. Study of steam boilers
14. Performance test on reciprocating air compressor test rig
Course outcomes:
On completion of the course student will be able to:
1. To calculate given fuel properties
2. To draw Port and Valve timings of IC engines
3. To find performance parameter values of four stroke diesel engines
4. To determine performance parameter values of petrol engines.
5. To calculate efficiency of Air compressors & summarize the working of
different types of boilers and able to suggest suitable boiler based on
requirement
 PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY LAB
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21MEMEL4080 Internal Marks 15
Number of Practice Hours/Week 3(P) External Marks 35
Total Number of Practice Hours 54 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 1.5
Course Objectives
Enable the students to
1. Impart hands-on practical exposure on pattern making.
2. Know the fundamentals of mould casting with the help of patterns.
3. Gain the concept of welding & different welding methods with safety
precaution.
4. Analyze the concept of metal forming processes.
5. Understand the fundamentals of powder metallurgy
6. Understand the processing of plastics using injection & blow molding
machines.
SYLLABUS
METAL CASTING
 Pattern Design and making- for one casting drawing.
 Sand properties testing- for strength and permeability
 Mould preparation, Melting and Casting
WELDING
 Gas welding
 Gas cutting
 Manual metal arc welding- Lap & Butt Joints
 TIG/MIG Welding
 Resistance spot welding
 Brazing and soldering
METAL FORMING AND POWDER METALLURGY
 Blanking & Piercing operations and study of simple, compound and
progressive dies
 Deep drawing and extrusion operations
 Bending and other operations
 Basic powder compaction and sintering
PROCESSING OF PLASTICS
 Injection moulding
 Blow moulding
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Demonstrate hands-on practical exposure on pattern processes
2. Know the process ofmould preparation using patterns.
3. Acquire fundamental knowledge on metal forming processes.
4. Operate arc welding, gas welding, and resistance welding equipment
5. Apply the practical concepts of powder metallurgy.
6. Identify the difference between injection and blow moulding.
 COMPUTER AIDED THREE-DIMENSIONAL
INTERACTIVE APPLICATION (CATIA)
(Skill Oriented Course)
SEMESTER IV
Course Code 21MEMES4090 IA Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/week 3 Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 48 Exam Hours 03
Credits- 2
The student will develop a skill to use software to create 2D and 3D models.
Session-1
 Geometrical Shape Design (GSD) introduction to workbench Creation of
surfaces
Session-2
 Practice of extrude, revolve and primitive tools
Session-3
 Creating basic curves (wireframe) Practice of circles, spline, helix and spiral
Session-4
 Creating surfaces from surfaces Practice of blend, multi-sections & fill
Session-5
 Trimming surfaces Practice of splitting and trimming of surfaces
Session-6
 Creating curves on surfaces, connect curves, iso-parametric, conic and
corners Basic GSD operations,
 Practice 3 to 4 GSD components
Session-7
 Projections
 Advanced GSD operations, conversion of surfaces to solids
 Practice 3 to 4 sheet metal components
Session-8
 Assembly introduction to workbench Importing of parts and products
 Practice of product structure tool with basic assembly
 Assembly constraints
Session-9
 Practice of various constraint tools
 Types of Assembly approach
 Top-down assembly and Bottom-up assembly
Session-10
 Creating 2 to 3 assemblies with top down and bottom-up approach
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course student will be able to:
1. Can use interface of CATIA
2. Can use command panel, menus, viewports and command icons in CATIA
3. Can create two dimensional drawings in CATIA
4. Can create 3D part drawings using commands in CATIA
COURSE STRUCTUREAND
SYLLABUS
SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
III B.Tech. V Semester
Mechanical Engineering
 III B. Tech. V Semester Course Structure for the
Regulation SITE 21
S. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
1 PCC 21MEMET5010 Machine Tools and Metrology 3 0 0 3
2 PCC 21MEMET5020 Dynamics of Machinery 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 21MEMET5030 Design of Machine Elements- 3 0 0 3
II
4 PEC 21MEMEP504X Professional Elective-I 3 0 0 3
5 OEC 21MEXXO505X Open Elective Course-I 3 0 0 3
6 PCC 21MEMEL5060 Machine Tools and Metrology 0 0 3 1.5
Lab
7 PCC 21MEMEL5070 Theory of Machines Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 SOC 21CMAHS5080 Soft Skills & Aptitude Builder 1 0 2 2
-1
9 MC 21MEMEN5090 Machine Drawing Practice 0 0 3 0
Lab
Summer Internship (2
10 SI 21MEMER5100 months) after II year to be 0 0 0 1.5
evaluated during V semester
Total credits 21.5
Honors/Minor courses (The
11 H/M hours distribution can be 3-0- 4 0 0 4
2 or 3-1-0 also)

Professional Elective Course -I

S.No. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
Conventional and Non- 3 0 0 3
1 21MEMEP504A
Conventional Power Stations
2 21MEMEP504B Nano Technology 3 0 0 3
PEC Industrial Robotics with 3 0 0 3
3 21MEMEP504C
Artificial Intelligence
4 21MEMEP504D Advanced Materials 3 0 0 3
5 21MEMEP504E Industrial Management 3 0 0 3
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered
 MACHINE TOOLS AND METROLOGY
SEMESTER - V
Subject Code 21MEMET5010 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
The course should enable the students to:
1.Acquire the knowledge on theory of metal cutting and mechanisms of
machining
2.Understand about the various lathe machines cutting processes
3.Understand about the various slotting, planning drilling & boring cutting
processes
4.Understand the features of Milling process, milling machines, Milling operations
and different types of indexing.
5.Understand the basics of Metrology like Surface roughness, surface finish,
limits and tolerances etc.
Unit -1 Hours
Metal Cutting: Elements of metal cutting process, geometry of single
point cutting tool, tool signature, chip formation and types of chips, chip
breakers, mechanics of orthogonal cutting – Merchant’s force diagram,
10
cutting forces, cutting speeds, feed, depth of cut, tool life, coolants, tool
materials.
Jigs & Fixtures: Principles of design of jigs and fixtures, principles of
location and clamping, applications.
Unit -2
Lathe Machines: Engine lathe – principle of working, specification of
lathe, types of lathes, construction of engine lathe, lathe operations, work
08
holders & tool holders – lathe attachments, turret and capstan lathes.
Principal features of automatic lathes – classification – single spindle and
multi spindle automatic lathes
Unit – 3
Shaping, Slotting & Planning Machines: Introduction - principle of
working – principle parts – specifications - operations performed - slider
crank mechanism
Drilling & Boring Machines: Introduction – construction of drilling 10
machines – types of drilling machines– specifications- types of drills –
geometry of twist drill - operations performed – tool holding devices –
deep hole drilling machines- Boring Machines – fine Boring Machines –
jig boring machines
Unit – 4
Milling Machines: Principles of working – specifications – classification
of milling machines, principal features of horizontal, vertical and 12
universal milling machines, machining operations, types of cutters and
geometry of milling cutters, accessories to milling machines, introduction
to indexing, classification, methods of indexing- simple & compound.
Finishing Processes: Theory of grinding, classification of grinding
machines, cylindrical and surface grinding machines, tool and cutter
grinding machines, different types of abrasives, bonds and selection of a
grinding wheel.
Unit – 5
Systems Of Limits and Fits: Introduction, nominal size, tolerance,
limits, deviations, fits -Unilateral and bilateral tolerance system, hole and
shaft basis systems, and problems.
Linear Measurements: Slip gauges, dial indicators, vernier caliper and 10
micrometers.
Angular Measurements: Bevel protractor, angle slip gauges, angle
dekkor and sine bar
Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be in a position to:
1. Analyze mechanics of orthogonal cutting to metal machining.
2. Acquire the knowledge on operations in conventional, automatic, Capstan &
turret lathes.
3. Explain shaping, slotting, planning, drilling and boring machines.
4. Make gear and keyway in milling machines using indexing mechanisms and
principles of finishing processes
5. Outline the linear and angular measuring instruments
Text Books:
1. Production Technology by R.K. Jain and S.C. Gupta/ Hanna Publishers
2. Workshop Technology – B.S.Raghu Vamshi – Vol II/ Dhanpat Rai & Co
3. Manufacturing Technology Vol-II/P.N Rao/Tata McGraw Hill
4. Engineering Metrology / R.K.Jain / Khanna Publishers
Reference Books:
1. Metal cutting Principles by M.C. Shaw/ Oxford University Press
2. Metal cutting and machine tools by Boothroyd/ CRC Press
3. Engineering Metrology / Mahajan / Dhanpat Rai Publishers
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 1 1 2
2 2 1 1 2
3 2 1 1 3
4 2 1 1 2
5 3 1 1 2
Course 3 1 1 3
 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY
SEMESTER - V
Subject Code 21MEMET5020 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03

Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Demonstrate the gyroscopic and analyze effects under different forces and
torques
2. Analyze the existence of friction and its importance in rotating parts like
clutches, brakes and dynamometers.
3. Identify the dynamic forces and torques developed in the rotating parts like
cranks, flywheels and governors.
4. Estimate the unbalanced forces and torques developed in rotating and
reciprocating parts of an engine.
5. Identify different types of vibrations in machine parts and evaluate their
effects.
Unit -1 Hours
Precession: Gyroscopes, effect of precessional motion on the stability of
8
moving vehicles such as motor car, motor cycle, aero planes and naval
ships.
Unit -2
Friction: Inclined plane, friction of screw and nuts, pivot and collar,
uniform pressure, uniform wear, friction circle and friction axis
Clutches: Friction clutches- single disc or plate clutch, multiple disc
clutch, cone clutch, centrifugal clutch. 12
Brakes and Dynamometers: Simple block brakes, internal expanding
brake, band brake of vehicle. General description and operation of
dynamometers: Prony, Rope brake, Epicyclic, Bevis Gibson and belt
transmission
Unit – 3
Turning Moment Diagrams: Dynamic force analysis of slider crank
mechanism, inertia torque, angular velocity and acceleration of
connecting rod, crank effort and turning moment diagrams – fluctuation
12
of energy – fly wheels and their design.
Governors: Watt, porter and proell governors, spring loaded governors–
Hartnell and Hartung with auxiliary springs, effort, sensitiveness,
isochronism and hunting.
Unit – 4
Balancing: Balancing of rotating masses single and multiple – single and
different planes, using analytical and graphical methods. Primary and
8
secondary balancing of reciprocating masses.
Unbalanced forces and couples in multi cylinder engines:V-engines,
in-line and radial engines for primary and secondary balancing.
Locomotive balancing, hammer blow, swaying couple, variation of tractive
effort.
Unit – 5
Vibrations: Introduction, Terms used in vibrations, Applications.
Longitudinal Vibrations: Free vibration of spring mass system – Natural
frequency-types of damping – damped free vibration.
Forced Vibration: Simple problems on forced damped vibration,
magnification factor, vibration isolation and transmissibility. 10
Transverse Vibrations: Transverse loads, vibrations of beams with
concentrated and distributed loads. Dunkerly’s method, Rayleigh’s
method, whirling of shafts, critical speeds.
Torsional Vibrations: Two and Three rotor systems.
Course outcomes:
1. Demonstrate the gyroscopic effect on moving bodies like aeroplane, ship, 2-
wheeler and 4-wheeler vehicles in various conditions using the concepts of
gyroscope
2. Analyze the application and effect of friction in moving bodies like clutches,
brakes and dynamometers in producing and transmission of energy.
3. Identify the dynamic forces and torques developed in the rotating parts like
cranks, flywheels and governors.
4. Estimate the balanced and unbalanced forces and torques developed in
rotating and reciprocating parts of an engine due to the presence of various
components on the shaft.
5. Evaluate various types of vibrations and its effects produced like whirling,
resonance and others in machine parts during stationary and working
conditions.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Theory of Machines / S.S. Rattan/ Mc. GrawHill
2. Mechanism and Machine Theory /Ashok G.Ambedkar/ PHI Publications
REFERENCES:
1. Theory of Machines / Thomas Bevan / Oxford UniversityPress
2. Theory of machines /Khurmi/S.Chand
3. Mechanism and Machine Theory / JS Rao and RV Dukkipati / NewAge
4. Theory of Machines / Shigley /MGH
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 1 2 1
2 2 1 2 2
3 1 2 1 2
4 2 2 1 2
5 1 3 3 1 2
Course 2 3 2 1 2

DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS-II

 SEMESTER - V
Subject Code 21MEMET5030 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Students will be able to
1. Design and analyze the pressure distribution in journal bearings.
2. List out engine components such as cylinder, piston, connecting rod and
crankshaft.
3. Summarize the design procedure for shafts and couplings with different
geometrical features under various loading conditions.
4. Determine geometrical relations for length of belt and chain.
5. Distinguish types of pulleys/sprockets for belt and chain drives from
manufacturer's catalogue and explain procedure for beam strength and wear
strength, effective load and module based on beam strength.
Unit -1 Hours
Bearings: Classification of bearings- applications, types of journal
bearings – lubrication – bearing modulus – full and partial bearings –
10
clearance ratio – heat dissipation of bearings, bearing materials – journal
bearing design – ball and roller bearings – static loading of ball & roller
bearings, bearing life.
Unit -2
Engine Parts:
Connecting Rod: Thrust in connecting rod – stress due to whipping action
on connecting rod ends – cranks and crank shafts, strength and 10
proportions of overhung and center cranks – crank pins, crank shafts.
Pistons, forces acting on piston – construction design and proportions of
piston, cylinder, cylinder liners.
Unit – 3
Design of Shafts: Design of solid and hollow shafts for strength and
rigidity, Design of shafts for combined bending and axial loads – Shaft
10
sizes.
Design of Shaft Couplings: Rigid couplings: Muff, Split-muff and flange
couplings – Flexible couplings, Flange coupling (modified).
Unit – 4
Design of Belt and Rope Drives: Selection of flat belts, Pulleys for flat
belts, Arms of cast iron pulley, Selection of V-belts and V-grooved pulley,
Construction of wire rope, Stresses in wire ropes, Rope sheaves and
drums. 10
Design of Chain Drives: Introduction to chain drives, Roller chains,
geometric relationships, Polygonal effect, Power rating of roller chains,
Proportions of sprocket wheels, Design of chain drive.
Unit – 5
Design of Spur Gear Drives: Force analysis on spur gear tooth, Gear
10
blank design, module and face width, Beam strength of gear tooth,
Effective load on gear tooth, Lewis Fatigue equation, Estimation of
module based on beam strength, Wear strength of gear tooth, Estimation
of module based on wear strength,
Design of Helical Gear Drives: Force analysis on helical gear tooth,
Beam strength of helical gears, Effective load on gear tooth, Wear
strength of helical gears, Herringbone gears.
Course outcomes:
On the completion of this course, students are able to
1. Analyze the pressure distribution in journal bearings.
2. Compute design parameters of engine components such as cylinder, piston,
connecting rod and crankshaft.
3. Analyze shafts and couplings with different geometrical features under
various loading conditions.
4. Calculate geometrical relations for length of belt and chain.
5. Identify types of pulleys/sprockets for belt and chain drives from
manufacturer's catalogue and learned calculation procedure for beam
strength and wear strength, effective load and module based on beam
strength.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Machine Design/V. Bandari/ TMH Publishers
2. Machine design / NC Pandya& CS Shah/Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd
REFERENCES BOOKS
1. Design of Machine Elements / V.M.Faires/McMillan
2. Machine design / Schaum Series/McGraw Hill Professional
3. Machine Design/ Shigley, J.E/McGraw Hill
4. Machine Design –Norton/ Pearson publishers
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice).
2. All questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3 3
2 3 3 2 3 3
3 3 3 2 3 3
4 3 3 2 3 3
5 3 3 2 3 3
Course 3 3 2 3 3

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES -I

 CONVENTIONAL & NON-CONVENTIONAL POWER STATIONS
SEMESTER - V

Subject Code 21MEMEP504A Internal Marks 30

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

Credits – 03

Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Acquire knowledge on sources of energy and understand the working of
Thermal Power Plants.
2. Acquire knowledge on Diesel and Hydro Power Stations and their auxiliaries
3. Apply the basic knowledge of nuclear energy and identify Different types of
nuclear power plants and their auxiliaries.
4. Understand the principles and working of solar, wind and Bio gas plants
5. Understand the Principles and working of Geothermal energy, tidal, wave
energy power plants and apply the principles of direct energy conversion
systems

Unit -1 Hours

Introduction to the sources of energy: Resources and development of 12

power in India.
Steam Power Plant: Plant layout, working of different circuits, overfeed
and underfeed fuel beds, traveling grate stokers, spreader stokers, retort
stokers, pulverized fuel burning system and its components, cyclone
furnace, dust collectors.
Gas Turbine Plant: Introduction- classification - construction – layout
with auxiliaries

Unit -2

Diesel Power Plant: Plant layout with auxiliaries – fuel supply system, 10
air starting equipment. combined cycle power plants and comparison.
Hydroelectric Power Plant: Water power – hydrological cycle / flow
measurement– hydrographs – storage and pondage – classification of
dams and spillways.
Hydro Projects and Plant: Classification – typical layouts – plant
auxiliaries – plant operation pumped storage plants.

Unit – 3
Nuclear Power Station: Nuclear fuel – breeding and fertile materials – 10
nuclear reactor – reactor operation.
Types of Reactors: Pressurized water reactor, boiling water reactor,
sodium-graphite reactor, fast breeder reactor, homogeneous reactor, gas
cooled reactor, radiation hazards and shielding – radioactive waste
disposal.

Unit – 4

Solar Power plant: classification of concentrating collectors, Flat plate 10

and concentrating collectors, solar ponds. Solar plants, photovoltaic
energy conversion
Wind Energy: Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis
windmills, performance characteristics.
Bio-Mass: Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic /aerobic digestion,
types of Bio-gas digesters.

Unit – 5

Geothermal Energy: Resources, types of wells, methods of harnessing 8

the energy.
Tidal and Wave energy: Potential and conversion techniques
Direct Energy Conversion: Thermoelectric generators, principles and
working of MHD generator, Fuel cells

Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. List, describe the main sources of energy and describe the functions of the
major equipment and auxiliaries of a Thermal power plants
2. Identify, demonstrate the components of an IC Engine and hydro power plant
and compare the various combined cycle power plants.
3. Explain the basic principles of nuclear reactions and explain working principle
of different types of nuclear power plants.
4. Apply the knowledge of Solar, Wind energy and Biomass, in generation of
power.
5. Identify the principles of direct energy conversion systems and explain the
basic principles of Geothermal, Tide and Wave Energy

Text Books:
1. A Text Book of Power Plant Engineering – R.K. Rajput – Laxmi Publications.
2. A Course in Power Plant Engineering – Arora, Domkundwar – Dhanpat Rai &
Co
3. Power Plant Engineering – P.C.Sharma / S.K.Kataria Publications
4. Non- conventional Energy Sources / G.D. Rai/ Khanna Publishers

Reference Books:
1. Nag P.K., Power Plant Engineering, 3rd ed., Tata McGraw Hill
2. Renewable Energy Resources / Tiwari and Ghosal / Narosa
3. An Introduction to Power Plant Technology / G.D. Rai/Khanna Publishers.
4. Power Plant Engineering – G. R. Nagpal – Khanna Publishers

Question paper pattern:

1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3
2 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3
4 2 3 3 3
5 3 3 3 3
Course 3 3 2 3
 NANO TECHNOLOGY
SEMESTER - V
Subject Code 21MEMEP504B Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Enable the students to
1. Acquire knowledge on importance of Nanoscience & Nanotechnology
2. Identify the properties of nanomaterials & their applications in material
science.
3. Apply the concept of synthesis & fabrication of nanomaterials.
4. Understand the various characterization techniques of nanomaterials.
5. Understand the concept of carbon nanotechnology & its applications.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to Nanotechnology: Importance of nano-technology,
Emergence of Nanotechnology, History of nanoscience, Definition of
08
nanometer, nanomaterial & nanotechnology, classification of
nanomaterials, basic applications of nanotechnology in science &
technology.
Unit -2
Properties of Materials: Mechanical, thermal, and magnetic properties
08
of nanomaterials, effect of size reduction on properties. Applications of
nanotechnology in surface science, energy & environment.
Unit – 3
Synthesis: Synthesis of bulk polycrystalline samples, growth of single
crystals, preparation of nanoparticle- bottom-up approach- sol gel
synthesis 12
Fabrication: Hydro thermal growth, thin film growth, PVD and CVD,
top-down approach- Ball milling, micro fabrication, lithography,
requirements for realizing semiconductor nanostructures.
Unit – 4
Characterization Techniques: X-Ray diffraction, scanning electron
microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, scanning probe
microscopy, atomic force microscopy, piezo response microscopy, diffuse 12
reflectance spectra, Raman spectroscopy. Applications of nano
structured thin films, applications of quantum dots.
Unit – 5
Carbon Nanotechnology: Allotropes of Carbon, Characterization of
carbon allotropes, synthesis of diamond – nucleation of diamond, growth
and morphology.
10
Applications of nanocrystalline diamond films, grapheme, and
applications of carbon nanotubes, applications of carbon
nanotechnology in biology and medicine.
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students are able to
1. Explain the importance of Nanotechnology & its emergence in various fields.
2. Identify various properties of nanomaterials in different applications.
3. Select synthesis and fabrication methods, techniques and process parameters
for processing of nanomaterials.
4. Evaluate the properties of nanomaterials using different characterization tools
& equipment.
5. Discuss the concept of carbon allotropes in Nano Technology & their
applications
Text Books:
1. Nanoscience and nanotechnology: M.S. Ramachandra Rao & Shubra singh/
Wiley publishers.
Reference Books:
1. Introduction to nanotechnology by Charles P.Poole., J.Owens/ Wiley
publishers.
2. Nanotechnology by Jermy J Ramsden, Elsevier publishers
3. Nano Essentials- T Pradeep/TMH
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 1 1
2 1 2 2 1 2
3 1 2 2 1 1 2
4 2 2 1 1
5 2 2 2 2
Course 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2
 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS WITH ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
SEMESTER - V
Subject Code 21MEMEP504C Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Enable the students to
1. Gain the knowledge of industrial robots, configurations and actuators.
2. Apply spatial transformations to obtain forward and inverse kinematics.
3. Generate trajectory planning for path description and generation.
4. Describe the functioning of sensors and the specific applications of robots in
industry.
5. Understand the concepts of Artificial Intelligence in manufacturing industry.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: An overview of Robotics, Automation and Robotics,
CAD/CAM and Robotics –– present and future applications –
classification by coordinate system.
10
Components of industrial robotics: Components, common types of arms,
number of degrees of freedom, end effectors, requirements and challenges
of end effectors, Actuators-Pneumatic, Hydraulic actuators, electric &
stepper motors.
Unit -2
Motion analysis: Homogeneous transformations as applicable to rotation
and translation – problems.
10
Manipulator kinematics: Specifications of matrices, D-H notation joint
coordinates and world coordinates Forward and inverse kinematics –
problems.
Unit – 3
Trajectory planning: General considerations in path description and
generation. Trajectory planning, path planning, Skew motion, joint 10
integrated motion –straight line motion- Robot programming, languages
and software packages.
Unit – 4
Feedback components: position sensors – potentiometers, resolvers,
encoders – Velocity sensors.
Robot applications in manufacturing: Material Transfer - Material 10
handling, loading and unloading- Processing - spot and continuous arc
welding & spray painting - Assembly and Inspection
Unit – 5
Artificial Intelligence in Manufacturing Industry: Introduction,
developments of Artificial intelligence in manufacturing Industry;
Advantages, limitations and applications of Artificial Intelligence in
10
Manufacturing industry- fault diagnosis, Quality inspection, inventory
control, industrial safety and maintenance.
Course outcomes:
1. Identify various robot configurations, actuators and sensors for a robot based
on specific application.
2. Carry out the motion analysis and kinematic analysis for forward and inverse
kinematics
3. Perform trajectory planning for a robot manipulator
4. Explain the specific applications of a robot in industry.
5. Apply the concepts of Artificial Intelligence in manufacturing industry.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Industrial Robotics / Groover M P /Pearson Edu/ McGraw Hill
2. Robotics and Control / Mittal R K &Nagrath I J / TMH
3. Robotics / Fu K S/ McGraw Hill
4. Russell, S. and Norvig, P. 2015. Artificial Intelligence - A Modern Approach,
3rd edition, Prentice Hall.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Robotic Engineering / Richard D. Klafter/ Prentice Hall
2. Introduction of robotics/ John J Craig/ Pearson Edu
3. Robot Dynamics & Control – Mark W. Spong and M. Vidyasagar / John Wiley
4. Robot Analysis and Intelligence / Asada and Slotine / Wiley Inter-Science.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 3 3 2
2 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3 2
4 3 2 2 3 2
5 2 2 3 3 2
Course 3 3 3 3 2
 ADVANCED MATERIALS
SEMESTER - V
Subject Code 21MEMEP504D Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives
The objective for this course is
1. To understand the mechanics of different materials.
2. To understand the concepts such as anisotropic material behavior,
constituent properties and manufacturing processes of different composites.
3. To understand the suitability of smart and nano materials for engineering
applications.
Unit -1 Hours
INTRODUCTION TO COMPOSITE MATERIALS: Introduction,
classification: polymer matrix composites, metal matrix composites,
ceramic matrix composites, carbon–carbon composites, fiber- reinforced 10
composites and nature-made composites, and applications
REINFORCEMENTS: Fibres- glass, silica, kevlar, carbon, boron, silicon
carbide, and born carbide fibres.
Unit -2
Polymer composites, thermoplastics, thermosetting plastics,
manufacturing of PMC, MMC & CCC and their applications. 10
MANUFACTURING METHODS: Autoclave, tape production, moulding
methods, filament winding, hand layup, pultrusion, RTM.
Unit – 3
MACROMECHANICAL ANALYSIS OF A LAMINA: Introduction,
generalized Hooke’s law, reduction of Hooke’s law in three dimensions to
10
two dimensions, relationship of compliance and stiffness matrix to
engineering elastic constants of an orthotropic lamina, laminate-laminate
code
Unit – 4
FUNCTIONALLY GRADED MATERIALS: Types of functionally graded
materials-classification-different systems-preparation-properties and
applications of functionally graded materials.
10
SHAPE MEMORY ALLOYS: Introduction-shape memory effect-
classification of shape memory alloys-composition-properties and
applications of shape memory alloys.
Unit – 5
NANO MATERIALS: Introduction-properties at nano scales-advantages &
disadvantages-applications in comparison with bulk materials (nano –
10
structure, wires, tubes, composites). state of art nano advanced- topic
delivered by student.
Course outcomes:
After learning the course, the students should be able to
1. Explain various composite materials with their constituents, advantages,
limitations and applications
2. Describe various manufacturing methods of polymer matrix composites
materials.
3. Derive stress strain relationships for orthotropic materials and analyze
orthotropic lamina.
4. Explain various functionally graded materials with their properties,
preparation and applications
5. Explain different smart materials with their application.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Nano material /A.K. Bandyopadyay/New age Publishers
2. Material science and Technology: A comprehensive treatment/Robert
W.Cahn,/VCH
3. Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials / Isaac and M Daniel/Oxford
University Press
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mechanics of Composite Materials / R. M. Jones/ Mc Graw Hill Company,
New York, 1975.
2. Analysis of Laminated Composite Structures / L. R. Calcote/Van Nostrand
Rainfold,NY 1969
3. Analysis and performance of fibre Composites /B. D. Agarwal and L. J.
Broutman /Wiley Interscience, New York, 1980
4. Mechanics of Composite Materials - Second Edition (Mechanical Engineering)
/Autar K.Kaw / CRC Press
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 2
2 2 2 2
3 1 1 1 1
4 2 2 2 2
5 2 2
Course 2 1 1 1 2 2
 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
SEMESTER - V
Subject Code 21MEMEP504E Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives
The objective for this course is
1. To impart fundamental knowledge and skill sets required in the Industrial
Management and Engineering profession, which include the ability to apply
basic knowledge of mathematics, probability and statistics, and the domain
knowledge of Industrial Management and Engineering
2. To produce graduates with the ability to adopt a system approach to design,
develop, implement and innovate integrated systems that include people,
materials, information, equipment and energy.
3. To enable students to understand the interactions between engineering,
business, technological and environmental spheres in the modern society.
4. To enable students to understand their role as engineers and their impact to
society at the national and global context.
Unit -1 Hours
INTRODUCTION: Definition of industrial engineering (I.E), development,
applications, role of an industrial engineer, differences between
production management and industrial engineering, quantitative tools of 10
IE and productivity measurement. concepts of management, importance,
functions of management, scientific management, Taylor’s principles,
theory X and theory Y, Fayol’s principles of management.
Unit -2
PLANT LAYOUT: Factors governing plant location, types of production
layouts, advantages and disadvantages of process layout and product 10
layout, applications, quantitative techniques for optimal design of
layouts, plant maintenance, preventive and breakdown maintenance.
Unit – 3
WORK STUDY: Importance, types of production, applications, work
study, method study and time study, work sampling, PMTS, micro- 10
motion study, rating techniques, MTM, work factor system, principles of
Ergonomics, flow process charts, string diagrams and Therbligs
Unit – 4
STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL: Quality control, Queing assurance
and its importance, SQC, attribute sampling inspection with single and
double sampling, Control charts – X and R – charts X and S charts and
their applications, numerical examples. 10
TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT: zero defect concept, quality circles,
implementation, applications, ISO quality systems. six sigma – definition,
basic concepts
Unit – 5
RESOURCE MANAGEMENT: Concept of human resource management,
personnel management and industrial relations, functions of personnel
management, Job-evaluation, its importance and types, merit rating,
10
quantitative methods, wage incentive plans, types.
VALUE ANALYSIS: Value engineering, implementation procedure,
enterprise resource planning and supply chain management.
Course outcomes:
After learning the course, the students should be able to
1. Design and conduct experiments, analyse, interpret data and synthesize valid
conclusions
2. Design a system, component, or process, and synthesize solutions to achieve
desired needs
3. Use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for
engineering practice with appropriate considerations for public health and
safety, cultural, societal, and environmental constraints
4. Function effectively within multi-disciplinary teams and understand the
fundamental precepts of effective project management
TEXT BOOKS
1. Industrial Engineering and management / O.P Khanna/Khanna Publishers.
2. Industrial Engineering and Production Management/Martand
Telsang/S.Chand & Company Ltd. New Delhi
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Industrial Management / Bhattacharya DK/Vikas publishers
2. Operations Management / J.G Monks/McGrawHill Publishers.
3. Industrial Engineering and Management Science/T.R. Banga,S.C.Sharma, N.
K. Agarwal/Khanna Publishers
4. Principles of Management /Koontz O’ Donnel/McGraw Hill Publishers.
5. Industrial Engineering and Management /NVS Raju/Cengage Publishers
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 2 1
2 2 2 1 1 1
3 2 2 1 1 2 1
4 1 1 1 1 3 1
5 1 1 3 1
Course 2 2 1 1 1 3 1
 MACHINE TOOLS AND METROLOGY LAB
SEMESTER - V
Subject Code 21MEMEL5060 IA Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 48 Exam Hours 3
Credits – 1.5
Course objectives: The students should be able to:
1. Know the basic operations such as turning, shaping, slotting, milling,
grinding, etc
2. Describe the effect of process parameters.
3. Gain the knowledge of different coolants used in drilling and grinding
operations.
4. Measure lengths, diameters and heights
5. Determine the pitch of screws and gears
EXPERIMENTS
1. Step turning and thread cutting on lathe machine
2. Producing a hole on given specimen using drilling machine
3. Producing a flat surface on given work piece using shaping machine
4. Machining a spur gear using slotting machine
5. Producing a keyway slot using milling machine
6. Producing a cylindrical surface using cylindrical grinding machine
7. Producing a flat surface using surface grinding machine
8. Producing a flat surface using planer machine
9. Grinding of single point cutting tool angles using tool & cutter grinding
machine
10. Measuring lengths, heights, diameters using vernier calipers, micrometer,
height gauge
11. Measuring bore diameter using internal micrometer and dial bore indicator
12. Measuring taper angle using bevel protractor, sine bar
13. Measurement of pitch of screw and gear and clearance angle of cutting tool by
tool maker’s microscope.
Course outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the students will
be able to:
1. Understand the mechanism of chip formation.
2. Analyze various cutting tool parameters in different machining operations.
3. Operate different machine tools.
4. Apply the knowledge of different instruments for linear and angular
measurements.
5. Choose the appropriate measuring instrument for a specific requirement.
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 2 1 1 2
2 2 2 1 1 2
3 2 2 1 1 2
4 2 3 3 1 1 2
5 3 2 3 1 1 1
Course 3 3 2 1 1 2
 THEORY OF MACHINES LAB
SEMESTER - V
Subject Code 21MEMEL5070 IA Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03(P) Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 48 Exam Hours 03
Credits –1.5
Course objectives:
Students should be able to
1. Demonstrate working of gears, gear trains and kinematic mechanisms
2. Evaluate moment of inertia of flywheel, coefficient of friction for belt drive
3. Examine speed regulations of hart nell governor, observe the effect of
gyroscopic couple and cam jump phenomena
4. Estimate unbalanced forces in static and dynamic balancing of rotating
masses and determine performance characteristics of a screw jack
5. Understand the characteristics of vibrations in beams and shafts.
Experiments:
1. Slider displacement, velocity and acceleration against crank rotation for single
slider crank mechanism/four bar mechanism
2. Demonstration of various types of gears: Spur, Helical, Worm and Bevel Gears
3. Determination of coefficient of friction between belt and pulley
4. Moment of inertia of a flywheel
5. Analysis of motion of a motorized gyroscope when the couple is applied along
its spin axis
6. Determination of the position of sleeve against controlling force and speed of a
governor and to plot the characteristic curves of radius of rotation
7. Follower displacement vs cam rotation for various cam follower systems
8. Study of static and dynamic balancing using rigid blocks
9. Study of simple and compound screw jack and determination of the
mechanical advantage, velocity ratio and efficiency
10. Determination of the frequency of undamped free vibration of spring mass
system
11. Determination of the frequency of damped force vibration of a spring mass
system
12. Determination of whirling speed of shaft theoretically and experimentally.
Course outcomes: Upon Completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Study different types of four bar mechanism, gears and gear trains.
2. Estimate the coefficient of friction between belt and pulley drive and also find
the moment of inertia of a flywheel.
3. Calculate the gyroscopic couple of a rotating disc under various loads and
speed conditions and analyse speed regulations of Hartnell governor and cam
jump phenomenon.
4. Distinguish between static and dynamic balancing of rotating masses and
performance characteristics of a screw jack.
5. Find the natural frequency of a vibratory system with various beams and
critical speed of a shaft for different configurations.
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 1 1 1 2
2 2 2 2 1 1 2
3 2 3 1 2 1 2
4 2 3 2 1 1 2
5 2 3 2 2 1 2
Course 2 3 2 2 1 2

SOFT SKILLS & APTITUDE BUILDER - 1

SEMESTER-V
Subject Code 21CMAHS5080 Internal Marks 15+15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01(L)+01(P) External Marks 35+35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 32 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 02
Section A-Soft Skills
Unit – 1: Intrapersonal Communication Hours
Introduction to Soft Skills and its Significance
Personal Effectiveness: Who am I and What am I; My Strengths and
Weaknesses; SWOT Analysis; SMART Goal Setting; Being Proactive
6
Principles of Personal Vision: Beginning with the End in Mind;
Time Management: Understanding Priorities; Put First-Things-First
Activity: Psychometric Tests and SWOT Analysis, SMART Goal Setting
Unit -2: Interpersonal Communication
Principles of Creative Cooperation and Organisation Skills: Think
Win-Win; Seek First to Understand then to be Understood; Synergize;
Life-Long Learning
Emotional Intelligence: Self-Awareness, Self-Regulation, Empathy, 6
Assertiveness, Adoptability, Managing Emotions
Activity: Resolving a Conflict with your Friend/Colleague/Family
Member; Group Discussions & Debates
Unit – 3: 21st Century Skills
What are 21st Century Skills? Learning Skills- Digital Literacy- Life
Skills Critical Thinking: Active Listening, Observation, Introspection,
Analytical Thinking, Open Mindedness
Problem Solving: Understanding the Complexity of the Problem,
Defining the Problem, Cause and Effect Analysis, Exploring Possible
6
Solutions, Planning Actions, Analysing Results of your Actions, Getting
Feedback, Redefining the Problem, The Problem-Solving Cycle
Decision Making: Managing Conflict, Conflict Resolution, Methods of
Decision Making, Effective Decision Making in Teams – Methods &
Styles, Activity: Case Study
Section B-Aptitude Builder
Unit – 4: Ratios & Percentages
Definition of Ratio, Properties of Ratios, Comparison of Ratios, Problems
on Ratios, Compound Ratio, Problems on Proportion, Mean Proportional
and Continued Proportion.
Partnership: Introduction, Relation between Capitals, Period of
Investments and Shares
Number System: Classification of Numbers, Divisibility Rules, Finding
6
the Units Digit, Finding Remainders in Divisions Involving Higher
Powers, LCM and HCF Models
Percentages: Introduction, converting a Percentage into Decimals,
Converting a Decimal into Percentage, Percentage Equivalent of
Fractions, Problems on Percentages
Profit And Loss: Problems on Profit and Loss Percentage, Relation
between Cost Price and Selling Price, Discount and Marked Price, Two
Different Articles Sold at Same Cost Price, Two Different Articles Sold at
Same Selling Price Gain% / Loss% on Selling Price
Problems on Ages: Introduction, Problems based on Ages
Averages: Definition of Average, Rules of Average, Problems on Average,
Problems on Weighted Average, Finding Average using Assumed Mean
Method
Alligation and Mixture: Problems on Mixtures, Alligation Rule,
Problems on Alligation
Unit – 5: Mental Ability
Difference Series, Product Series, Squares Series, Cubes Series,
Alternate Series Combination Series, Miscellaneous Series, Place Values
of Letters
Number and Letter Analogies: Definition of Analogy, Problems on
Number Analogy, Problems on Letter Analogy, Problems on Verbal
Analogy
Odd Man Out: Problems on Number Odd Man Out, Problems on Letter
Odd Man Out, Problems on Verbal Odd Man Out
6
Coding and Decoding: Coding using Same Set of Letter, Coding using
Different Set of Letters, Coding into a Number, Problems on R-Model
Blood relations: Defining the Various Relations among the Members of
a Family, Solving Blood Relation Puzzles, Solving the Problems on Blood
Relations using Symbols and Notations
Direction Sense: Solving Problems by Drawing the Paths, Finding the
Net Distance Travelled, Finding the Direction, Problems on Clocks,
Problems on Shadows
Text (T) / Reference (R) Books:
Section-A: Units 1, 2, & 3
T1 English and Soft Skills, Dr. S. P. Dhanvel, Orient Blackswan, 2011
R1 Seven Habits of Highly Effective People, Stephen R Covey
R2 Emotional Intelligence, Daniel Goleman, Bantom Book, 2006
R3 21st Century Skills: Learning for Life in our Times, Bernie Trilling, Charles
Fadel; John Wiley & Sons
Section-B: Units 4&5
T1 R S Agarwal, S Chand, ‘Quantitative Aptitude’
T2 R S Agarwal, S.Chand , ‘A Modern Approach to Logical Reasoning’
R1 Quantitative Aptitude for CAT By Arun Sharma
R2 GL Barrons, Mc Graw Hills, Thorpe’s Verbal Reasoning, LSAT Materials
Course Outcomes: On completion of this course, students can
Section A: Soft Skills
CO1 Re-engineer attitude and understand its influence on behaviour
CO2 Develop interpersonal skills and be an effective goal-oriented team player
Develop holistic personality with a mature outlook to function effectively in
CO3
different circumstances
Section B: Aptitude Builder
CO4 Solve the real-time problems for performing job functions easily
CO5 Analyze the problems logically and critically

MACHINE DRAWING PRACTICE LAB

 SEMESTER-V
Subject Code 21MEMEN5090 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01(L)+03(P) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This course will enable students to:
1. Study the conventions and rules to be followed by engineers for making
accurate drawings.
2. Understand and apply national and international standards while drawing
machine component.
3. Acquire knowledge of fastening arrangements such as riveting.
4. Familiarize in drawing assembly, orthographic and sectional views of various
joints.
5. Familiarize in drawing assembly, orthographic and sectional views of various
couplings.
Unit -1 Hours
Drawing of Machine Elements and simple parts
Selection of views, additional views for the following machine elements
and parts.
10
a) Popular forms of screw threads, bolts, nuts and foundation bolts
b) Keys, cotter joints and knuckle joint.
c) Riveted joints for plates
Unit -2
Drawing of Machine Elements and simple parts
Selection of views, additional views for the following machine elements
and parts. 10
a) Shaft coupling, spigot and socket pipe joint.
e) b) Journal, pivot and collar and foot step bearings.
Unit – 3
Assembly Drawing - I
Drawings of assembled views for the part drawings of the following using
conventions. 10
Engine parts – Stuffing Box, Petrol Engine connecting rod, Cross Heads,
Piston Assembly
Unit – 4
Assembly Drawing - II
Drawings of assembled views for the part drawings of the following using
conventions. 10
Machine parts - screws jack, machine vices, Plummer Block, Lathe
Tailstock.
Unit – 5
Assembly Drawing - III
Drawings of assembled views for the part drawings of the following using 10
conventions.
Valves: Steam stop valve, Spring loaded safety valve, Feed check valve
and Air cock.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, student will be able to
1. Identify the national and international standards pertaining to machine
drawing.
2. Illustrate various machine components through drawings.
3. Construct an assembly drawing of a machine unit
4. Interpret a set of working drawings of a machine assembly including detail
drawings, bill of materials, part specifications
5. Analyze the part or assembly drawings as per the conventions.
Question paper pattern:
Section A:
1. This section contains three questions carrying 10 marks each.
2. Answer any Two questions in Section- A 10 x 2 = 20 marks.
Section B:
1. Question from Section-B is compulsory – 50 x 1= 50 marks
Text Books:
1. Machine Drawing – N.Siddeswar, K.Kannaiah & V.V.S.Sastry – TMH
2. Machine Drawing –K.L.Narayana, P.Kannaiah & K. Venkata Reddy / New Age/
Publishers
Reference Books:
1. Production and Drawing – K.L. Narayana & P. Kannaiah/ New Age
2. Machine Drawing – P.S.Gill
3. Machine Drawing – N.D. Junnarkar, Pearson
4. Machine Drawing – Ajeeth Singh, McGraw Hill

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 1 2 1 1 1
2 1 2 1 1 1
3 2 2 1 2 1
4 2 2 1 2 1
5 1 2 1 2 1
Course 1 2 1 2 1

COURSE STRUCTUREAND
 SYLLABUS
SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
III B.Tech. VI Semester
Mechanical Engineering

III B. Tech. VI Semester Course Structure for the

Regulation SITE 21
S.No. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
 1 PCC 21MEMET6010 CAD/CAM/CIM 3 0 0 3
2 PCC 21MEMET6020 Finite Element Methods 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 21MEMET6030 Heat Transfer 3 0 0 3
4 PEC 21MEMEP604X Professional Elective-II 3 0 0 3
5 OEC 21MEXXO605X Open Elective Course-II 3 0 0 3
6 PCCL 21MEMEL6060 CAD/CAM Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 PCCL 21MEMEL6070 Heat Transfer Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 PCCL 21MEMEL6080 Instrumentation and 0 0 3 1.5
Mechatronics Lab
9 SOC 21CMAHS6090 Soft Skills & Aptitude 1 0 2 2
Builder - 2
10 MC 21CMBIN6100 Biology for Engineers 2 0 0 0
Research Internship - 2 Months (Mandatory) after Third year (to be
11 I/RI
evaluated during VII semester
Total Credits 21.5
Honors/Minor courses (The
12 H/M hours distribution can be 3-0-2 4 0 0 4
or 3-1-0 also)

Professional Elective-II
S. CC Subject Code Name of the subject L T P Cr
No.
1 21MEMEP604A Gas Dynamics and Jet 3 0 0 3*
Propulsion
2 21MEMEP604B Mechanical Vibrations 3 0 0 3*
3 21MEMEP604C Instrumentation and 3 0 0 3*
PEC
Mechatronics
4 21MEMEP604D Unconventional Machining 3 0 0 3*
Processes
5 21MEMEP604E Energy Management 3 0 0 3*
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered

CAD/CAM/CIM
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMET6010 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours /
3(L) External Marks 70
Week
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Describe the structure and usage of a graphic system in an industry by the
knowledge gained on CAD/CAM systems
2. Use the knowledge on curves in calculating the and data points used in
generating various curves with the help of modeling software and generation
techniques.
3. Outline the working and application of NC machines and develop the part
programs necessary for manufacturing a machine component using NC/CNC
machines
4. Modify the conventional manufacturing system to an organized system for
increasing the production using proper planning and group technology
techniques.
5. Demonstrate the implementation of CAD/CAM techniques in a completely
integrated manufacturing industry using CAQC and CIM knowledge
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to CAD/CAM: Introduction to CAD/CAM/CIM,
Sequential and concurrent engineering Fundamentals of CAD,
Product cycle, Design process, CAD/CAM hardware
Fundamentals of Computer Graphics: Raster scan graphics 10
coordinate system, Database structure for graphics modeling,
clipping, hidden surface removal.
Transformations of Geometry: Translation, Scaling, Reflection,
Rotation, Homogeneous representation of transformation,
Concatenation of transformations.
Unit -2
Geometric Modelling of Curves: Wire frame modelling, Wireframe
entities, Curve representation, Parametric representation of analytic
curves, Parametric representation of Hermite cubic spline, Bezier and
B-spline curves.
12
Geometric Modelling of Surfaces: Surface modeling, Basic surface
entities, Parametric representation of analytic & Synthetic surfaces.
Geometric Modelling of Solids: Solid modeling, Solid entities,
Boolean operations, Boundary representation of Solid Modelling, CSG
approach of Solid Modelling.
Unit – 3
DRAFTING AND MODELING SYSTEMS: Basic geometric commands,
layers, display control commands, editing, dimensioning, solid 12
modelling. Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM): Introduction to
Computer Numerical Control (CNC), Basic components of NC system,
NC coordinate system, Motion control systems, Feedback devices,
CNC tooling, features of machining center, turning center.
CNC Programming: Part programming fundamentals, Manual Part
Programming, Computer assisted part programming, APT
Programming, Geometric & motion commands, Post processor
commands.
Unit – 4
Group Technology: Introduction, part families, parts classification
and coding, features of parts classification of coding system, OPITZ,
MICLASS and Production Flow Analysis, composite part concept,
10
machine cell design and applications.
Computer Aided Process Planning (CAPP): Introduction to CAPP,
Variant & Generative methods of CAPP, Benefits of CAPP.
Unit – 5
Computer Aided Quality Control: Introduction, Terminology in
Quality control, Computer in QC, contact and noncontact inspection
techniques, computer aided testing, integration of CAQC with
CAD/CAM.
Computer Integrated Manufacturing Systems (CIMS): Introduction
10
to CIM, Scope of CIM, Types of manufacturing systems, machine tools
and related equipment, material handling systems, material
requirement planning, computer control systems, human labor in
manufacturing systems, CIMS benefits.

Course outcomes:
1. Demonstrate computer graphic system used for design & manufacturing in
industries for production and services.
2. Develop newly transforms entities for 2D, 3D representations and generation
of curves, surfaces and solids entities for a graphic system using the
mathematical modeling techniques for a computer graphic system.
3. Develop designs and suitable part programs for working of a NC/CNC/DNC
machine for machining any given component using the knowledge gained on
the design tools and CNC machines.
4. Choose the best production system applicable for manufacturing a machine
component using the planning and group technology techniques
5. Examine the adaptable automation in a manufacturing system for increasing
the production using the computer aided quality control and computer
integrated manufacturing techniques

TEXT BOOKS:
1. CAD/CAM- Computer Aided Design & Manufacturing/M.D. Groover & E.W.
Zimmer.
2. CAD/CAM/Ibrahim Zeid/Tata McGrawhill, Delhi.
REFERENCES:
1. CAD/CAM/CIM/Radhakrishna/New age international.
2. CAD/CAM/P.N.Rao/Tata McGrawhill , Delhi
3. CAD/CAM/CIM/P. Radhakrishna & S. subramanyan
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 2 1 2
2 3 3 2 2 2 2
3 3 2 1 2 2 3
4 2 2 1 2 1 3
5 3 2 3 2 3 2
Course 3 3 1 3 2 2 2
 FINITE ELEMENT METHODS
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMET6020 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Students will be able to
1. Understand basic principles and procedure of finite element analysis.
2. Study the theory and characteristics of finite elements that represent
engineering structures.
3. Apply finite element solutions to structural, thermal, dynamic problem.
4. Solve the complex geometry problems and solution techniques.
5. Understand the concept of dynamic analysis in finite element methods.
Unit -1 Hours
INTRODUCTION: Introduction to finite element method, stress and
equilibrium, strain–displacement relations, stress–strain relations,
plane stress and plane strain conditions, variational and weighted
10
residual methods, concept of potential energy, Formulation of Finite
element characteristic matrices and vectors (Element Stiffness Matrix
and Load Vectors), Assembly of element stiffness for one dimensional
problem.
Unit -2
FINITE ELEMENT FORMULATION: Concept of discretization,
Interpolation, Compatibility, Assembly and boundary considerations.
Shape functions for one dimensional quadratic and cubic elements in 8
natural coordinates, treatment of boundary conditions, Temperature
effects, node numbering, mesh generation, local and global coordinates,
convergence requirements.
Unit – 3
Analysis of Plane Trusses: Plane Trusses, Local and Global
Coordinate systems, Element Stiffness Matrix, Stress Calculations,
Example of plane Truss with three members. 12
Analysis of Beams: Two node beam Element, shape functions, element
stiffness matrix and load vectors, simple problems on beams with
distributed and point loads.
Unit – 4
Finite element modeling of two-dimensional stress analysis with
constant strain triangles, Shape functions of CST element.
Higher Order and Iso Parametric Elements: Two dimensional four 10
nodded isoperimetric elements, Lagrangian interpolation functions and
Numerical Integration.
Unit – 5
Steady State Heat Transfer Analysis: one dimensional analysis of a 10
fin and two-dimensional analysis of thin plate, analysis of a uniform
shaft subjected to torsion.
Dynamic Analysis: Formulation of finite element model, element
consistent and lumped mass matrices, evaluation of Eigen values and
Eigen vectors, free vibration analysis.
Course outcomes:
On the completion of this course, students are able to
1. Identify and formulate different stress and strain relations, displacement
relations on a particular object using FEM methods.
2. Apply and solve different element shapes using stiffness matrix.
3. Differentiate and analyse different types of trusses and beams.
4. Apply one dimensional quadratic equation on isoparametric elements and
numerical integrations.
5. Apply the dynamic analysis on various beam elements.
TEXT BOOKS
1. J.N. Reddy, An Introduction to Finite Element Method, Tata McGraw Hill
2. P.Seshu. Text Book of Finite Element Analysis, Prentice Hall
3. S.S.Rao,The Finite Element Methodin Engineering, 3rd., Butter worth
4. Chandraputla & Belegundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering,
Prentice Hall
REFERENCES BOOKS
1. S.S. Bavakati, Finite Element Analysis, New age Publishers
2. R.D Cook, Finite Element Modeling for Stress Analysis, John Wiley&Sons Inc.
3. O.C. Zienkiewicz and R.L. Taylor, Finite Element Methods, Butterworth
Question paper pattern:
Heinemann
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice).
2. All questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3 2 2
2 3 2
3 3 3 3 2 2
4 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 2 2
Course 3 2 2 2 2
 HEAT TRANSFER
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMET6030 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Understand the modes of heat transfer and their applications in different
energy systems.
2. Gain the knowledge on effectiveness and efficiency of fins for various heat
transfer applications.
3. Understand the concepts of continuity, momentum and energy principles of
fluid flow problems in heat transfer.
4. Select appropriate correlations to evaluate heat transfer coefficients for forced
and natural convection over exterior surfaces and flow through pipes.
5. Acquire the knowledge on heat exchanger performance by using LMTD and
NTU methods and Familiarize radiation heat transfer concepts of black body
surfaces and gray body surfaces
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Modes and mechanisms of heat transfer – basic laws of
heat transfer – General discussion about applications of heat transfer.
Conduction Heat Transfer: Fourier rate equation – general heat
conduction equation in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates.
Steady, unsteady and periodic heat transfer – initial and boundary
10
conditions.
One Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction: Conductive heat
transfer through slab, cylinder, sphere – Homogeneous slabs, hollow
cylinders – overall heat transfer coefficient– critical radius of insulation –
Variable thermal conductivity – systems with heat sources or heat
generation
Unit -2
Extended Surfaces (Fins): Types, applications, fin materials, heat
transfer from fins with uniform cross section – long fin, fin with insulated
tip and short fin, Fin efficiency and Effectiveness – application to error
10
measurement of temperature.
One Dimensional Transient Conduction: Lumped heat capacity
systems– significance of Biot and Fourier numbers- chart solutions of
transient conduction systems
Unit – 3
Convection: Dimensional analysis– Buckingham Pi Theorem for forced
and free convection – non-dimensional numbers and their significance –
10
concepts of continuity, momentum and energy equations.
Forced Convection: Concepts about hydrodynamic and thermal
boundary layers and their thicknesses – use of empirical correlations for
convective heat transfer – flat plates, cylinders, horizontal pipe flow and
annulus flow.
Unit – 4
Natural Convection: Development of hydrodynamic and thermal
boundary layer along a vertical plate – use of empirical relations for
vertical plates and cylinders, horizontal plates and cylinders.
Boiling: Pool boiling – regimes- calculations on nucleate boiling, critical
10
heat flux and film boiling.
Condensation: Film wise and drop wise condensation –Nusselt‟s theory
of condensation on a vertical plate – film condensation on vertical and
horizontal cylinders using empirical correlations.
Unit – 5
Heat Exchangers: Classification of heat exchangers, temperature
distribution, – overall heat transfer coefficient, fouling factor –concepts of
LMTD and NTU methods – Effectiveness of the heat exchanger.
Radiation Heat Transfer: Basic concepts and definitions: Absorptivity,
10
Reflectivity, Transmissivity – concept of black body – Laws of radiation –
heat transfer between two finite black surfaces and two grey surfaces –
concept of shape factor – Emissivity –– radiation shields.

Course outcomes:
After the completion of the course students will be able to
1. Formulate heat transfer conduction equations on engineering systems.
2. Analyze the conduction and convection heat transfer coefficients on fins which
are used in real time applications.
3. Solve fluid flow problems using continuity, momentum and energy principles.
4. Evaluate heat transfer coefficients for forced convection and natural
convection.
5. Determine heat exchanger performance and effectiveness by using the method
of LMTD & NTU and calculate the radiation heat transfer between black body &
gray body surfaces.

TEXT BOOKS:
T1: Fundamentals of Engg. Heat and Mass Transfer / R. C. Sachdeva / New Age
International.
T2: Heat and Mass Transfer – R. K. Rajput / S. Chand revised 9th edition

REFERENCE BOOKS:
R1: Heat and Mass Transfer –Cengel- McGraw Hill
R2: Heat and Mass Transfer – Arora and Domkundwar, Dhanpatrai & Sons.
R3: Heat and mass transfer - D.S.Kumar, katson publishers.
Note: Heat and Mass transfer Data Book by C P Kothandaraman and
Subrahmanyan is used to design and analyze various thermal processes and
thermal equipment.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3 2 2 3
2 2 3 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 3
5 3 3 3 3 2 3
Course 3 3 2 3 2 3

GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION

 SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMEP604A Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives
1. To understand the basic principle of Gas Dynamics
2. To analyze flow with normal and Oblique shocks
3. To understand about Simple frictional flow: adiabatic flow with friction
4. To Examine the effect of heat transfer on flow parameters, Rankine Hugoniat
equations
5. To understand and analyze the basic principle and importance of Jet
Propulsion, - thrust equation - effective jet velocity - specific impulse - rocket
engine performance.
Unit -1 Hours
control volume and system approach acoustic waves and sonic velocity -
Mach number - classification of fluid flow based on Mach number - Mach
10
cone compressibility factor - general features of one-dimensional flow of a
compressible fluid - continuity and momentum equations for a control
volume.
Unit -2
basic equation - stagnation enthalpy, temperature, pressure and density
stagnation, acoustic speed - critical speed of sound- dimensionless
velocity governing equations for isentropic flow of a perfect gas - critical
flow area - stream thrust and impulse function. Steady one-dimensional 10
isentropic flow with area change-effect of area change on flow parameters
chocking- convergent nozzle - performance of a nozzle under decreasing
back pressure -De Lavel nozzle - optimum area ratio effect of back
pressure - nozzle discharge coefficients - nozzle efficiencies.
Unit – 3
adiabatic flow with friction in a constant area duct-governing equations –
Fanno line limiting conditions - effect of wall friction on flow properties in
an Isothermal flow with friction in a constant area duct-governing
10
equations - limiting conditions. Steady one-dimensional flow with heat
transfer in constant area ducts- governing equations – Rayleigh line
entropy change caused by heat transfer - conditions of maximum
enthalpy and entropy
Unit – 4
Intersection of Fanno and Rayleigh lines. Shock waves in perfect gas-
properties of flow across a normal shock - governing equations - Rankine
10
Hugoniat equations - Prandtl velocity relationship - converging diverging
nozzle flow with shock thickness - shock strength.
Unit – 5
Jet Propulsion: Theory of jet propulsion – Thrust equation – Thrust
10
power and propulsive efficiency – Operating principle, cycle analysis and
use of stagnation state performance of ram jet, turbojet, turbofan and
turbo prop engines. Types of rocket engines – Propellants-feeding
systems – Ignition and combustion – Theory of rocket propulsion –
Performance study – Staging – Terminal and characteristic velocity –
Applications – space flights.
Course outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Solve flow equations for quasi one-dimensional flow through variable area
ducts.
2. Analyze the flow through constant area ducts with friction and heat transfer.
3. Analyze flows with normal and oblique shocks.
4. Solve flow problems with Rankine Hugoniat equations and Prandtl velocity
relationship.
5. Analyze the performance of tubro propeller engines.
Text Books:
1. Compressible fluid flow /A. H. Shapiro / Ronald Press Co., 1953
2. Fundamentals of compressible flow with aircraft and rocket propulsion/S. M.
Yahya/New Age international Publishers
3. Fundamental of Gas dynamics-2nd edition/ M J Zucker/ Wiley publishers
Reference Books:
1. Gas dynamics / M.J. Zucrow&amp; Joe D.Holfman / Krieger Publishers
2. Gas dynamics and Jet propulsion /PR.S.L.Somasundaram/New age
international Publisher
3. Thermal Engineering /R.K.Rajput
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 1 3
2 3 3 2 3
3 3 3 1 1 3
4 3 1 1 1 3
5 2 2 1 2
Course 3 2 1 1 3

MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMEP604B Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3 (L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits - 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES: The students should be able to
1. Analyze the various 1-D periodic responses of a vibrating system with and
without damping
2. Learn to derive the equations of motion and solution for Two and multi degree
freedom systems by the application of analytical methods
3. Understand the numerical methods for quick estimation of 1st natural
frequency of multi degree freedom systems.
4 Have the knowledge of the various physical vibration measuring instruments.
5. Learn to solve vibrations problems of continuous systems.
Unit -1 Hours
Single degree of Freedom systems: Undamped and damped
free vibrations: forced vibrations; coulomb damping; Response to
8
harmonic excitation; rotating unbalance and support excitation,
Vibration isolation and transmissibility
Unit -2
Vibration Measurement: Vibrometers, velocity meters &
accelerometers Two degree of freedom systems: Principal modes
10
– undamped and damped free and forced vibrations; undamped
vibration absorbers.
Unit - 3
Multi degree of freedom systems: Matrix formulation, stiffness
and flexibility influence coefficients; Eigen value problem; normal
modes and their properties; Free and forced vibration by Modal
12
analysis; Method of matrix inversion; Torsional vibrations of
multi – rotor systems and geared systems; Discrete Time
systems
Unit - 4
Numerical Methods: Rayleigh’s, stodola’s, Matrix iteration,
10
Rayleigh-Ritz Method and Holzer’s methods.
Unit-5
Application of concepts: Free vibration of strings – longitudinal
oscillations of bars - transverse vibrations of beams - Torsional
10
vibrations of shafts. Critical speeds without and with damping,
secondary critical speed.
COURSE OUTCOMES: The students will be able to
1. Analyze the various 1-D periodic responses of a vibrating system with and
without damping.
2. Able to derive equations of motion and solutions for two and multi degree
freedom systems by the application of analytical methods.
3. Able to understand the numerical methods for quick estimation of 1st natural
 frequency of multi degree freedom systems.
4. Apply the knowledge of the various physical vibration measuring instruments
and their applications in real life vibration data acquisition.
5. Distinguish the types of vibrations occurring in machine parts and judge their
effects.
Question paper pattern
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Text Books
1.L. Meirovitch, Fundamental of Vibrations, Mc-Graw Hill Inc., 2001
2. Grover G. K., Mechanical Vibrations , Nem Chand and Bros (2009)
Reference Books
1. W. T. Thomson, M. D. Dahleh and C.Padmanabhan, Theory of Vibration with
Applications, Pearson Education India: NewDelh, 5th Edition, 2008
2. S. S. Rao, 2003, Mechanical Vibrations, Pearson India: New DelhithEdition,
2018
3. Rao V. Dukkipati and J. Srinivas, Textbook of Mechanical Vibrations, Prentice-
Hall of India Pvt.Ltd, 4th Edition, 2004.
Web Sources:
1.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107212/
2.https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107087/

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3
2 3 3 3
3 3 3 3
4 3 3 3
5 3 2 2
Course 3 2 3

INSTRUMENTATION AND MECHATRONICS

SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMEP604C Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. To provide basic knowledge of measurement techniques, different errors
measuring from the instruments. and provide basic knowledge of
displacement measuring instruments.
2. To learn about various temperature and pressure measuring instruments.
3. To describe various instruments used to measure level, flow, speed,
acceleration & vibrations.
4. To Identify and calculate methods of stress and strains in measurements
and various instruments to measure humidity, force, torque and power.
5. To categorize the importance of control systems in instruments

Unit -1 Hours
Definition–Basic principles of measurement – measurement systems,
generalized configuration and functional Descriptions of measuring
instruments – examples. Dynamic performance characteristics – sources
of error, classification and elimination of error. 12
Measurement of Displacement: Theory and construction of various
transducers to measure displacement – piezoelectric, inductive,
capacitance, resistance, ionization and photoelectric transducers,
calibration procedures.
Unit -2
Measurement of Temperature: Classification – ranges – various
principles of measurement – expansion, electrical resistance –
thermistor – thermocouple – pyrometers – temperature indicators.
10
Measurement of Pressure: Units – classification – different principles
used. Manometers, piston, bourdon pressure gauges, bellows-
diaphragm gauges. low pressure measurement – thermal conductivity
gauges, Ionization pressure gauges, Mcleod pressure gauge.
Unit – 3
Measurement of Level: Direct method – indirect methods- capacitive,
ultrasonic, magnetic, cryogenic fuel level indicators – bubbler level
indicators.
Flow Measurement: Rotameter, magnetic, ultrasonic, turbine flow
meter, hot – wire anemometer, laser Doppler anemometer (LDA).
10
Measurement of Speed: Mechanical tachometers- electrical
tachometers – stroboscope, non-contact type of tachometer
Measurement of Acceleration and Vibration:
Different simple instruments – principles of seismic instruments –
Vibrometer and accelerometer using this principle.
Unit – 4
Stress Strain Measurements: Various types of stress and strain
measurements – electrical strain gauge – gauge factor – method of usage
of resistance strain gauge for bending compressive and tensile strains –
usage for measuring torque, strain gauge rosettes. 10
Measurement of Force, Torque and Power- Elastic force meters, load
cells, torsion meters, Dynamometers.

Unit – 5
Control Systems: Introduction, importance – classification – open and
closed systems, Servo mechanisms–examples with block diagrams
Introduction to Mechatronics: Mechatronics systems – elements &
levels of mechatronics system, advantages and disadvantages of
8
mechatronics systems Mechatronics design process, microprocessor-
based controllers, programmable logic controllers, PLCs versus
computers, application of PLCs for control

Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Interpret the methods of measurement techniques, errors of the instruments
and explain the working of various displacement measuring instruments.
2. Select the temperature and pressure measuring instruments based on their
applications
3. Choose a suitable instrument required to measure the variables like level,
flow, speed and vibration
4. Identify the various types of stress strain measuring gauges and explain the
working of various force, torque and power measuring devices
5. Distinguish between open and closed loop control systems

Text Books:
1. Measurement Systems: Applications & design by D.S Kumar.
2. Mechanical and Industrial Measurements / R.K. Jain/ Khanna Publishers
3. MECHATRONICS Integrated Mechanical Electronics Systems/KP
Ramachandran, GK Vijaya Raghavan & MS Balasundaram/WILEY India
Edition

Reference Books:
1. Mechanical Measurements / BeckWith, Marangoni, Linehard, PHI/PE.
2. Measurement systems: Application and design, Doeblin Earnest. O.
Adaptation by Manik and Dhanesh/ TMH.
3. Gregory K. McMillan, Process/Industrial Instruments and Controls
Handbook, Fifth Edition, Mcgraw-Hill: New Yark, 1999
4. Mechatronics – N. Shanmugam / Anuradha Agencies Publishers.

Question paper pattern:

1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 3 2 2 2 3
2 2 3 2 2 2 3
3 2 3 2 2 2 3
4 2 3 2 2 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 2 2 3
Course 2 3 2 1 2 2 3
 UNCONVENTIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMEP604D Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives
The general objectives of the course are to enable the students to
1. To compare conventional and unconventional machining processes and also
describe the USM method.
2. To State the mechanism of material removal in various electro chemical
machining processes.
3. To identify the mechanism of material removal in various thermal metal
removal processes
4. To acquire thorough knowledge of Electron Beam Machining, Laser Beam
Machining Plasma Arc Machining and comparison of thermal and non-thermal
processes.
5. To inculcate the concepts of AJM, WJM, AWJM and various finishing processes
Unit -1 Hours
INTRODUCTION: Need for non-traditional machining methods-
classification of modern machining processes – considerations in process
selection, applications. 10
Ultrasonic machining: Elements of the process, mechanics of material
removal, MRR process parameters, economic considerations,
applications and limitations.
Unit -2
ELECTRO – CHEMICAL MACHINING: Fundamentals of electro chemical
machining, electrochemical grinding, electro chemical honing and
deburring process, metal removal rate in ECM, Tool design, Surface 10
finish and accuracy, economic aspects of ECM – Simple problems for
estimation of metal removal rate, fundamentals of chemical, machining,
advantages and applications.
Unit – 3
THERMAL METAL REMOVAL PROCESSES: General principle and
applications of Electric Discharge Machining, Electric Discharge
Grinding and wire EDM – Power circuits for EDM, Mechanics of metal 10
removal in EDM, Process parameters, selection of tool electrode and
dielectric fluids, surface finish and machining accuracy, characteristics
of spark eroded surface
Unit – 4
Electron Beam Machining, Laser Beam Machining - Basic principle
and theory, mechanics of material removal, process parameters,
efficiency & accuracy, applications 10
Plasma Machining: Application of plasma for machining, metal removal
mechanism, process parameters, accuracy and surface finish and other
applications of plasma in manufacturing industries.
Unit – 5
Abrasive jet machining, Water jet machining and abrasive water jet
machining: Basic principles, equipments, process variables, mechanics
of material removal, MRR, application and limitations, magnetic abrasive 10
finishing, abrasive flow finishing, Electrostream drilling, shaped tube
electrolytic machining.
Course outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Describe the need and importance of unconventional machining processes and
also explain the material removal rate using USM method
2. Select the different elements of Chemical and Electrochemical machining
processes and its applications.
3. Illustrate different parameters of Electric Discharge Machining processes and
its applications.
4. Demonstrate the material removal process using Laser Beam Machining,
Plasma Arc Machining and Electron Beam Machining.
5. To Recommend the concepts of AJM, WJM, AWJM and various finishing
processes
Text Books:
1. Advanced machining process/ VK Jain/ Allied publishers.
2. Modern Machining Processes/ Pandey P.C and Shan H.S. / THM
Reference Books:
1. New Technology / Bhattacharya A/ The Institution of Engineers, India 1984
2. Manufacturing technology-II / P.N. Rao / Mc Graw Hill publications
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 1 1
2 2 2 1 2
3 2 2 1 2
4 2 2 1 1
5 2 2 1 1
Course 3 2 2 2
 ENERGY MANAGEMENT
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMEP604E Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives
The general objectives of the course are to enable the students to
1. Demonstrate the importance and role of energy management in the functional
areas like Manufacturing Industry, Process Industry, Commerce and
Govemment.
2. To know the different energy resources
3. Understand thermodynamic power cycles and the associated processes and
fuels.
4. Understand the economics of energy conversion
5. Enable the students to understand the basic energy conversion and
management principles and to identify sources of energy loss and target
savings
6. Enable students in carrying out budgeting and risk analysis
Unit -1 Hours
INTRODUCTION: Principles of energy management Managerial
organization, Functional areas for i) manufacturing industry, ii) Process
10
industry, iii) Commerce, iv) Government, Role of Energy manager in each
of these organizations. Initiating, Organizing and managing energy
management programs
Unit -2
ENERGY AUDIT: Definition and concepts. Types of energy audits, Basic
energy concepts, Resources for plant energy studies. Data gathering,
Analytical techniques. Energy Conservation: Technologies for energy
10
conservation, Design for conservation of energy materials, Energy flow
networks. Critical assessment of energy usage. Formulation of objectives
and constrains, Synthesis of alternative options and technical analysis of
options. Process integration.
Unit – 3
ECONOMIC ANALYSIS: Scope, Characterization of an investment
10
project. Types of depreciation, Time value of money. Budget
considerations, Risk analysis.
Unit – 4
METHODS OF EVALUATION OF PROJECTS: Payback, Annualized
costs, Investor's rate of retum, Present worth, Internal rate of return. 10
Pros and cons of the common method of analysis. Replacement analysis.
Unit – 5
ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SOURCES: SOLAR ENERGY: Types of devices
for solar energy collections, Thermal storage system, Control systems. 10
Wind Energy. Availability, Wind Devices. Wind Characteristics,
performance of turbines and systems.
Course outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Explain the fundamentals of energy management and its influence on
environment
2. Describe methods of energy production for improved utilization.
3. Apply the principles of thermal engineering and energy management to
improve the performance of thermal systems.
4. Analyze the methods of energy conservation and energy efficiency for
buildings, airconditioning, heat recovery and thermal energy storage systems.
5. Assess energy projects on the basis of economic and financial criteria.
Text Books:
1. Energy Management by Murfy
2. General Aspects of Energy Management and Audit, National Productivity
Council of India, Chennai (Course Material- National Certification
Examination for Energy Management)
Reference Books:
1. New Technology / Bhattacharya A/ The Institution of Engineers, India 1984
2. Manufacturing technology-II / P.N. Rao / Mc Graw Hill publications
3. Energy Management Handbook, W.C. Turner, 5th Edition, Marcel Dekker,
Inc, New York, 2005.
4. Guide to Energy Management, B. L. Capehart, W. C. Turner, W. J. Kennedy,
CRC Press, New York, 2005.
5. Energy Management by O.P. Collagan
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 1 3 2 3 2 1 2 3
2 1 3 2 3 2 1 2 2
3 1 3 2 3 2 1 2 3
4 1 3 2 3 2 1 2 3
5 1 3 2 3 2 1 2 3
Course 1 3 2 3 2 1 2 3
 CAD/CAM LAB
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMEL6060 IA Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03(P) Exam Marks 30
Total Number of Lecture Hours 48 Exam Hours 03
Credits –1.5
Course objectives: Students should be able to
1. Understand modeling tools for drawing machine components
2. Gain the knowledge of 3D drawing of machine components
3. Gain the knowledge of Assembly drawing of machine components
4. Study the NC and CNC codes
5. Prepare simple parts on the CNC Machining center.
Introduction
Introduction to various modeling and simulation packages, their
importance and applications in industries.
1. DRAFTING:
Development of part drawings for various components in the form of
orthographic and isometric. representation of dimensioning and tolerances
scanning and plotting. study of script, DXE and IGES files.
2. PART MODELING
1. 3D Solid part modeling of mechanical components
2. 3D Part modeling of mechanical components using revolve option
3. 3D Part modeling of mechanical components using hollow
4. 3D Part modeling of mechanical components using sweep
5. 3D Part modeling of mechanical components using swept boss
6. 3D Part modeling of mechanical components using boundary boss
7. 3D Part modeling of mechanical components using rib, pattern, draft
3. ASSEMBLY MODELING
8. Assembly of screw jack using Bottom-up approach
9. Assembly of any one cotter joint using Bottom-up approach
4. CNC MACHINING
10. Study of NC and CNC codes used in CNC machining.
11. NC Programming Practice for machining various components related to
turning
12. NC Programming Practice for machining various components related to
milling
13. Automated CNC Tool path & G-Code generation using Pro-E/Master CAM
Course outcomes: Upon Completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Identify the various sketch and part design tools in modeling software
2. Draw machine components by modeling software
3. Apply the knowledge of part drawing
4. Apply the knowledge of assembly drawing
5. Prepare part programme for engineering components on CNC Machining
center
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 2 2 2 3
2 3 3 2 2 2 3
3 3 3 2 2 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 3
5 3 3 2 2 2 3
Course 3 3 2 2 2 3
 HEAT TRANSFER LAB
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMEL6070 Internal Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(P) External Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 45 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 1.5
Course Objectives: Enable the students to
1. Illustrate basic heat transfer principles and test the thermal conductivity of a
metal rod.
2. Evaluate overall heat transfer coefficient in case of composite wall and heat
exchanger.
3. Analyze the efficiency and temperature distribution of a pinfin.
4. Compare the emissivity of black and grey body.
5. Estimate heat transfer coefficient in case of external flows.
6. Interpret the data for Convection and Radiation.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of overall heat transfer co-efficient of a composite slab
2. Determination of heat transfer rate through a lagged pipe.
3. Determination of heat transfer rate through a concentric sphere.
4. Determination of thermal conductivity of a metal rod.
5. Determination of efficiency of a pin-fin.
6. Determination of heat transfer coefficient in forced convection & natural
convection.
7. Determination of COP of VCR system.
8. Determination of effectiveness of parallel and counter flow heat exchangers.
9. Determination of emissivity of a given surface.
10. Determination of Stefan Boltzman constant.
11. Determination of critical heat flux.
12. Determination of heat transfer rate in drop and film wise condensation.
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENTS
1. Determination of heat transfer rate in radiator using radiator test rig.
2. Determination of heat transfer rate in twisted tape inserted co-axial heat
exchanger.
3. Demonstration of heat pipe.
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Determine thermal conductivity of different common metallic materials
2. Determine the quantity of heat transfer between fluids and solid boundaries
3. Analyze different heat exchangers and Evaluate the amount of heat
exchanged between fluids flowing within heat exchangers
4. Explain simple experimental work in radiative heat transfer
5. Determine the Stefan Boltzman constant & Critical heat flux
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 2 2 3 3
2 3 2 2 3 3
3 3 3 2 3 3
4 3 3 3 3 3
5 3 2 2 3 3
Course 3 2 3 3 3
 INSTRUMENTATION &MECHATRONICS LAB
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMEL6080 Internal Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(P) External Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 45 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 1.5
Course objectives: The students should be able to:
1. Understand the experimental work in the laboratory and calibration of various
instruments for measuring temperature, displacement
2. Measure low and medium pressures using Mechanical and Electrical sensors.
3. Measure flow, speed and vibration using analogue and digital sensors.
4. Characterize the load and displacement using transducer kit
5. Develop PLC programs for control of traffic lights, water level and lifts.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Instrumentation & Measurement
1. Displacement measurement by using capacitive trainer
2. Temperature measurement by using thermocouples
3. Pressure measurement by using bourdon tube pressure gauge.
4. Pressure measurement by using Mcleod gauge.
5. Flow measurement by using Rotameter.
6. Speed measurement by using Digital tachometer.
7. Vibration measurement by using seismic pickup.
2. DYNA 1750 Transducers Kit
8. Displacement measurement by using LVDT.
9. Load measurement by using strain gauge load cell.
10. Temperature measurement by using thermistors/RTD
3. PLC PROGRAMMING
11. Logic Gates Using Ladder Logic Programme
12. Traffic Light controller Using Ladder Logic Programme
13. Water level controller Using Ladder Logic Programme
14. Lift controller Using Ladder Logic Programme
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of the course student will be able to:
1. Know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement of displacement and
temperature.
2. Select proper measuring instrument for measuring low and medium
pressures.
3. Select proper measuring instrument for measuring flow, speed and Vibration
measurement.
4. Measure load, displacement and temperature using analogue and digital
sensors.
5. Develop the PLC programs for Lift, water level control and traffic light
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
CO/PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 3 2 2 2 3
2 2 3 2 2 2 3
3 2 3 2 2 2 3
4 2 3 2 2 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 2 2 3
Course 2 3 2 1 2 2 3

SOFT SKILLS & APTITUDE BUILDER - 2

SEMESTER-VI
Subject Code 21CMAHS6090 Internal Marks 15+15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01(L)+01(P) External Marks 35+35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 32 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 02
Section A-Soft Skills
Unit – 1: Communicative Competence Hours
Verbal Reasoning: Reading Comprehension-Text Completion- Sentence
Equivalence Spotting Errors, Sequencing of Sentences, Parallelism in 6
Structure, E-Mail Etiquette, Reporting News
Activity: Completing Exercises
Unit 2: Career and Employability Skills
What is a Career: Career vs Job, Career Values & Grid, Skills vs
Strengths, Spotting Skills/Reflection of Present Skills, Meeting the
Expectation of your Employer, matching your Skills with the Required
6
Skills, Preparing Resume, Preparing for Interviews & Structuring
Answers
Activity: Resume Building, Interviews
Section B-Aptitude Builder
Unit – 3: Time and Work
Pipes and Cisterns: Problems on Unitary method, Relation between
Men, Days, Hours and Work, Problems on Man-Day-Hours Method,
Problems on Alternate Days, Problems on Pipes and Cisterns.
Time, Distance and Speed, Problems on Trains, Boats and Streams:
Relation between Speed, Distance and Time, Converting km/h into m/s
and vice versa, Problems on Average Speed, Problems on Relative Speed,
Problems on Circular Tracks, Problems on Races 6
Problems on Trains: Two Trains Moving in Opposite Direction, Two
Trains Moving in same Direction, A Train Crossing a Stationary Object
of a Given Length like a Platform or Bridge, A Train Crossing a
Stationary Object like a Pole or a Man Boats and Streams: Time Based,
which can be considered as a Point Object Speed Based, Distance
Based, Average Speed Based
Section B-Aptitude Builder
Unit – 4: Logical and Analytical Reasoning
Seating Arrangement: Linear Arrangement, Circular Arrangement,
Tabler, Triangular Arrangement, Complex Arrangement.
Clocks: Finding the Angle When the Time is Given, Finding the Time
When the Angle is Known, Relation between Angles, Minutes and Hours,
Position of Hands of the Clock, Time Gained or Lost by the Clock, Mirror
/Water Image-based Time.
Calendars: Definition of a Leap Year, Finding the Number of Odd Days,
Framing the Year Code for Centuries, Finding the Day of any Random
6
Calendar Date
Syllogisms: Finding the Conclusions using Venn Diagram Method,
Finding the Conclusions using Syllogism Method
Simple Interest: Definitions, Problems on Interest and Amount,
Problems when Rate of Interest and Time Period are Numerically Equal
Compound Interest: Definition and Formula for Amount in Compound
Interest, Difference between Simple Interest and Compound Interest for
2 Years on the Same Principle and Time Period.
Unit – 5: Permutations, Probability, Areas and Volumes
Definition of permutation, Problems on Permutations, Definition of
Combinations, problems on Combinations 6
Probability: Definition of Probability, Problems on Coins, Problems on
Dice, Problems on Deck of Cards, Problems on Years
Mensuration - 2D: Formulas for Areas, Formulas for Volumes of
Different Solids, Problems on Areas
Mensuration - 3D: Problems on Volumes, Problems on Surface Areas
Text (T) / Reference (R) Books:
Section-A: Units 1, 2, & 3
T1 Enhance Your Employability Skills, David Winter and Laura Brammar,
University of London
T2 R.S. Agarwal, Verbal & Non-Verbal Reasoning, S. Chand & Co., Latest ed.
2003
R1 How to Prepare for Verbal Ability and Reading Comprehension, Arun
Sharma, Meenakshi Upadhay, Mc Graw Hill
Section-B: Units 4&5
T1 R S Agarwal, S Chand, ‘Quantitative Aptitude’
T2 R S Agarwal, S.Chand , ‘A modern approach to Logical reasoning’
R1 Quantitative Aptitude for CAT By Arun sharma
R2 GL Barrons, Mc Graw Hills, Thorpe’s verbal reasoning, LSAT Materials
Course Outcomes: On completion of this course, students can
Section A: Soft Skills
CO1 Learn and practice effective communication skills
Develop broad career plans, evaluate the employment market, and become
CO2
industry ready
Develop holistic personality with a mature outlook to function effectively in
CO3
different circumstances
Section B: Aptitude Builder
CO3 Develop accuracy on time and distance and units related solutions
CO4 Solve the real-time problems for performing job functions easily
CO5 Solve problems related to permutations and combinations, probability,
areas and volumes
 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS
SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21CMBIN6100 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 0
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Convey that Biology is as important as scientific discipline as Mathematics,
Physics and Chemistry.
2. Convey that “Genetics is to biology what Newton’s laws are to Physical
Sciences”.
3. Convey that without catalysis life would not have existed on earth.
4. Molecular basis of coding and decoding genetic information is universal.
5. Analyze biological processes at the reductionist level.

Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Bring out the fundamental differences between science
and engineering by drawing a comparison between eye and camera, Bird
flying and aircraft. Mention the most exciting aspect of biology as an
10
independent scientific discipline. Why we need to study biology. How
biological observations of the 18th Century lead to major discoveries.
Examples from Brownian motion and the origin of thermodynamics by
referring to the original observation of Robert Brown and Julius Mayor.
Unit -2
Classification: Hierarchy of life forms at phenomenological level-
classification based on (a) cellularity - Unicellular or multicellular (b)
ultra-structure- prokaryotes or eucaryotes. (c) energy and Carbon
utilization -Autotrophs, heterotrophy, lithotropes (d) Ammonia excretion 10
– aminotelic, uricoteliec, ureotelic (e) Habitata- acquatic or terrestrial (e)
Molecular taxonomy- three major kingdoms of life. Model organisms for
the study of biology come from different groups. E.coli, S.cerevisiae, D.
Melanogaster, C. elegance, A. Thaliana, M. Musculus.
Unit – 3
Genetics &Biomolecules: Mendel’s laws, Concept of segregation and
independent assortment. Concept of allele. Gene mapping, Gene
interaction, Epistasis. Meiosis and Mitosis be taught as a part of
genetics. Emphasis to be give not to the mechanics of cell division nor
the phases but how genetic material passes
10
from parent to offspring. Concepts of recessiveness and dominance.
Concept of mapping of phenotype to genes. Discuss about the single
gene disorders in humans. Discuss the concept of complementation
using human genetics.
Molecules of life: Monomeric units and polymeric structures. Discuss
about sugars, starch and cellulose. Amino acids and proteins.
Nucleotides and DNA/RNA. Two carbon units and lipids..
Unit – 4
Enzymes & Proteins:Enzymology: How to monitor enzyme catalyzed
reactions. How does an enzyme catalyze reactions - Enzyme
classification. Mechanism of enzyme action. -examples. Enzyme kinetics
and kinetic parameters. Why should we know these parameters to
understand biology? RNA catalysis.
Proteins: structure and function. Hierarch in protein structure. Primary
secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure. Proteins as enzymes,
10
transporters, receptors and structural elements.
Information Transfer: The molecular basis of coding and decoding
genetic information is universal Molecular basis of information transfer.
DNA as a genetic material. Hierarchy of DNA structure- from single
stranded to double helix to nucleosides. Concept of genetic code.
Universality and degeneracy of genetic code. Define gene in terms of
complementation and recombination.
Unit – 5
Microbiology & Metabolism: Thermodynamics as applied to biological
systems - Exothermic and endothermic versus undergone and exergoinc
reactions. Concept of Keq and its relation to standard free energy -
Spontaneity - ATP as an energy currency. This should include the
breakdown of glucose to CO2 + H2O (Glycolysis and Krebs cycle) and
synthesis of glucose from CO2 and H2O (Photosynthesis). Energy 10
yielding and energy consuming reactions. Concept of Energy charge.
Concept of single celled organisms: Concept of species and strains.
Identification and classification of microorganisms. Microscopy.
Ecological aspects of single celled organisms. Sterilization and media
compositions. Growth kinetics
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. understanding how biological observations of the 18th Century that lead to
major discoveries..
2. Convey that classification per say is not what biology is all about but highlight
the underlying criteria, such as morphological, biochemical and ecological
3. Highlight the concepts of recessiveness and dominance during the passage of
genetic material from parent to offspring.

4. Convey that all forms of life have the same building blocks and yet the
manifestations are as diverse as one can imagine.

5. Convey that “Genetics is to biology what Newton’s laws are to Physical

Sciences”.

Text Books:
1. Biology: A global approach: Campbell, N. A.; Reece, J. B.; Urry, Lisa; Cain, M,
L.; Wasserman, S. A.; Minorsky, P. V.; Jackson, R. B. Pearson Education
 Ltd.Mechanical and Industrial Measurements / R.K. Jain/ Khanna Publishers
2. Outlines of Biochemistry, Conn, E.E; Stumpf, P.K; Bruening, G; Doi, R.H.,
John Wiley and Sons.

Reference Books:
1. Principles of Biochemistry (V Edition), By Nelson, D. L.; and Cox, M.
M.W.H.Freeman and Company
2. Molecular Genetics (Second edition), Stent, G. S.; and Calender, R.W.H.
Freeman and company, Distributed by Satish Kumar Jain for CBS Publisher..
3. Microbiology, Prescott, L.M J.P. Harley and C.A. Klein 1995. 2nd edition
Wm,C.Brown Publishers Mechatronics – N. Shanmugam / Anuradha Agencies
Publishers.

Question paper pattern:

1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 2 2 2 2 2 2
4 2 2 2 2 2 2
5 2 2 2 2 2 2
Course 2 2 2 2 2 2
COURSE STRUCTUREAND
SYLLABUS
SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
III B.Tech. VII Semester
Mechanical Engineering
 IV B. Tech. VII Semester
Course Structure for the Regulation SITE 21
S.No. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
1 PEC 21MEMEP701X Professional Elective-III 3 0 0 3
2 PEC 21MEMEP702X Professional Elective-IV 3 0 0 3
3 PEC 21MEMEP703X Professional Elective-V 3 0 0 3
4 OEC 21MEXXO704X Open Elective Course-III 3 0 0 3
5 OEC 21MEXXO705X Open Elective Course-IV 3 0 0 3
6 HSC 21MEMET7060 Operation Research 3 0 0 3
7 SOC 21MEMES7070 Modelling and Analysis (FEA) 1 0 2 2
Research Internship - 2 Months
8 I/RI 21MEMER7080 (Mandatory) after Third year (to be 0 0 6 3
evaluated during VII semester
Total Credits 23
Honors/Minor courses (The hours 4 0 0 4
9 H/M distribution can be 3-0-2 or 3-1-0
also)

Professional Elective Course -III

S.No. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
1 21MEMEP701A Prime Movers for Automobiles 3 0 0 3
2 21MEMEP701B Mechanics of Composites 3 0 0 3
3 PEC 21MEMEP701C Non – Destructive Evaluation 3 0 0 3
4 21MEMEP701D Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 3 0 0 3
21MEMEP701E Product Design and Development 3 0 0 3
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered

Professional Elective Course -IV

S. Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
CC
No.
1 21MEMEP702A
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 3 0 0 3
2 21MEMEP702B
Synthesis and Characterization of 3 0 0 3
Materials
PEC
3 21MEMEP702C Smart Manufacturing and IIOT 3 0 0 3
4 21MEMEP702D Tribology 3 0 0 3
5 21MEMEP702E Hydrogen & Fuel Cells 3 0 0 3
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered

Professional Elective Course -V

S. CC Course Code Course Title L T P Cr
No.
1 21MEMEP703A Solar Energy Engineering and 3 0 0 3
Applications
2 21MEMEP703B Additive Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
PEC
3 21MEMEP703C Production Planning and Control 3 0 0 3
4 21MEMEP703D Machine Tool Design 3 0 0 3
5 21MEMEP703E Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3
NPTEL/SWAYAM/MOOCs (Course of 12 Weeks duration) to be offered

PRIME MOVERS FOR AUTOMOBILES

 SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP701A Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. To make the student learn and understand the reasons and effects of various
losses that occur in the actual engine operation.
2. To familiarize the student with the various engine systems along with their
function and necessity.
3. To learn about normal combustion phenomenon and knocking in S.I. and C.I.
Engines and to find the several engine operating parameters that affect the
smooth engine operation.
4. To make the student learn to perform testing on S.I and C.I Engines for the
calculations of performance
5. To learn about engine emission control, alternate fuels and electric vehicles.
Unit -1 Hours
Actual Cycles and their Analysis: Introduction, Comparison of Air
Standard and Actual Cycles, Time Loss Factor, Heat Loss Factor,
10
Exhaust Blow down-Loss due to Gas exchange process, Volumetric
Efficiency. Loss due to Rubbing Friction, Actual and Fuel-Air Cycles of
CI Engines.
Unit -2
I C ENGINES: Classification - Working principles, Valve and Port Timing
Diagrams, - Engine systems – Fuel, Carburetor, Fuel Injection System,
10
Ignition, Cooling and Lubrication, principle of wankle engine, principles
of supercharging and turbo charging.

Unit – 3
Combustion in S.I. Engines: Normal Combustion and abnormal
combustion – Importance of flame speed and effect of engine variables –
Types of Abnormal combustion, pre-ignition and knocking (explanation
of) – Fuel requirements and fuel rating, anti-knock additives –
combustion chamber – requirements, types.
10
Combustion in C.I. Engines: Four stages of combustion – Delay period
and its importance – Effect of engine variables – Diesel Knock– Need for
air movement, suction, compression and combustion induced
turbulence – open and divided combustion chambers and nozzles used –
fuel requirements and fuel rating

Unit – 4
Measurement, Testing and Performance: Parameters of performance -
measurement of cylinder pressure, fuel consumption, air intake, 10
exhaust gas composition, Brake power – Determination of frictional
losses and indicated power – Performance test – Heat balance sheet and
chart.
Unit – 5
Engine Emissions: SI and CI engine emissions. Harmful effects.
Emissions measurement methods. Methods for controlling emissions.
EURO and BHARAT emission norms.
Alternate Fuels for IC Engines: Need for use of alternate fuels. Use of
alcohol fuels. Biodiesel. Biogas and Hydrogen in engine
10
Batteries: Battery: Battery parameters; Types of batteries- Technical
characteristics-Ragone plots.
Electric Vehicles: Introduction: History of EVs, EV system, basic
structure- Electric vehicle drive train-advantages and limitations.

Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Illustrate and analyze the Air Standard Cycles, Fuel Air Cycles and Actual
Cycles
2. Explain various internal combustion engines and analyze its underlying
thermodynamic cycles and to gain knowledge in engine systems
3. Illustrate various combustion processes and design of combustion chambers
in S.I. & C.I. engines.
4. Examine the performance testing of IC engines and to evaluate various
performance parameters.
5. Outline emission formation mechanism of IC engines, its effects and the
legislation standards and understand the latest developments in IC Engines,
alternate fuels Electric Vehicles.

Text Books:
1. I.C. Engines / V. Ganesan- TMH
2. Heat engines, Vasandani& Kumar publications Thermal
Reference Books:
1. Thermal Engineering / RK Rajput/ Lakshmi Publications
2. IC Engines – M.L.Mathur & R.P.Sharma – Dhanpath Rai & Sons.
3. I.C. Engines – Applied Thermo sciences–C.R. Ferguson & A.T. Kirk patrick-2nd
Edition-Wiley Publ
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 3 3
2 2 3 3
3 2 3 3
4 2 3 3 3
5 2 3 3 3 3
Course 2 3 1 1 1 3

MECHANICS OF COMPOSITES
 SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP701B Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives: Enable the students to
1. Understand the mechanics of composite materials.
2. Study the Elastic behavior of composite lamina
3. Study the aspects of the Micromechanical Analysis of a Lamina
4. Develop the Micromechanical Analysis of a Lamina
5. Study the Failure, Analysis, and Design of Laminates
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to composite materials, Geometric definitions, Classification
of composites, Types of fibers, Types of the matrix, Hybrid composite,
12
scale of analysis- micro and macro mechanics approaches, Degree of
Anisotropy. Manufacturing methods of the composites, Autoclave
moulding, Filament winding, Resin transfer moulding.
Unit -2
Elastic behaviour of composite lamina (Micro mechanics), Micro
mechanics methods, Geometric aspects and elastic symmetry,
10
Longitudinal elastic properties (Continuous fibers), Transverse elastic
properties, In-plane shear properties (Continuous fibers), Longitudinal
properties (short fibers)
Unit – 3
Elastic behaviour of composite lamina (Macro mechanics approach),
stress strain relations: General anisotropic material, Specially 10
orthotropic material, transversely isotropic material, Orthotropic
material under plane stress, isotropic material.
Unit – 4
Standard sizes of the specimen for tensile and compressive, Fatigue
tests, impact test of unidirectional composites. Failure of the composite
10
materials: fibre failures, matrix failure, interface failure. Failure Theories
Tsai-Wu, Tsai-hill, Puck criterion, Maximum stress, maximum strain.
Unit – 5
Failure, Analysis, and Design of Laminates: Introduction, Special Cases
of Laminates, Failure Criterion for a Laminate, Design of a Laminated 8
Composite, static analysis of laminated plates.
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Understand the composite materials and manufacturing methods
2. Study the behaviour of composite Lamina
3. Study the properties of various types of composite materials. .
4. Apply Failure theories to calculate stresses in composite materials
5. Study the Failure, Analysis, and Design of Laminates
Text Books:
1. Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials by Isaac and M Daniel, Oxford
University Press, 1994.
2. B. D. Agarwal and L. J. Broutman, Analysis and performance of fibre
Composites, Wiley- Interscience, New York, 1980.
3. Mechanics of Composite Materials, Second Edition (Mechanical Engineering),
By Autar K. Kaw, Publisher: CRC.
Reference Books:
1. R. M. Jones, Mechanics of Composite Materials, McGraw Hill Company, New
York, 1975
2. Mechanics of Composite Materials Recent Advances by ZviHashin, Carl
T.Herakovich
3. L. R. Calcote, Analysis of Laminated Composite Structures, Van Nostrand
Rainfold, New York, 1969.
4. Principles of composite material mechanics by Ronald F.Gibson
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 3 2 3
2 2 2 3 2 3
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 2 3 2 3
Course 2 2 3 2 3
 NON - DESTRUCTIVE EVALUATION
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP701C Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Know basics of NDE methods and Learn concepts & principles of Visual and
Liquid penetrant testing methods.
2. Explore the concepts of Ultrasonic testing equipment, its techniques and
applications.
3. Determine the importance of Magnetic particle testing, testing procedure,
Calibration techniques, evaluation and Industrial applications.
4. Explain the principles of radiography, its techniques, safety aspects and
industrial applications.
5. Understand the concept of Eddy current test system, its effectiveness,
advantages and applications.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Introduction to non-destructive testing, Visual testing.
Liquid Penetrant Testing: Basic Concepts, Liquid Penetrant System,
10
Test Procedure, LPT Equipment, Standardization and Calibration,
Interpretation and Evaluation, Advantages, Effectiveness, Limitations,
Applications of LPT
Unit -2
Ultrasonic Testing: Basic Principles, Ultrasonic Equipment and
Variables affecting Ultrasonic Test, Ultrasonic Techniques,
10
Standardization and Calibration, Interpretation and Guidelines for
Acceptance, Rejection - Advantages, Effectiveness and Limitations of
Ultrasonic Testing, Applications
Unit – 3
Magnetic Particle Testing: Basic Principles of Magnetic Particle
Testing, Magnetic Materials, Magnetization of Materials,
10
Demagnetization of Materials, Magnetic Particle Test equipment,
Magnetic Particle Test Procedure, Standardization and Calibration,
advantages, limitations of the Magnetic Particle Test and applications
Unit – 4
Radiographic Testing: Basic Principles of Radiographic test, Sources of
X and Gamma Rays, Radiographic equipment, Radiographic Techniques,
10
Safety Aspects of Industrial Radiography, Advantages, Effectiveness,
Limitations and applications of Radiographic Testing
Unit – 5
Eddy Current Testing: Principles of Eddy Current testing, Eddy
Current Test System, Test Procedure, Applications of Eddy Current 10
Testing, Effectiveness of Eddy Current Testing, Advantages, Limitations
and applications of Eddy Current Testing
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Explain the working of Visual Inspection and Liquid penetrant test
methods and its applications.
2. Describe the working of Ultrasonic testing, its calibration procedure,
effectiveness, limitations and applications.
3. Explain the working of Magnetic particle testing procedure, the variables of the
process, and measure defects of using MPT.
4. Illustrate the working of Radiographic testing equipment & its sources, safety
aspects, industrial applications.
5. Explain the working of Eddy current testing equipment & procedure,
advantages, limitations, industrial applications.
Text Books:
1. Non-destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials by J Prasad, CGK Nair, TMH
Publishers.
2. Non-Destructive Testing by Dr. S.Ramachandran, Airwalk Publications.
3. Non-Destructive Testing Techniques by Ravi Prakash, New Age International
Private Limited.
Reference Books:
1. Non-Destructive Testing of Materials by V. Jayakumar, Lakshmi Publications.
2. Basics of Non-Destructive Testing by Lari& Kumar, S.K.Kataria& Sons
Publishers.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection Training for NDT: E. A. Gingel, Prometheus Press.
4. ASTM Standards, Vol 3.01, Metals and alloys

Question paper pattern:

1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 2 3 2 2 2
2 2 2 3 2 2 2
3 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 2 3 2 2 1
5 3 2 3 2 2 1
Course 3 2 3 2 2 1
 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP701D Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Integrate the knowledge of semiconductors and solid mechanics to fabricate
MEMS devices.
2. Understand the rudiments of Micro fabrication techniques.
3. Identify and understand the various sensors and actuators
4. Different materials used for MEMS
5. Applications of MEMS to disciplines beyond Electrical and Mechanical
engineering
Unit -1 Hours
INTRODUCTION: Definition of MEMS, MEMS history and development,
micro machining, lithography principles & methods, structural and
sacrificial materials, thin film deposition, impurity doping, etching,
surface micro machining, wafer bonding, LIGA.
10
MECHANICAL SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Principles of sensing and
actuation: beam and cantilever, capacitive, piezo electric, strain,
pressure, flow, pressure measurement by micro phone, MEMS
gyroscopes, shear mode piezo actuator, gripping piezo actuator,
Inchworm technology.
Unit -2
THERMAL SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Thermal energy basics and
heat transfer processes, thermisters, thermo devices, thermo couple,
micro machined thermo couple probe, peltier effect heat pumps, thermal
flow sensors, micro hot plate gas sensors, MEMS thermo vessels, pyro
electricity, shape memory alloys (SMA), U-shaped horizontal and vertical
electro thermal actuator, thermally activated MEMS relay, micro spring
thermal actuator, data storage cantilever. 10
MAGNETIC SENSORS AND ACTUATORS: Magnetic materials for MEMS
and properties, magnetic sensing and detection, magneto resistive
sensor, more on hall effect, magneto diodes, magneto transistor, MEMS
magnetic sensor, pressure sensor utilizing MOKE, magnetic MEMS
actuators, by directional micro actuator, feedback circuit integrated
magnetic actuator, large force reluctance actuator, magnetic probe-
based storage device.
Unit – 3
MICRO-OPTO-ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Principle of
10
MOEMS technology, properties of light, light modulators, beam splitter,
micro lens, micro mirrors, digital micro mirror device (DMD), light
detectors, grating light valve (GLV), optical switch, wave guide and
tuning, shear stress measurement.
Unit – 4
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) MEMS: RF – based communication systems,
RF MEMS, MEMS inductors, varactors, tuner/filter, resonator,
clarification of tuner, filter, resonator, MEMS switches, phase shifter.
MICRO FLUIDIC SYSTEMS: Applications, considerations on micro scale
fluid, fluid actuation methods, dielectro phoresis (DEP), electro wetting, 10
electro thermal flow, thermo capillary effect, electro osmosis flow, opto
electro wetting (OEW), tuning using micro fluidics, typical micro fluidic
channel, microfluid dispenser, micro needle, molecular gate, micro
pumps.
Unit – 5
CHEMICAL AND BIO MEDICAL MICRO SYSTEMS: Sensing mechanism
& principle, membrane transducer materials, chem.-lab-on-a-chip
(CLOC) chemo resistors, chemo capacitors, chemo transistors, electronic 10
nose (Enose), mass sensitive chemo sensors, fluroscence detection,
calorimetric spectroscopy.
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Understand working principles of currently available micro sensors, actuators,
and motors, valves, pumps, and fluidics used in Microsystems.
2. choose a various Thermal & Magnetic Sensors and Actuators
3. understand and analyse, linear and digital electronic circuits.
4. Explain the RF MEMS & Different materials used for MEMS
5. Demonstrate a detailed understanding of the fundamental principles of
nanotechnology and their application to biomedical engineering.
Text Books:
1. MEMS, Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, TMH Publishing co.
Reference Books:
1. Foundation of MEMS, Chang Liu, Prentice Hall Ltd.
2. Bio-MEMS (Micro systems), Gerald Urban, Springer.
3. MEMS and Micro Systems: Design and Manufacture, Tai-Ran Hsu, TMH
Publishers.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 2 3 2
2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 2 3 2
4 2 2 2 3 2
5 2 2 2 3 2
Course 2 2 2 3 2
 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP701E Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for the
understanding the principles of product development process, customer needs,
setting product specification, testing and prototyping for new product design and
development.
Unit -1 Hours
INTRODUCTION: A Generic Development Process – Adapting the
Generic Product Development Process - Product Development Process
10
Flows- Digital tools for product design– Identifying Customer Needs -
Product Specifications: Establishing Target Specifications; Setting the
Final Specifications.
Unit -2
CONCEPT GENERATION: The Activity of Concept Generation - Concept
10
Selection: Concept Screening; Concept Scoring – Concept Testing –
Concept innovation using TRIZ
Unit – 3
PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE Implications of the Architecture;
Establishing the Architecture; Delayed Differentiation; Platform
Planning; Related System-Level Design Issues – Industrial Design: 10
Assessing the Need for Industrial Design; Impact of Industrial Design;
The Industrial Design Process; Management of the Industrial Design
Process; Assessing the Quality of Industrial Design.
Unit – 4
DFM AND PROTOTYPING Design for Manufacturing: Estimate the
Manufacturing Costs; Reduce the Costs of Components; Reduce the
Costs of Assembly; Reduce the Costs of Supporting Production; Consider 10
the Impact of DFMA– Prototyping: Type; Uses; Principles; Technologies;
Planning for Prototypes.
Unit – 5
PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS Elements of Economic
Analysis; Economic Analysis Process – sustainable product development:
10
framework and metrics – life cycle assessment of a product: stages and
impact
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Apply the principles of generic development process; conduct customer need
analysis; and set product specification for new product design and
development.
2. Generate, select, screen, and test concepts for new product design and
 development.
3. Apply the principles of product architecture and industrial design to design
and develop new products.
4. Apply the principles of DFMA and Prototyping to design and develop new
product.
5. Apply the concepts of economics principles sustainable product development
and life cycle assessment.
Text Books:
1. Jamnia, A., Introduction to Product Design and Development for Engineers,
CRC Press, 2018.
2. Karl, T. Ulrich and Steven, D. Eppinger, “Product Design and Development”,
McGraw Hill, 2003.
Reference Books:
1. Belz A., 36-Hour Course: “Product Development” McGraw-Hill, 2010.
2. Chitale, A. K. and Gupta, R. C., Product Design and Manufacturing, PHI
Learning, 2013.
3. Pugh S., “Total Design – Integrated Methods for successful Product
Engineering”, Addison Wesley Publishing, 1991.
4. Rosenthal S., “Effective Product Design and Development”, Business One,
1992.
5. Silva, A., Handbook of Research on Trends in Product Design and
Development: Technological and Organizational Perspectives: Technological
and Organizational Perspectives, IGI Global, 2010.
6. Devdas Shetty, “Product design for Engineers”, Cengage Learning
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 2 2 3 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 2 2 3 2
4 2 1 2 2 3 2
5 2 2 2 2 3 2
Course 2 2 2 2 3 2
 REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP702A Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. To impart the basic concepts of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning.
2. To develop a sound physical understanding of the subject so that the
learner will demonstrate the ability to design a refrigeration or air-
conditioning equipment that meets the required specifications.
3. Comparative study of different refrigerants with respect to properties,
applications and Environmental issues, air conditioning processes on
psychrometric charts.
4. Calculate cooling load for its applications in comfort and industrial air
conditioning.
5. Study of the various equipment-operating principles, operating and safety
controls employed in refrigeration air conditioning systems.

Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to Refrigeration: Necessity and applications – unit of
refrigeration and C.O.P., Mechanical refrigeration – types of ideal cycles
of refrigeration,
12
Air Refrigeration: Air Refrigeration Cycles-reversed Carnot cycle, Bell-
Coleman cycle analysis, Air Refrigeration systems-merits and demerits –
refrigeration systems used in air crafts and problems.

Unit -2
Vapour Compression Refrigeration (VCR): Working principle and
essential components of the plant, Simple vapour compression
refrigeration cycle – COP – representation of cycle on T-S and p-h
charts, effect of sub-cooling and superheating – cycle analysis actual
10
cycle influence of various parameters on system performance – use of
p-h charts – numerical problems.
VCR System Components: Compressors, Condensers, Evaporators,
Expansion devices–classification–working principles.

Unit – 3
Refrigerants – Desirable properties – classification - refrigerants used
– nomenclature – ozone depletion –global warming.
Vapour Absorption Systems: Other types of Refrigeration systems –
10
Vapour Absorption Refrigeration Systems, Absorbent – Refrigerant
combinations, Water- Ammonia Systems, Water-Lithium Bromide
System, Contrast between the two systems, Modified Version of Aqua-
Ammonia System with Rectifier and Analyser Assembly.
Unit – 4
Psychrometry: Introduction to Psychrometry, Psychrometric
Properties & Processes, Air-water vapour mixtures, Psychrometric
Chart. Numerical problems 10
Load calculations: Concepts of RSHF, GSHF & ERSHF-ADP
temperature, problems
Unit – 5
Introduction to Air conditioning: Classification, Applications of Air-
Conditioning, Requirements of human comfort and concept of effective
temperature- comfort chart – comfort air conditioning – need for
ventilation and consideration of infiltrated air- requirements of
industrial air-conditioning. 8
Air conditioning equipment: Cooling, heating, humidification and
dehumidification,
filters, grills and registers fans and blowers. heat pump – heat sources –
different heat pump circuits.
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Determine the COP for Bell-Coleman cycle and various types of aircraft
refrigeration system.
2. Calculate the COP of the VCR cycle and indicate on T-S and P-H diagrams.
3. Select the suitable refrigerant for the refrigeration system as per the
requirements, various vapour absorption refrigeration systems and non-
conventional refrigeration systems.
4. Analyze the cooling load and heating load using the principle of Psychrometry
5. Decide suitable components for the air condition system as per need and
compare the heat pump circuits
Text Books:
1. A Course in Refrigeration and Air conditioning / SC Arora &
Domkundwar/Dhanpatrai
2. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning / CP Arora / TMH.
Reference Books:
1. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning / Manohar Prasad / New Age.
2. Principles of Refrigeration /Dossat / Pearson Education.
3. Refrigeration and Air-conditioning, Stoecker W.F., and Jones J.W., Mc Graw -
Hill, New Delhi
4. Refrigeration and Air-conditioning by R K Rajput

Question paper pattern:

1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3
2 3 3 2 1 3
3 3 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 3
5 3 3 2 3
Course 3 3 2 1 3

SYNTHESIS AND CHARACTERIZATION OF MATERIALS

SEMESTER - VI
Subject Code 21MEMEP702B Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Students gains deeper knowledge and understanding about the synthesis
of materials.
2. To understand the importance of improvement of synthesis and
characterization of their materials.
3. Understand the requirements for suitable techniques for each deposition
techniques used.
4. To understand various advanced characterization equipment used to
characterize different types of materials.
5. Gain knowledge about thermal testings and characterizations on composite
materials
Unit -1 Hours
Synthesis of nano materials: Gold, Silver, different types of nano
oxides, TiO2, ZnO by using sol-gel method, Co-precipitation,
Hydrothermal, Microwave, thermal and bio synthesis methods, Nano 10
tubes and Nano wires, Carbon nano tubes, Graphene preparation,
powder syntheses, crystal growth techniques, zone refining, properties
and applications.
Unit -2
Top down and bottom-up synthesis- Mechanical alloying, Mechanical
ball-milling, Ion implantation, Inert gas condensation, Arc discharge, 10
RF-plasma arc technique, Laser ablation, Template assisted synthesis,
Clusters, Colloids, Zeolites, Porous silicon
Unit – 3
Deposition techniques: Chemical vapour deposition (CVD), Metal
Organic chemical vapour deposition (MOCVD)
Epitaxial growth techniques: Molecular beam epitaxy, Atomic layer 10
deposition, Pulsed laser deposition, Pulsed electrochemical deposition,
Magnetron sputtering, Spin coating, Introduction to Lithography
techniques
Unit – 4
Principle, Theory, Working and Application; X-Ray Diffraction, Field
Emission Scanning Electron Microscopy, High Resolution-Transmission
10
Electron Microscopy, Atomic Force Microscopy, Scanning Tunnelling
Microscopy.
Unit – 5
Photoluminescence Spectroscopy, Raman Spectroscopy, X-Ray
Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS), Thermal analysis – Differential
10
Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) – Thermo gravimetric Analysis (TGA)–
Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA) – Dynamic Mechanical Analysis
(DMA), Mechanical Testing- Nano Indentation -Vibrating Sample
Magnetometer, Zeta Potential and Particle size measurement.
Course outcomes:
On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. The students are expected to understand basic principles of the synthesis and
characterization techniques presented in the course, specific usage, their
advantages and limitations
2. To understand the role of Top down and bottom-up synthesis and their
importance in materials property.
3. Students should be able to understand the requirements for suitable
techniques for each deposition techniques used.
4. They should be able to operate the instruments based on the knowledge
gained on various applications.
5. To analyze various thermal testings and mechanical nano Indentation
Text Books:
1. Nano material, A.K. Bandyopadyay, New age Publishers
2. Material science and Technology: A comprehensive treatment, Robert W.Cahn,
3. Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials, Isaac and M Daniel, Oxford
University Press
Reference Books:
1. Mechanics of Composite Materials R. M. Jones, McGraw Hill Company, New
York, 1975.
2. Analysis of Laminated Composite Structures, L. R. Calcote/Van Nostrand
Rainfold, New York 1969
3. Analysis and performance of fibre Composites, B. D. Agarwal and L. J.
Broutman, Wiley
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
 1 2 2 3 2 2 3
2 2 2 3 2 2 3
3 2 2 3 2 2 3
4 2 2 3 2 2 3
5 2 2 3 2 2 3
Course 2 2 3 2 2 3
 SMART MANUFACTURING & IIOT
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP702C Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Learn different types of FMS layouts
2. Gain the knowledge of Automated Production Lines
3. Understanding the performance of material handling and storage techniques
4. Describe the Automated Assembly Systems
5. Understanding the characteristics of IIoT
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to Flexible Manufacturing System:
Evolution of Manufacturing Systems, Definition, objective and Need,
Components, Merits, Demerits and Applications. 10
Classification of FMS Layouts:
Layouts and their Salient features, Single line, dual line, loop, ladder,
robot center type etc.
Unit -2
Automated Production Lines: Fundamentals- System configurations,
work part transfer mechanisms, Storage buffers, and Control of the
08
production line. Applications — Machining systems and System Design
Considerations. Analysis of Transfer lines — Transfer lines with No
internal parts storage, Transfer lines with internal storage buffers.
Unit – 3
Automated Material Handling: Automated Guided Vehicle (AGV)
Systems, Types and applications, Vehicle Guidance Technology, Vehicle
10
Management and Vehicle safety.
Automated Storage Systems: Automated Storage/Retrieval Systems
(AS/RS) and Carousel Storage Systems.
Unit – 4
Automated Assembly Systems: System configurations, Parts delivery at
workstations, and applications, quantitative analysis of assembly
12
systems-Parts Delivery System at Workstations, Multi-Station Assembly
Machines, Single Station Assembly Machines, Partial Automation.
Unit – 5
Introduction to IIoT: Characteristics of IIoT, levels & deployment
templates, Sensing, Actuation, Communication Protocols, Machine-to- 10
Machine Communications, Difference between IIoT and M2M,
Communication modules - RFID, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, Zigbee.
Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be in a position to:
1. Apply FMS with manufacturing systems including job- shop and mass
production systems.
2. Determine the basic components and their functions of automated production
lines.
3. Analyze materials handling and storage systems in manufacturing.
4. Differentiate various automated assembly systems.
5. Assess the characteristics of IIoT and analyze the difference between M2M and
IIoT.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Groover, M.P “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated
Manufacturing 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Delhi, 2007.
2. William W Luggen, “Flexible Manufacturing Cells and System” Prentice Hall of
Inc New Jersey, 1991
3. A. Bahga and V. Madisetti, Internet of Things, A hands-on approach, VPT, 1st
edition, 2014.
REFRENCE BOOKS
1. Automation by Buckinghsm W, Haper& Row Publishers, New York, 1961
2. Reza A Maleki “Flexible Manufacturing system” Prentice Hall of Inc New
Jersey, 1991
3. S. Misra, C. Roy, and A. Mukherjee, Introduction to Industrial Internet of
Things and Industry 4.0, CRC Press, 2020.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each course
outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 1 3 2 3
2 3 2 2 3 1 3
3 3 1 2 3 2 3
4 3 1 2 3 2 3
5 3 2 2 3 2 3
Course 3 2 2 3 2 3
 Tribology
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP702D Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. To provide broad based understanding of the interdisciplinary subject
‘tribology’ and surface characterization techniques.
2. To learn about the contact of solid surfaces and their interactions
consequences of wear, wear mechanisms, wear theories and analysis of wear
problems
3. To understand the genesis of friction, the theories/laws of sliding and rolling
friction
4. To learn about the principles of lubrication, lubrication regimes, theories of
hydrodynamic, elasto hydrodynamic and mixed/ boundary lubrication
5. To learn about tribo testing and experimental techniques in tribology and
tribological modelling and simulation
6. To learn about tribology of different machine components and emerging areas
such as micro/nano tribology
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Nature of surfaces and contact-Surface topography-
friction and wear mechanisms, wear maps, effect of lubricants- methods 10
of fluid film formation. Lubrication: Choice of lubricants, types of oil,
Grease and solid lubricants- additives- lubrication systems and their
selection.
Unit -2
Selection of rolling element bearings: Nominal life, static and dynamic
capacity-Equivalent load, probabilities of survival- cubic mean load- 08
bearing mounting details, pre loading of bearings, conditioning
monitoring using shock pulse method.
Unit – 3
Hydrostatic Bearings: Thrust bearings – pad coefficients- restriction- 10
optimum film thickness-journal bearings – design procedure –Aerostatic
bearings; Thrust bearings and Journal bearings – design procedure.
Unit – 4
Hydrodynamic bearings: Fundamentals of fluid formation – Reynold’s
equation; Hydrodynamic journal bearings – Sommerfield number-
performance parameters – optimum bearing with maximum load capacity 12
– Friction – Heat generated and Heat dissipated. Hydrodynamic thrust
bearings; Raimondi and Boyd solution for hydrodynamic thrust bearings-
fixed tilting pads, single and multiple pad bearings-optimum condition
with largest minimum film thickness.
Unit – 5
Seals: different type-mechanical seals, lip seals, packed glands, soft
piston seals, Mechanical piston rod packing, labyrinth seals and
throttling bushes, oil flinger rings and drain grooves – selection of
mechanical seals. Failure of Tribological components: Failure analysis of 10
plain bearings, rolling bearings, gears and seals, wear analysis using
soap and Ferro graphy. Dry rubbing Bearings: porous metal bearings and
oscillatory journal bearings – qualitative approach only.
Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be in a position to:
1. Demonstrate basic understanding of friction, lubrication and wear recesses.
Become familiar with mathematical tools used to analyze tribological
processes.
2. Become familiar with rolling element bearings and the lubricants used therein.
3. Enhance students' awareness of tribological issues in the design of machine
components, such as rolling element bearings, journal bearings, thrust
bearings, seals and braking systems.
4. Describe the detailed operation of selected Hydrodynamic journal bearings
5. Exposed to design a tribological system for optimal performance.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Rowe WW& O’ Dionoghue,” Hydrostatic and Hybrid bearing design “ Butter
worths& Co.Publishers Ltd,1983.
2. Collacott R.A,” Mechanical Fault diagnosis and condition monitoring”,
Chapman and Hall, London 1977.
3. Bernard J.Hamrock, “ Fundamentals of fluid film lubricant”, McGraw-Hill
Co.,1994.
4. Introduction to Tribology of bearings – B.C.Majumdar – S Chand Publishing.
REFRENCE BOOKS
1. Neale MJ, (Editor) “Tribology hand Book” NeumannButterworths, 1975.
2. Connor and Boyd JJO (Editors) “Standard hand book of lubrication
engineers” ASLE,Mc Graw Hill Book & Co.,1968
3. Shigley J, E Charles,“Mechanical Engineering Design”, McGraw Hill Co., 1989
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each course
outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

CO/PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 1 3 2 3
2 3 2 2 3 1 3
3 3 1 2 3 2 3
4 3 1 2 3 2 3
5 3 2 2 3 2 3
Course 3 2 2 3 2 3

Hydrogen & Fuel Cells

 SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP702E Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. To introduce to emerging technologies like production and storage of Hydrogen
2. To impart knowledge on use of hydrogen for achieving sustainable growth and
facilitate analysis of the challenges in transition to hydrogen economy
Unit -1 Hours
Hydrogen Energy Economy: Hydrogen Energy Economy – Conception,
Present status and a vision – Applications of Hydrogen - Transport 10
application-cars, light trucks, buses - Stationary and Portable-Electronic
gadgets.
Unit -2
Hydrogen And Production Techniques: Hydrogen – Physical and
chemical properties, salient characteristics - Production of hydrogen – 08
Steam reforming – Water electrolysis – Gasification and woody biomass
conversion – Biological hydrogen production – Photo dissociation – Direct
thermal or catalytic splitting of water.
Unit – 3
Hydrogen Storage & Transport: Hydrogen storage options – Compressed
gas – Liquid hydrogen – Hydride – Chemical Storage – Comparisons - 10
Transport of Hydrogen - Pipelines, gaseous, liquid and compound
materials.
Unit – 4
Fuel Cells: History – Principle - Working - Thermodynamics and kinetics
of fuel cell process – Performance evaluation of fuel cell – Comparison on 12
battery Vs fuel cell - Types of fuel cells – AFC, PAFC, SOFC, MCFC,
DMFC, PEMFC – Relative merits and demerits.
Unit – 5
Application Of Fuel Cell: Fuel cell usage for domestic power systems -
large scale power generation – Automobile - Space - Environmental 10
analysis of usage of Hydrogen in Fuel cell - Future trends in fuel cells.
Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be in a position to:
1. Gets exposure to different fuel cells in particularly Hydrogen fuel cells
2. Gain an advanced understanding of hydrogen, electrolysis and fuel cell, the
various types available and how they work
3. Learn about Hydrogen storage & Transport methods
4. Explain the working of AFC, PAFC, SOFC, MCFC, DMFC, PEMFC type of Fuel
cells
5. Understand the merits, demerits applications of Fuel cells
TEXT BOOKS
1. Hydrogen and Fuel Cells: A Comprehensive Guide, Rebecca L. and Busby,
Penn Well Corporation, Oklahoma (2005)
REFRENCE BOOKS
1. Hydrogen and Fuel Cells: Emerging Technologies and Applications, Bent
Sorensen (Sørensen), Elsevier, UK (2005)
2. Fuel Cell and Their Applications, Kordesch, K and G.Simader, Wiley-Vch,
Germany (1996).
3. Fuel Cells: Theory and Application, Hart, A.B and G.J.Womack, Prentice Hall,
NewYork Ltd., London (1989)
4. The Hydrogen Economy, Jeremy Rifkin, Penguin Group, USA (2002).
5. Fuel Cells – Principles and Applications, Viswanathan, B and M Aulice
Scibioh, Universities Press (2006)
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each course
outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 2 2 2 3
2 3 2 3 1 1 1 3
3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3
4 3 2 3 2 2 2 3
5 3 2 3 2 2 2 3
Course 3 2 3 2 2 2 3

SOLAR ENERGY ENGINEERING AND APPLICATIONS

SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP703A Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. To understand the basics of the Solar Radiation.
2. To understand the concept of Photo Voltaics.
3. To understand the Solar Cell Technologies.
4. To understand thin film technologies.
5. To understand the methods of solar energy collections.
Unit -1 Hours
Solar Radiation: Solar energy option, solar power, structure of the sun,
the solar constant, sun-earth relationships, solar radiation types, solar 10
radiation on titled surface, instruments for measuring solar radiation and
sun shine. Solar Tracking Systems – Single axis – Dual axis
Unit -2
Photovoltaic Fundamentals: Place of PV in energy supply – PV Cells -
Modules and arrays - Review of semiconductor physics and operating 8
principle - Introduction to P-N and P-I-N junctions - Cell parameters
limits-Losses in solar cells-Solar cell design for high Isc,, Voc and FF.
Unit – 3
Solar Cell Technologies: Silicon based technologies (mono-crystalline,
poly-crystalline – ribbon - silicon film) - Flow of silicon material - 12
Manufacturing processes (wafer, cell and module) for Mono and poly Si
technologies - Efficiency of Si cells
Unit – 4
Thin film technologies (Silicon and Non-silicon): Material-deposition
techniques - Amorphous Si cells/modules - micro-morph cell - Silicon
10
film- non-silicon technologies viz Cadmium telluride - Cu Indium Gallium
Diselenide.
Unit – 5
SOLAR ENERGY COLLECTION: Solar Flat plate collectors -
Concentrating Collectors - Compound Parabolic Collector - Collector
Efficiency, solar ponds, solar applications- solar heating/cooling 10
technique, solar distillation and drying, solar cookers, central power
tower concept and solar chimney
Course outcomes:
On the completion of this course, students are able to
1. Discuss the basics of the Solar Radiation
2. Describe the concept of Photo Voltaics.
3. Describe the Solar Cell Technologies
4. Differentiate Thin film technologies
5. Illustrate the methods of solar energy collections
Text Books:
1. Sukhatme S.P. and J.K.Nayak, Solar Energy – Principles of Thermal Collection
and Storage, TMH.
2. Khan B.H., Non-Conventional Energy Resources, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi,
2006
3. Green Manufacturing Processes and Systems, Edited by J. PauloDavim,
Springer 2013

References Books:
1. Principles of Solar Energy / Frank Krieth & John F Kreider.
2. Non-Conventional Energy / Ashok V Desai /Wiley Eas
3. Renewable Energy Technologies/ G.D Roy

Question paper pattern:

1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice).
2. All questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 1 1 2 3
2 3 2 2 1 1 3
3 3 1 2 2 2 3
4 3 1 2 2 2 3
5 3 2 2 2 2 3
Course 3 2 2 2 2 3

ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP703B Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. To understand the fundamental concepts of Additive Manufacturing (i.e.
Rapid Prototyping) and its advantages and limitations.
2. To classify various types of Liquid Based Rapid Prototyping Systems
Processes and know their working principle, advantages, limitations etc.
3. To classify various types of Solid Based Rapid Prototyping Systems
Processes and know their working principle, advantages, limitations etc.
4. To classify various types of Powder Based Rapid Prototyping Systems
Processes and know their working principle, advantages, limitations etc.
5. To have a holistic view of various applications of these technologies in relevant
fields such as Mechanical, Bio-medical, Aerospace, electronics etc.

Unit -1 Hours
Introduction:
Prototype, Roles of Prototype, Need for time compression in product
development, Need of Additive Manufacturing (AM), Generic AM process,
Distinction between AM and CNC, Classification of AM Processes, Steps 12
in AM process, Advantages of AM, Major Applications. Stereolithography
(SL), Materials, SL resin curing process, Micro-stereolithography, Process
Benefits and Drawbacks, Applications of Photopolymerization Processes.

Unit -2
Stereo lithography Apparatus (SLA): models and specifications,
process, working principle, photopolymers, photo polymerization,
layering technology, laser and laser scanning, applications, advantages
10
and disadvantages, case studies.
Solid Ground Curing (SGC): Models and specifications, process, working
principle, applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies.

Unit – 3
Laminated object manufacturing (LOM): Models and specifications,
process, working principle, applications, advantages and disadvantages,
case studies.
10
Fused deposition modeling (FDM): Models and specifications, process,
working principle, applications, advantages and disadvantages, case
studies.

Unit – 4
Selective laser sintering (SLS): Models and specifications, process,
working principle, applications, advantages and disadvantages, case
10
studies.
3-D Printing: Models and specifications, process, working principle,
applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies.

Unit – 5
Engineering Applications of Additive Manufacturing:
Analysis and planning, aerospace industry, automotive industry, jewelry
industry, coin industry, GIS application, arts and architecture.
RP Applications in Medical and Bioengineering: Planning and
8
simulation of complex surgery, customized implants & prosthesis, design
and production of medical devices, forensic science and anthropology,
visualization of bimolecular.

Course outcomes:
1. To study the working principles and process parameters of Additive
Manufacturing processes
2. To understand the liquid based Additive Manufacturing process parameters
and application of these techniques
3. To learn the solid based Additive Manufacturing process parameters and
application of these techniques
4. To understand about the powder based Additive Manufacturing process
parameters and application of these techniques
5. To study the applications of Additive Manufacturing processes in various
fields

Text Books:
1. Rapid prototyping: Principles and Applications /Chua C.K., Leong K.F. and
LIM C.S/World Scientific publications
2. A Treatise on Additive manufacturing/ R B Choudary/ Khanna Publishers

Reference Books:
1. Rapid Manufacturing / D.T. Pham and S.S. Dimov/Springer
2. Wohlers Report 2000 /Terry T Wohlers/Wohlers Associates
3. Rapid Prototyping & Manufacturing / Paul F.Jacobs/ASME Press

Question paper pattern:

1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
 1 2 2 2 2 2
2 1 2 2 1 2
3 1 2 1 2
4 2 1 2 1
5 2 1 2 1
Course 2 2 2 2 2 2

PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL

SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP703C IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Students should be able to:
1. Understand the concepts of production and service systems
2. Apply forecasting techniques for various firms, namely qualitative &
quantitative methods to optimize/make best use of resources in achieving
their objectives.
3. Identify different strategies employed in manufacturing and service
industries to plan inventory and Impart knowledge on the Materials
Requirement Planning and Kanban, LOB and JIT Methods.
4. Determine the exact routing and scheduling which will be followed in
production. And apply different scheduling policies in planning and control
and make best use of resources.
5. Measure the effectiveness, identify likely areas for improvement, develop
and implement improved planning and control methods for production
systems.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Definition – objectives and functions of production
planning and control – elements of production control – types of
Hours – 08
production – organization of production planning and control
department – internal organization of department.
Unit -2
Forecasting – importance of forecasting – types of forecasting,
their uses – general principles of forecasting – forecasting Hours – 10
techniques – qualitative methods and quantitative methods.
Unit – 3
Inventory management – functions of inventories – relevant
inventory costs – ABC analysis – VED analysis – EOQ model –
Inventory control systems – P–Systems and Q-Systems Hours – 10
Introduction to MRP I, MRP II, ERP, LOB (Line of Balance), JIT
and KANBAN system.
Unit – 4
Routing & Scheduling– definition – routing procedure –route
sheets – bill of material – factors affecting routing procedure,
schedule –definition – difference with loading, Scheduling policies Hours – 12
– techniques, standard scheduling methods, line balancing,
aggregate planning.
Unit-5
Dispatching– activities of dispatcher – dispatching procedure –
follow up – definition – reason for existence of functions – types of
Hours – 10
follow up, expediting, controlling aspects. Applications of
computer in production planning and control.
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Illustrate the systems concept for the design of production and service
systems.
2. Develop forecasts in the manufacturing and service sectors using selected
 quantitative and qualitative techniques
3. Discuss the importance and function of inventory and to be able to apply
selected techniques for its control and management under dependent and
independent demand circumstances.
4. Select and use an appropriate principles/methods/ techniques/ modern
concept with reference to given application/situation in the preparation of
route sheets with scheduling and loading in manufacturing systems.
5. Create and engage in life-long learning in the context of technological change
in Operations Management and also able to identify dispatching, follow-up
activities in the system
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Text Books
1. Elements of Production Planning and Control / Samuel Eilon/Universal Book
Corp.
2. Manufacturing, Planning and Control/PartikJonssonStig-Arne
Reference Books
1. Inventory Control Theory and Practice / Martin K. Starr and David W.
Miller/Prentice-Hall
2. Production Planning and Control/Mukhopadyay/PHI
3. Production Control A Quantitative Approach / John E. Biegel/Prentice-Hall
Web references
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102106/
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107143/
3. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107142/33
4. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107142/31
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107142/36

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO /PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 1 1 1 1
2 2 1 3 1
3 2 3 2
4 1 1 1 3 1
 5 1 1 3 2 2 1
Course 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 2
 MACHINE TOOL DESIGN
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP703D IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Students should be able to:
1. To learn and applications of the basics and working principles of different
types of machine tools
2. To grasp the knowledge of critical functional and operational requirements
of different types of machine tools
3. To learn the knowledge of design of different types of machine tools to meet
varied functional and operational requirements.
Unit -1 Hours
Basic features: Classification of machine tools-Basic features of
construction and fundamental kinematic mechanisms of general
purpose, special purpose machine tools, transfer machines, Hours – 08
Automatic and N.C. machines. Mechanisms used for converting
rotary to linear motion: Mechanisms for intermittent motion.
Unit -2
Kinematics, Drives of Machine tools: Selection of range of
speeds and feeds. Layout in G.P., A.P. and H.P, standardization of
speeds and feeds. Productivity loss. Selection of highest and
lowest speeds, range ratio. Design of ray diagram and structural Hours – 10
diagrams for machine tool gear boxes. Sliding, clustered and
clutched drives, support drive.

Unit – 3
Feed gear boxes: Norton and Meander drives pre-selection of
speed, stepped and stepless regulation. Strength, rigidity and
design analysis: Analysis of beds, frames, columns. Materials for
structures. Methods to improve the rigidity of structures. Types of Hours – 10
Guide ways-overall compliance of machine tool. Thermal effects-
functional accuracy of machine tool.

Unit – 4
Spindle units: Spindle units of lathe, drilling, milling and
grinding machines, materials for spindles. Spindle design. Effect
Hours – 12
of clearance on the rigidity of spindle. Hydrodynamic, hydrostatic,
rolling bearings. Selection of bearings.
Unit-5
Jigs & Fixtures: Principles of design of jigs and fixtures and
uses, classification of jigs & fixtures, principles of location and Hours – 10
clamping, types of clamping & work holding devices, typical
examples of jigs and fixtures.
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Understand the basic working principles of different machine tools with
kinematic mechanisms.
2. Distinguish the functional and operational requirements of different machine
tools
3. Design speed and feed gear boxes for a particular configuration.
4. Design machine tool structures for strength and rigidity
5. Understand various controls used in machine tools
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Text Books
1. Sen G.S., & Battacharya, "Principles of Machine Tools", New Central Book
Agency, Calcutta, 1986.
2. Machine Tool Design and Numerical Control/ NK Mehata / Tata MeGraw Hills,
2012
Reference Books
1. Basu S.K., "Design of Machine Tools", Allied Publishers, 1980.
2. Russe W. Henke, "Introduction to Fluid Power Circuits and Systems", Addison
Wesley, 1970.
3. Metal Cutting and Tool Design – Dr.B.J.Ranganath - Vikas Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd.- 2 nd Edition - 2018
4. A Textbook of Production Engineering – P.C.Sharma- S.Chand Publishers.

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO /PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 1 1 3 1 1
3 2 1 3 1 2
4 1 1 3 1 2
5 1 1 3 2 2 1
Course 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

 SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMEP703E IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Students should be able to:
 To study the basic governing equations and understand the basic properties of
CFD.
 To impart the knowledge of numerical techniques to the solution of fluid
dynamics and heat transfer problems.
 Specify need for implementation aspects to finite difference equations,
consistency, explicit and implicit methods.
 Acquire knowledge of first order wave equation, stability of hyperbolic and
elliptic equations.
 Recognize finite volume method, linear interpolation and quadratic
interpolation. Common matrix methods such as direct methods for matrix
inversion and direct methods for banded matrices.
Unit -1 Hours
Number system and errors, representation of integers, fractions,
floating point arithmetic, loss of significance and error propagation,
condition and instability, computational methods for error estimation,
08
convergence of sequences. Solution of a system of simultaneous linear
algebraic equations, iterative schemes of matrix inversion, direct
methods for matrix inversion, direct methods for banded matrices.
Unit -2
conservation of mass, Newton’s second law of motion, expanded forms
of navier-stokes equations, conservation of energy principle, special
forms of the Navier-stokes equations. Steady flow, dimensionless form
10
of momentum and energy equations, stokes equation, conservative
body force fields, stream function - vorticity formulation.

Unit – 3
Finite difference applications in heat conduction and convention – heat
conduction, steady heat conduction in a rectangular geometry,
transient heat conduction, finite difference application in convective
heat transfer, closure. Finite differences, discretization, consistency,
10
stability, and fundamentals of fluid flow modelling: introduction,
elementary finite difference quotients, implementation aspects of finite-
difference equations, consistency, explicit and implicit methods.

Unit – 4
Introduction to first order wave equation, stability of hyperbolic and
elliptic equations, fundamentals of fluid flow modelling, conservative 12
property, the upwind scheme.
Unit-5
FINITE VOLUME METHOD: Approximation of surface integrals, volume
integrals, interpolation and differentiation practices, upwind 10
interpolation, linear interpolation and quadratic interpolation.
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Understand and be able to numerically solve the governing equations for fluid
flow and solve partial differential equations and analyze the behavior of them
2. Apply Numerical techniques and matrix methods to solve banded matrices
3. Apply finite difference techniques to solve the heat transfer and fluid flow
energy equations
4. Evaluate fluid flow problem using various mathematical methods.
5. Investigate problems using finite volume methods.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Text Books
1. Numerical heat transfer and fluid flow / Suhas V. Patankar/Butter-worth
Publishers
2. Computational fluid dynamics - Basics with applications /John. D. Anderson
/ Mc Graw Hill.
Reference Books
1. Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer/ Niyogi/Pearson Publications
2. Fundamentals of Computational Fluid Dynamics /Tapan K. Sengupta /
Universities Press.
3. Computational fluid dynamics: An introduction, 3rd edition/John.F
Wendt/Springer publishers

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO /PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 1 2 2 1 1 3 1
2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 1
3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2
4 3 2 2 3 1 2 1
5 3 1 2 3 1 2 2 1
Course 3 2 2 3 1 2 2 2
 OPERATIONS RESEARCH
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMET7060 Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. 1. Understand the definition, scope, objectives, phases, models and limitations of
operations research and developing the ability to formulate the linear
programming problems for minimizing the project cost and maximizing its profit.
2. 2. Solve linear programming problems using various techniques based on the
constraints
3. 3. Understand about different application areas of operations research like
transportation problem, assignment model.
4. 4. Suggest optimal sequence and replacement policy to be maintained for better
and economic growth of the industry.
5. 5. Suggest optimal game strategies and estimation of waiting times in waiting line
problems in the competitive business world.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to Operations Research: Definition, Features, types of
OR models, Methodology, Tools, Limitations and applications of
Linear Programming. 10
Linear Programming-I: Introduction, Formulation of Linear
Programming Problem (LPP), Assumptions for solving LPP,
Applications of LPP, Graphical method of solving LPP.
Unit -2
Linear Programming-II: Introduction, steps in solving problems
using simplex method, Principle of simplex - Maximization and
minimization problems, solution by simplex method, limitations of 10
LPP simplex method. Dual simplex method.
Linear Programming-III: Artificial variable concepts – Big -M method
and Two-phase method
Unit – 3
Transportation Problem: Basics, Basic Feasible Solution of
Transportation problem with several methods, performing optimality
test, degeneracy in transportation problem. 10
Assignment model: Definition, Formulation, Different methods of
solutions, Hungarian assignment method, unbalanced assignment
problems, travelling salesman problems.
Unit – 4
Sequencing problems: Introduction, basics, types of sequencing
problems, priority sequencing, sequencing n-jobs through two 10
machines, n-jobs and m-machines, two jobs 3-machines case.
Replacement: Introduction – replacement of items that deteriorate
 with time – when money value is not counted and counted –
replacement of items that fail completely, group replacement.
Unit – 5
Queuing Theory: Introduction, Queuing system, elements of Queuing
system Operating characteristics of a Queuing system, Classification
of queuing models: Model-I [M/M/1: ∞ / FIFO], Model-III [M/M/1:
10
N/FIFO].
Game Theory: Introduction, Two Person Zero sum games, Maximin -
Minimax principle, Games without saddle points- mixed strategies,
Graphical solution of 2Xn, mX2 games, and Dominance property
Course outcomes:
1. 1. Formulate and solve mathematical model (linear programming problem) for
real situations like production and distribution of goods using basic linear
programming techniques li graphical methods
2. 2. Apply the concepts of linear programming for decision making like simplex and
dual simplex algorithms in production industries.
3. 3. Calculate the optimal values of cost, job distribution and placement using
transportation, assignment methods
4. 4. Select the best optimal sequencing and replacement time for the machines in
an industry for its better and economic growth using sequencing and
replacement techniques.
5. 5. Select the best optimal time and strategy to be followed by any organization to
identify the waiting times and strategies to be implemented using waiting lines
and game theory techniques for a continuous and successful growth of an
industry.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. 1. Operation Research /Premkumar Gupta, D.S.Hira / S.Chand
2. 2. Operations Research / S.D. Sharma-KedarnathRamnath (JNTU)
REFERENCES:
1. 1. Operations Research / R. Pannerselvam / PHI Publications.
2. 2. Operation Research /J.K.Sharma/MacMilan.
3. 3. Operation Research An Introduction / Taha / Pearson
4. Operations Research / A.M.Natarajan, P. Balasubramani, A. Tamilarasi /
Pearson Education.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3 3 3
2 3 3 2 3 3 3
3 3 3 2 3 3 3
4 3 3 2 3 3 3
5 3 3 2 3 3 3
Course 3 3 2 3 3 3

MODELING & ANALYSIS

(Skill Oriented Course)
SEMESTER - VII
Subject Code 21MEMES7070 IA Marks 15
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01(L)+02(P) Exam Marks 35
Total Number of Lecture Hours 39 Exam Hours 03
Credits –2
Course objectives: Students should be able to
1. Know importance and applications of FEA package in industries
2. Know tools usage of simulation Software for analyzing machine components
3. Analyze the 1D structural analyses problems
4. Analyze the 2D machine components by meshing
5. Analyze the thermal & model analyses problems
INTRODUCTION
Introduction to various Finite Element Analysis (FEA) packages and their
importance and applications in industries.
STRUCTURAL AND THERMAL ANALYSIS USING FEA Tool
1. Analysis of Beam having point load and UDL using APDL
2. Determination of deflection and stresses in 2D and 3D trusses.
3. Linear and Non-Linear Buckling Analysis
4. Determination of deflections in beams component and principal and Von-
mises stresses in plane stress, plane strain and axi-symmetric components.
5. Determination of stresses in 3D and shell structures (at least one example in
each case)
6. Estimation of natural frequencies and mode shapes, Harmonic response of 2D
beam.
7. Steady state heat transfer analysis of plane and Axi-symmetric components.
Course outcomes: Upon Completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Apply the knowledge of FEA package for industrial applications
2. Remember tools usage of simulation Software for analyzing machine
components
3. Solve 1D structural problems using analysis software
4. Analize 2D structural and axi-symmetric problems using analysis software
5. Compute heat transfer problems using analysis software
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 2 2 2 3
2 3 3 2 2 2 3
3 3 3 2 2 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 3
5 3 3 2 2 2 3
Course 3 3 2 2 2 3
 SYLLABUS
SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
OPEN ELECTIVE COURSES

Offered by
Mechanical Engineering

OPEN ELECTIVE COURSES

S. No. Subject Code Name of the subject
1. 21XXMEOX0XA Operations Research
 2. 21XXMEOX0XB Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering
3. 21XXMEOX0XC Industrial Robotics
4. 21XXMEOX0XD Engineering Materials
5. 21XXMEOX0XE Introduction to Material Handling
6. 21XXMEOX0XF Production Planning and Control
7. 21XXMEOX0XG Non-Conventional Sources of Energy
8. 21XXMEOX0XH Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machinery

OPERATIONS RESEARCH
SEMESTER - XX
Subject Code 21XXMEOX0XA Internal Marks 30
 Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
6. 1. Understand the definition, scope, objectives, phases, models and limitations of
operations research and developing the ability to formulate the linear
programming problems for minimizing the project cost and maximizing its profit.
7. 2. Solve linear programming problems using various techniques based on the
constraints
8. 3. Understand about different application areas of operations research like
transportation problem, assignment model.
9. 4. Suggest optimal sequence and replacement policy to be maintained for better
and economic growth of the industry.
5. Suggest optimal game strategies and estimation of waiting times in waiting
line problems in the competitive business world.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to Operations Research: Definition, Features, types of
OR models, Methodology, Tools, Limitations and applications of
Linear Programming. 10
Linear Programming-I: Introduction, Formulation of Linear
Programming Problem (LPP), Assumptions for solving LPP,
Applications of LPP, Graphical method of solving LPP.
Unit -2
Linear Programming-II: Introduction, steps in solving problems
using simplex method, Principle of simplex - Maximization and
minimization problems, solution by simplex method, limitations of 10
LPP simplex method. Dual simplex method.
Linear Programming-III: Artificial variable concepts – Big -M method
and Two-phase method
Unit – 3
Transportation Problem: Basics, Basic Feasible Solution of
Transportation problem with several methods, performing optimality
test, degeneracy in transportation problem. 10
Assignment model: Definition, Formulation, Different methods of
solutions, Hungarian assignment method, unbalanced assignment
problems, travelling salesman problems.
Unit – 4
Sequencing problems: Introduction, basics, types of sequencing
problems, priority sequencing, sequencing n-jobs through two
machines, n-jobs and m-machines, two jobs 3-machines case. 10
Replacement: Introduction – replacement of items that deteriorate
with time – when money value is not counted and counted –
replacement of items that fail completely, group replacement.
 Unit – 5
Queuing Theory: Introduction, Queuing system, elements of Queuing
system Operating characteristics of a Queuing system, Classification
of queuing models: Model-I [M/M/1: ∞ / FIFO], Model-III [M/M/1:
10
N/FIFO].
Game Theory: Introduction, Two Person Zero sum games, Maximin -
Minimax principle, Games without saddle points- mixed strategies,
Graphical solution of 2Xn, mX2 games, and Dominance property
Course outcomes:
6. 1. Formulate and solve mathematical model (linear programming problem) for
real situations like production and distribution of goods using basic linear
programming techniques li graphical methods
7. 2. Apply the concepts of linear programming for decision making like simplex and
dual simplex algorithms in production industries.
8. 3. Calculate the optimal values of cost, job distribution and placement using
transportation, assignment methods
9. 4. Select the best optimal sequencing and replacement time for the machines in
an industry for its better and economic growth using sequencing and
replacement techniques.
10. 5. Select the best optimal time and strategy to be followed by any
organization to identify the waiting times and strategies to be implemented using
waiting lines and game theory techniques for a continuous and successful growth
of an industry.
TEXT BOOKS:
3. 1. Operation Research /Premkumar Gupta, D.S.Hira / S.Chand
4. 2. Operations Research / S.D. Sharma-KedarnathRamnath (JNTU)
REFERENCES:
5. 1. Operations Research / R. Pannerselvam / PHI Publications.
6. 2. Operation Research /J.K.Sharma/MacMilan.
7. 3. Operation Research An Introduction / Taha / Pearson
8. Operations Research / A.M.Natarajan, P. Balasubramani, A. Tamilarasi /
Pearson Education.
Question paper pattern:
4. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
5. All questions carries 14 marks each
6. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3 3 3
 2 3 3 2 3 3 3
3 3 3 2 3 3 3
4 3 3 2 3 3 3
5 3 3 2 3 3 3
Course 3 3 2 3 3 3

FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SEMESTER - XX
Subject Code 21XXMEOX0XB Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Understand the concepts of fluid properties like specific gravity, viscosity,
density, surface tension
2. To study the classification of turbines and work done and efficiency of the
different turbines and also study about draft tube theory and to determine the
function efficiency.
3. To study about specific speed and performance characteristics of different
types of turbines.
4. To study automobile engine working, valve timing and associated systems
such as lubricating system, cooling system, fuel feed system, ignition system
etc., their necessity, requirements, construction details, different types and
their working
5. To study the construction, working principles and advantages of belt and rope
drives, selection of belt drive- types of belt drives, V-belts, types of coupling.
Unit -1 Hours
Fluid Mechanics: Dimensions and units: physical properties of fluids-
specific gravity, viscosity and its significance, surface tension, capillarity,
10
and vapor pressure. Atmospheric gauge and vacuum pressure –
Measurement of pressure. Manometers- Piezometer, U-tube, inverted and
differential manometers.
Unit -2
Impact of jets: hydrodynamic force of jets on stationary and moving flat,
10
inclined, and curved vanes, jet striking centrally and at tip, velocity
diagrams, work done and efficiency, flow over radial vanes.
Unit – 3
Hydraulic Turbines and Governing systems: Classification of turbines;
Working principle, Efficiency calculation and Design principles for Pelton 10
Wheel, Francis and for Kaplan turbines; Governing of turbines;
Performance and characteristic curves.
Unit – 4
I. C. Engines: Classification, working principles – valve and port timing
diagrams – air standard cycles –fuel injection system, carburetion,
10
ignition, cooling and lubrication – Engine performance evaluation.
Spark Ignition and Combustion Ignition engines – Classification,
working principles, Types of engines.
Unit – 5
Belt drives: Introduction, Belt and rope drives, selection of belt drive-
types of belt drives, V-belts, velocity ratio of belt drives, slip of belt, creep
of belt, tensions for flat belt drive, angle of contact, centrifugal tension, 10
maximum tension of belt,
Coupling: Brief introduction of coupling, Rigid couplings - muff, split
muff and flange couplings, flexible couplings - flange coupling
Course outcomes:
1. Understand the concepts of fluid properties like specific gravity, viscosity,
 density, surface tension.
2. To study the classification of turbines and work done and efficiency of the
different turbines and also study about draft tube theory and to determine the
function efficiency.
3. This study is also used for the estimation of efficiency and performance of the
turbine with the study of characteristics curves.
4. To study automobile engine working, valve timing and associated systems
such as lubricating system, cooling system, fuel feed system, ignition system
etc., their necessity, requirements, construction details, different types and
their working
5. To study the construction, working principles and advantages of belt and rope
drives, selection of belt drive- types of belt drives, V-belts, types of coupling.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Basic Mechanical Engineering / Pravin Kumar/ Pearson
2. Thermal Engineering- R.S Khurmi/JS Gupta/S.Chand.
3. Introduction to Engineering Materials / B.K. Agrawal/ McGraw Hill
REFERENCES:
1. Fundamental of Mechanical Engineering/ G.S. Sawhney/PHI
2. Thermal Science and Engineering / Dr. D.S. Kumar/ Kataria
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
CO/PO PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 1 2 3 2
2 2 2 3 2 2
3 2 2 3 2 2
4 3 3 2 2
5 2 2 3 1 2 2
Course 2 2 3 1 2 2 2

INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS
SEMESTER - XX

Subject Code 21XXMEOX0XC Internal Marks 30

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

Credits – 03

Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Understand various applications of robotics and classification of coordinate
system and control systems
2. Build the concepts of components of industrial robotics.
3. Determine kinematic analysis with D-H notation, forward and inverse
kinematics
4. Model trajectory planning for a manipulator by avoiding obstacles
5. Understand different types of actuators and importance of application of
robots in manufacturing

Unit -1 Hours

Introduction: Automation and Robotics, CAD/CAM and Robotics – An

overview of Robotics –present and future applications – classification by 8
coordinate system and control system.

Unit -2

Components of the Industrial Robotics: Function line diagram

representation of robot arms, common types of arms. Components,
Architecture, number of degrees of freedom – Requirements and
8
challenges of end effectors, determination of the end effectors,
comparison of Electric, Hydraulic and Pneumatic types of locomotion
devices.

Unit – 3

Motion Analysis: Homogeneous transformations as applicable to rotation

and translation – problems.
Manipulator Kinematics: Specifications of matrices, D-H notation joint 10
coordinates and world coordinates Forward and inverse kinematics –
problems.

Unit – 4

Trajectory Planning: General considerations in path description and

generation. Trajectory planning and avoidance of obstacles, path
planning, Skew motion, joint integrated motion –straight line motion – 12
Robot programming, languages and software packages-description of
paths with a robot programming language.

Unit – 5
Robot Actuators and Feed Back Components: Actuators: Pneumatic,
Hydraulic actuators, electric & stepper motors. Feedback components:
position sensors– potentiometers, resolvers, encoders – Velocity sensors.
12
Robot Applications in Manufacturing: Material Transfer - Material
handling, loading and unloading- Processing - spot and continuous arc
welding & spray painting - Assembly and Inspection.

Course outcomes:
1. Understand various applications of robotics and classification of coordinate
system and control systems
2. Build the concepts of components of industrial robotics.
3. Apply kinematic analysis with D-H notation, forward and inverse kinematics
4. Generate trajectory planning for a manipulator by avoiding obstacles.
5. Understand different types of actuators and various applications of robots in
manufacturing

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Industrial Robotics / Groover M P /Mc Graw Hill
2. Introduction to Robotics / John J. Craig/ Pearson
3. Robotics and Control/ Mittal R K & Nagrath I J/ TMH.

REFERENCES:
1. Introduction to Robotics/ Saeed B Niku / Wiely Publications.
2. Robotics/ Fu K S/ Mc Graw Hill.

Question paper pattern:

1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO/PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 2 3 3 2
2 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3 2
 4 3 2 2 3 2
5 2 2 3 3 2
Course 3 3 3 3 2

ENGINEERING MATERIALS
SEMESTER XX
Subject Code 21XXMEOX0XD Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits - 03
Course objectives:
This course will enable students to:
1. Classify different bonds in solids and understand crystallization of the metals,
for the formation of the solid solutions and compounds.
2. Understand different phase diagrams.
3. Recognize the property requirements of a given application and suggest a
suitable ferrous and non-ferrous metal and their alloys.
4. Illustrate the property requirements of a given application and suggest
appropriate heat treatment
5. Identify the property requirements of a given application and suggest a
suitable ceramic, composite materials
Unit -1 Hours
Structure of Metals and Constitution of alloys: Bonds in Solids –
Metallic bond - crystallization of metals, grain and grain boundaries, effect
of grain boundaries on the properties of metal / alloys – determination of
grain size. Necessity of alloying, types of solid solutions, Hume Rothery’s
10
rules, intermediate alloy phases, and electron compounds. Tensile,
compression and torsion tests; Young’s modulus, relations between true
and engineering stress-strain curves, generalized Hooke’s law, yielding and
yield strength, ductility, resilience, toughness and elastic recovery.
Unit -2
Equilibrium Diagrams: Experimental methods of construction of
equilibrium diagrams, Isomorpous alloy systems, equilibrium cooling and
heating of alloys, lever rule, coring, miscibility gaps, eutectic systems,
congruent melting intermediate phases, peritectic reaction. 8
Transformations in the solid state – allotropy, eutectoid, peritectoid
reactions, phase rule, relationship between equilibrium diagrams and
properties of alloys.
Unit - 3
Ferrous & non-ferrous metals and their alloys Structure and properties
of white cast iron, malleable cast iron, grey cast iron, spheroid graphite
cast iron, alloy cast irons. Classification of steels, structure and properties
12
of plain carbon steels, low alloy steels, Hadfield manganese steels, tool and
die steels. Structure and properties of copper and its alloys, Aluminum
and its alloys, Titanium and its alloys
Unit – 4
Heat treatment of Alloys: Annealing, normalizing, hardening, TTT
diagrams, tempering, hardenability, surface-hardening methods
(carburizing, carbo-nitriding, cyaniding, induction hardening and flame 8
hardening), age hardening treatment, and cryogenic treatment of alloys.
vacuum and plasma hardening
Unit-5
Ceramic and composite materials: Crystalline ceramics, glasses,
cermets, abrasive materials, nanomaterial’s – definition, properties and
12
applications of the above. Classification of composites, various methods of
component manufacture of composites, particle – reinforced materials,
fiber reinforced materials, metal ceramic mixtures, metal – matrix
composites and C – C composites.
Course outcomes:
On completion of the course, student will be able to
1. Classify different bonds in solids and understand crystallization of the metals,
for the formation of the solid solutions and compounds.
2. Different phase diagrams and study of binary phase diagrams
3. Recorgnize the property requirements of a given application and suggest
suitable ferrous & nonferrous alloys
4. Analyze the property requirements of a given application and suggest
appropriate heat treatment
5. Identified the property requirements of a given application and suggest a
suitable ceramic, composite materials
Text Books:
1. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy - Sidney H. Avener - McGrawHill
2. Essential of Materials science and engineering - Donald R.Askeland –
Thomson
Reference Books:
1. Material Science and Metallurgy – V.D.Kodgire and S.V.Kodgire
2. Materials Science and engineering - Callister & Baalasubrahmanyam
3. Material Science for Engineering students – Fischer – Elsevier Publishers.
4. Material science and Engineering - V. Rahghavan
5. Introduction to Material Science and Engineering – Yip-Wah Chung CRC
Press.
6. Material Science and Metallurgy – A V K Suryanarayana – B S Publications.
7. Material Science and Metallurgy – U. C. Jindal – Pearson Publication
Web Source References:
1. https://www.iitm.ac.in/mmresearch
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/113106032/3
3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Materials_science
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2
1 2 1 2 1
2 2 1 2 1
3 2 2 2
4 2 2 1
 5 2 2 2
6 2 2 1
Course 3 1 2 2

INTRODUCTION TO MATERIAL HANDLING

SEMESTER - XX
Subject Code 21XXMEOX0XE Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Students should be able
1. To understand the classification of material handling equipment.
2. To explain the usage of different material handling equipment in industry.
3. To know how to connect loading stations to the different discharge conditions.
4. To explain the usage of cranes at industries.
5. To explain the usage of hoists and monorails at industries.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to materials handling, examples of materials equipment,
examples of materials handling equipment, continuous conveying,
intermittent conveying, examples, lifting, hoisting, handling of bulk 10
goods and piece goods, cranes and conveyors, principles of calculation
of conveying equipment, cycle time, bulk materials and bulk density,
angle of repose, example for a belt conveyor and a simple hoist.
Unit -2
Belt conveyors, constructional details, toughing angle, idlers, belt
specifications, chutes, skirt boards, ploughs, belt conveyor layouts, belt
10
trippers and typical examples, roller conveyors, overhead conveyors,
apron conveyors, component parts and operational details and
applications with typical layouts.
Unit – 3
Unit materials handling and storage: Unit load concept (platform
sheet industrial hand trucks, self-contained unit load, pallet less
handling, introduction only), industrial hand trucks, powered 10
industrial trucks, automated guided vehicles, basic storage and
equipment system, Automated storage and retrieval systems (AS/RS),
carosel storage system and its applications.
Unit – 4
Cranes Jib cranes like wall mounted and travelling type, stability
criteria, wheel loads, wheel trucks and bogeys, number of mechanisms
10
in jib cranes, jib construction. Harbour cranes, luffing and level luffing
cranes, shipyard gantry cranes,
Unit – 5
Hoists and monorails Portal frames and slewing rings and bearings
10
typical stability, calculations of portal cranes, types of hoists
Course outcomes:
1. Classify the material handling equipment
2. Explain the usage of different material handling equipment in industry
3. Discuss how to connect loading stations to the different discharge conditions
4. Associate the usage of cranes at industries
5. Associate the usage of hoists and monorails at industries
TEXT BOOKS
1. Material handling handbook, 2nd edition, ASME, 1985
2. Automation production systems and computer integrated manufacturing,
Mikell P Groover, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
3. Plant Layout and Materials Handling, Dr R B Choudary and G R N Tagore,
Khanna Publishers
REFERENCE BOOK
1. R.O. Bailey, “Bulk material handling by conveyor belt I and II” M.A. Al
2. Frutchbaum, “Bulk solids handling
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 12 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 6 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 12 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 1 1 3 1 3
2 1 1 3 1 3
3 1 2 3 2 3
4 1 2 3 1 3
5 1 2 3 2 3
6 1 2 3 1 3
Course 1 2 3 2 3

PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL

SEMESTER - XX
Subject Code 21XXMEOX0XF IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) Exam Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES: Students should be able to:
4. Understand the concepts of production and service systems
5. Apply forecasting techniques for various firms, namely qualitative &
quantitative methods to optimize/make best use of resources in achieving
their objectives.
6. Identify different strategies employed in manufacturing and service
industries to plan inventory and Impart knowledge on the Materials
Requirement Planning and Kanban, LOB and JIT Methods.
7. Determine the exact routing and scheduling which will be followed in
production. And apply different scheduling policies in planning and control
and make best use of resources.
8. Measure the effectiveness, identify likely areas for improvement, develop
and implement improved planning and control methods for production
systems.
Unit -1 Teaching
Hours
Introduction: Definition – objectives and functions of production
planning and control – elements of production control – types of
Hours – 08
production – organization of production planning and control
department – internal organization of department.
Unit -2
Forecasting – importance of forecasting – types of forecasting,
their uses – general principles of forecasting – forecasting Hours – 10
techniques – qualitative methods and quantitative methods.
Unit – 3
Inventory management – functions of inventories – relevant
inventory costs – ABC analysis – VED analysis – EOQ model –
Inventory control systems – P–Systems and Q-Systems Hours – 10
Introduction to MRP I, MRP II, ERP, LOB (Line of Balance), JIT
and KANBAN system.
Unit – 4
Routing & Scheduling– definition – routing procedure –route
sheets – bill of material – factors affecting routing procedure,
schedule –definition – difference with loading, Scheduling policies Hours – 12
– techniques, standard scheduling methods, line balancing,
aggregate planning.
Unit-5
Dispatching– activities of dispatcher – dispatching procedure –
follow up – definition – reason for existence of functions – types of
Hours – 10
follow up, expediting, controlling aspects. Applications of
computer in production planning and control.
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of this course, students will be able to:
1. Illustrate the systems concept for the design of production and service
systems.
2. Develop forecasts in the manufacturing and service sectors using selected
quantitative and qualitative techniques
3. Discuss the importance and function of inventory and to be able to apply
selected techniques for its control and management under dependent and
independent demand circumstances.
4. Select and use an appropriate principles/methods/ techniques/ modern
concept with reference to given application/situation in the preparation of
route sheets with scheduling and loading in manufacturing systems.
5. Create and engage in life-long learning in the context of technological change
in Operations Management and also able to identify dispatching, follow-up
activities in the system
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
2. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
3. Each full question will have a sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
Text Books
1. Elements of Production Planning and Control / Samuel Eilon/Universal Book
Corp.
2. Manufacturing, Planning and Control/PartikJonssonStig-Arne
Reference Books
1. Inventory Control Theory and Practice / Martin K. Starr and David W.
Miller/Prentice-Hall
2. Production Planning and Control/Mukhopadyay/PHI
3. Production Control A Quantitative Approach / John E. Biegel/Prentice-Hall
Web references
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112102106/
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107143/
3. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107142/33
4. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107142/31
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107142/36

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
CO /PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 2 1 1 1 1
2 2 1 3 1
 3 2 3 2
4 1 1 1 3 1
5 1 1 3 2 2 1
Course 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 2
 NON-CONVENTIONAL SOURCES OF ENERGY
SEMESTER-XX
Subject code 21XXMEOX0XG Internal marks 30
Number of lecture hours/Week 3(L) External marks 70
Total No of lecture hours 50 Exam hours 03
Credits-03
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to:
1. Understand the principles and working of solar and solar energy collection.
2. Apply the principles of solar energy storage, applications in generation of
electric power.
3. Apply the knowledge of Wind energy and Biomass, in generation of electric
power production.
4. Apply the Principles and working of Geothermal energy power plant, OTEC
plants, tidal, wave energy and Mini hydel power plants in generation of the
electric power
5. Apply the principles of direct energy conversion systems like Thermoelectric
generators, MHD generators and fuel cells, in generation of electric power
production
Unit-1 Hours
Principles of Solar Radiation: Role and potential of new and
renewable source, the solar energy option, Environmental impact of
solar power - the solar constant, extra-terrestrial and terrestrial
solar radiation, Solar radiation on titled surface, Instruments for 8
measuring solar radiation and sun shine, solar radiation data.
Solar Energy Collection: Flat plate and concentrating collectors,
classification of concentrating collectors, advanced collectors.
Unit-2
Solar Energy Storage and Applications: Different methods,
sensible, latent heat and stratified storage, solar ponds. Solar
6
applications - solar heating/cooling techniques, solar distillation
and drying, photovoltaic energy conversion.
Unit-3
Wind Energy: Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis
windmills, performance characteristics, Betz criteria
Bio-Mass: Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic /aerobic
10
digestion, types of Bio-gas digesters, gas yield, combustion
characteristics of biogas, utilization for cooking, I.C. Engine
operation, and economic aspects.
Unit-4
Geothermal Energy: Resources, types of wells, methods of
harnessing the energy, potential in India. Ocean Energy – OTEC, 10
Principles, utilization, setting of OTEC plants, thermodynamic
cycles.
Tidal and Wave energy: Potential and conversion techniques, mini-
hydel power plants, their economics.
Unit-5
Direct Energy Conversion: Need for DEC, Carnot cycle,
limitations, Principles of DEC. Thermoelectric generators, Seebeck,
Peltier and Joule Thompson effects, figure of merit, materials,
applications, MHD generators, principles, dissociation and
16
ionization, hall effect, magnetic flux, MHD accelerator, MHD engine,
power generation systems, electron gas dynamic conversion,
economic aspects. Fuel cells, principle, faraday’s laws,
thermodynamic aspects, selection of fuels and operating conditions.
Course outcomes:
1. The student understands the principles and working of solar and solar energy
collection.
2. The students apply the principles of solar energy storage, applications in
power generation.
3. The students Apply the knowledge of Wind energy and Biomass, in generation
of power
4. The students Apply the Principles and working of Geothermal energy power
plant, OTEC plants, tidal, wave energy and Mini hydel power plants in
generation of the electric power.
5. Apply the principles of direct energy conversion systems like Thermoelectric
generators, MHD generators and fuel cells, in generation of electric power.
Text books:
1. Renewable Energy Resources / Tiwari and Ghosal / Narosa
2. Non- conventional Energy Sources / G.D. Rai/ Khanna Publishers
3. Biological Energy Resources/ Malcolm Fleischer & Chris Lawis/ E&FN Spon
Reference books:
1. Renewable Energy Sources / Twidell& Weir
2. Solar Power Engineering / B.S. Magal Frank Kreith& J.F. Kreith
3. Principles of Solar Energy / Frank Krieth& John F Kreider
4. Non-Conventional Energy / Ashok V Desai / Wiley Eastern
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 questions,2 from each course outcomes, the
student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal choice)
2. All question carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:
CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
/PO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
2 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
5 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
Course 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
 FLUID MECHANICS AND FLUID MACHINERY
SEMESTER -XX

Subject Code 21XXMEOX0XH Internal Marks 30

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

Credits – 03

Course Objectives:
Enable the students to:
1. Understand the fundamental properties of fluid and calculate fluid pressure
using the manometer.
2. Apply the differential conservation equations of mass, momentum, and energy
to fluid flow problems.
3. Evaluate major and minor losses in pipes and also discuss boundary layer
concepts.
4. Solve problems on the turbo machines like turbines using analytical method
and velocity triangles.
5. Discuss the Classification and working principles of pumps and evaluate the
performance of hydraulic machines.

Unit -1 Hours

Fluids: Definition of fluid, Fluid properties, Atmospheric gauge and 10

vacuum pressure – measurement of pressure. Manometers- Piezometer,
U-tube, inverted and differential manometers.
Hydraulics: Pascal’s law, hydrostatic law. Buoyancy, forces on
submerged bodies, stability of floating bodies.

Unit -2
Fluid Kinematics: Introduction, flow types. Equation of continuity for 10
one dimensional flow. Stream line, path line and streak lines and
stream tube. Stream function and velocity potential function.
Fluid Dynamics: surface and body forces –Euler’s and Bernoulli’s
equations for flow along a stream line, momentum equation and its
applications, force on pipe bend.

Unit – 3

Closed Conduit Flow: Reynold’s experiment- Darcy Weisbach equation, 10

Minor losses in pipes- pipes in series and pipes in parallel- total energy
line hydraulic gradient line.
Basics of Turbo Machinery: Hydrodynamic force of jets on stationery
and moving flat, inclined, and curved vanes, jet striking centrally and at
tip, velocity diagrams, work done and efficiency, flow over radial vanes.

Unit – 4

Turbines: Hydraulic Turbines: classification of turbines, Working and 10

efficiencies of Pelton wheel, Francis and Kaplan turbines. Importance of
Draft Tube.
Hydraulic Quantities: Unit and specific quantities, characteristic
curves, governing of turbines, selection of type of turbine, cavitation,
surge tank, water hammer.

Unit – 5

Pumps: Centrifugal Pumps: Classification, working, work done – 10

manometric head losses and efficiencies- specific speed- pumps in
series and parallel performance characteristic curves, cavitation &
NPSH.
Reciprocating Pumps: Working, Discharge, slip, indicator diagrams.

Course outcomes:
1. Demonstrate various properties of fluids, pressure measurement devices and
their applications.
2. Identify the kinematics and dynamics properties of fluids flowing in different
conditions and its effects on the bodies.
3. Estimate the effect of various losses in fluids due to flowing and obstructions
and understand using the concepts of pipe losses and Boundary layer theory.
4. Analyze the performance of hydraulic turbines, units and specific quantities
based on the design by applying the knowledge of turbo-machinery using
analytical methods and velocity triangles.
5. Analyze the performance of various hydraulic pumps based on workings and
design.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Hydraulics, fluid mechanics and Hydraulic machinery Modi and Seth
2. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines/ RK Bansal/Laxmi Publications

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines by Rajput
2. Fluid Mechanics & Turbo machinery by Dixon, 7th Edn, Elesvier
3. Fluid Mechanics and Machinery by D. Rama Durgaiah, New Age International
4. Fluid Mechanics- Fundementals and Applications by Y.A. Cengel,
J.M.Cimbala, 6th Edn, McGrawHill
5. Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Power Engineering by D.S. Kumar, Kotaria& Sons.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome. The
student must answer 5 full
questions by selecting one question from each course outcome (Internal
Choice)
2. All questions carries 14 marks each
3. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome

Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes mapping:

CO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
/PO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
1 3 3 3 3
2 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 2 3
4 3 2 3 3
5 3 3 3 3
Course 3 3 3 3
 SYLLABUS
SITE-21 REGULATIONS

For
HONORS/MINOR COURSES

Offered by
Mechanical Engineering
 B. Tech (Mechanical Engineering)
Regulation SITE 21
IV- SEMSTER
HONORS/MINOR COURSES
Honors Courses
S. Course Code Course Title Prerequisite
No.
Advanced Strength of
1. 21MEMEH401A  Mechanics of Solids
Materials
2. 21MEMEH401B Advanced Materials  Materials Engineering
Advanced Welding
3. 21MEMEH401C  Production Technology
Technology
 Thermodynamics
4. 21MEMEH401D Waste to Energy  Engineering
Chemistry

Minor Courses
S. Course Code Course Title Prerequisite
No.
1. 21XXMEM401A Engineering Mechanics  Engineering Physics
 Engineering Physics
2. 21XXMEM401B Thermodynamics
 Engineering Chemistry
 Engineering Physics
3. 21XXMEM401C Materials Engineering
 Engineering Chemistry
4. 21XXMEM401D Production Technology  Engineering Physics
 ADVANCED STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21MEMEH401A Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture Hours/Week 3(L) External Marks 70
Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03
Credits – 04
Course Objectives: Students should be able to
1. Know the method of calculating stress and strain in a member subjected to
principal stress and strain and relation between them.
2. Understand the relation between elastic constants and material symmetry.
3. Analyze the theories of failures and bending of beams
4. Calculate the torsion of a circular, elliptical, triangular, rectangular bars, and
Rolled sections.
5. Calculate the stress energy stored by using different energy methods.
Unit -1 Hours
Stress: derivation of Cauchy relations and equilibrium and symmetry
equations, principal stresses and directions.
10
Strains: concept of strain. Derivation of small strain tensor and
compatibility. strain theory, principal strains, strain of a volume element,
small displacement theory, Stress-strain relations for isotropic materials
Unit -2
Constitutive Equations: Generalized Hooke’s law, linear elasticity,
Material symmetry: Boundary value problems: Principal planes, cubic 10
equations, the state of stress referred to principal axes, Plane stress and
plane strain problems
Unit – 3
Theories of Failure: Significance of the theories of failure, Factor of
safety in design, ideally plastic solid 10
Bending of Beams: Straight beams and asymmetrical bending, Bending
of curved beams
Unit – 4
Torsion & Axisymmetric Problems: Torsion of general prismatic bars -
solid sections, Torsion of circular, elliptical, triangular and rectangular
bars, Torsion of rolled sections, Thick-walled cylinder subjected to 10
internal and external pressures -lame’s-problems, Stresses in composite
tubes, Thermal stresses.
Unit – 5
Energy Methods
Solutions using potentials, Energy methods, Work done by forces and
elastic strain energy stored, Maxwell-Betti-Rayleigh Reciprocal theorem, 10
Beggs Deformeter, First theorem of Castigliano, Theorem of virtual work,
Kirchhoff’s theorem.
Course outcomes: Students will be able to
1. Learn the method of calculating stress and strain in a member subjected to
 principal stress and strain and relation between them.
2. Understand the relation between elastic constants and material symmetry.
3. Analyze the theories of failures and bending of beams
4. Calculate the torsion of a circular, elliptical, triangular, rectangular bars, and
Rolled sections.
5. Calculate the stress energy stored by using different energy methods
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Text Books:
1. Boresi & Sidebottom, Advanced Mechanics of Materials, Wiely International
2. L.S. Srinath, Advanced Mechanics of Solids, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2009
References:
1. Timoshenko, Theory of plates
2. B.C.Punmia, Strength of materials & Theory od Structures (V0l I & II)
3. Sadhu Singh, Strength of Materials
 ADVANCED MATERIALS
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21MEMEH401B Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture
3(L) External Marks 70
Hours/Week
Total Number of
50 Exam Hours 03
Lecture Hours
Credits – 04
Course Objectives :
Enable the students to
1. Classify composites, introduce common types of fibers and matrices and
applications of composites.
2. Underlying the applications of aerospace materials.
3. Illuminate the knowledge and analysis skills in applying hooke’s laws in
mechanics to the composite materials.
4. Understanding the key characteristics and applications of functionally graded
materials, characteristics and applications of shape memory alloys.
5. Acquire different classes of nanomaterials that have been developed in recent
years in light of various technological applications and properties.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to Composite Materials: Introduction, classification:
polymer matrix composites, metal matrix composites, ceramic matrix
composites, carbon–carbon composites, fiber reinforced composites and 10
nature-made composites, and applications
Reinforcements: Fibres- glass, silica, kevlar, carbon, boron, silicon
carbide, and born carbide fibres.
Unit -2
Aerospace Materials: Metallic materials- super alloys, Aluminium,
Magnesium, titanium and Nickel based alloys and intermetallics, High
10
temperature polymers, Materials for cryogenic application, Materials for
space environment, Evaluation of materials for extreme environment,
Materials processing and manufacturing in zero gravity.
Unit – 3
Macro mechanical Analysis of a Lamina: Introduction, generalized
Hooke’s law, reduction of Hooke’s law in three dimensions to two
10
dimensions, relationship of compliance and stiffness matrix to
engineering elastic constants of an orthotropic lamina, laminate-laminate
code.
Unit – 4
Functionally Graded Materials: Types of functionally graded materials-
classification, different systems - preparation - properties and
10
applications of functionally graded materials.
Shape Memory Alloys: Introduction-shape memory effect-classification
of shape memory alloys composition- properties and applications of
shape memory alloys.
Unit – 5
Nano Materials: Introduction-properties at nano scales-advantages &
disadvantages applications in comparison with bulk materials (nano –
10
structure, wires, tubes, composites). state of art nano advanced- topic
delivered by student.
Course outcomes:
1. Identify, describe and evaluate the properties and applications of fibre
reinforcements and types of composite materials.
2. Identify the aerospace materials and their applications
3. Ability to obtain lamina and laminate behavior by using hooke’s law and
relationship of compliance and stiffness matrix for composite materials
4. Demonstrate awareness of recent scientific and technological developments in
the field of aerospace materials, and assess their potential to enhance the
performance of aircraft in the near future for functionally graded materials,
properties and applications on shape memory alloys.
5. Impart knowledge on different types of Nano materials.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Text Books:
1. Nano material, A.K. Bandyopadyay, New age Publishers
2. Material science and Technology: A comprehensive treatment, Robert W.Cahn,
VCH
3. Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials, Isaac and M Daniel, Oxford
University Press
References Books:
1. Mechanics of Composite Materials R. M. Jones, McGraw Hill Company, New
York, 1975.
2. Analysis of Laminated Composite Structures, L. R. Calcote/Van
NostrandRainfold, New York 1969
3. Analysis and performance of fibre Composites, B. D. Agarwal and L. J.
Broutman, Wiley
 ADVANCED WELDING TECHNOLOGY
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21MEMEH401C Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture
3(L) External Marks 70
Hours/Week
Total Number of
50 Exam Hours 03
Lecture Hours
Credits – 04
Course Objectives
1. Study the different types of welding processes and its application in various
fields
2. Design and fabricate welded joints using cold metal transfer welding process
3. Employ appropriate welding processes for making welded joints with different
materials
4. Analyze the welded joints fabricated through hybrid welding processes
5. Perform friction welding processes for making welded joints
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Classification of welding processes, heat sources, Weld
joint design - Weldability of steels and other materials - Weld defects. 10
Cold Metal Transfer welding process, advantages, limitations and
applications.
Unit -2
Classification of welding processes: TIG / A-TIG Welding, gas metal arc
welding, Submerged arc welding, Plasma arc welding Adhesive bonding, 10
vacuum brazing, Explosive welding: Process description, process
parameters, joint design, advantages and limitations applications.
Unit – 3
Laser Beam welding: Laser Beam welding, - advantages, limitations and 10
applications, process variables and their effects.
Unit – 4
Electron beam welding: Electron beam welding, - advantages,
10
limitations and applications, process variables and their effects.
Unit – 5
Friction stir welding: Friction & Friction stir welding, tool design,
Fixture design, modification of tool and features, modeling of friction stir
welding, submerged friction stir welding. Friction stir processing, Process 10
variables, Surface modification by friction stir processing, Production of
composite by friction stir processing.
Course outcomes:
1. Study the welded joints fabricated through cold metal transfer welding process
2. Select appropriate welding processes for making welded joints with different
materials
3. Analyze the welded joints fabricated through Laser Beam welding processes
4. Analyze the welded joints fabricated through Electron Beam welding processes
5. Employ friction welding processes for repair and reclamation work
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Text Books
1. Parmar R.S., “Welding Processes and Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 2014.
2. Nadkarni S.V., ‘Modern Arc Welding Technology’, Oxford and IBH Publishing,
2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Lancaster J.F, ‘The Physics of Welding’, Pergamon Press, 1984
2. Weman K., “Welding Processes Hand Book”, CRC Press, 2003.
3. Norrish J: Advanced Welding Processes, Woodhead publishing, 2006
 WASTE TO ENERGY
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21MEMEH401D Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture
3(L) External Marks 70
Hours/Week
Total Number of
50 Exam Hours 03
Lecture Hours
Credits – 04
Course objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Understand the different types of wastes.
2. Understand various energy generation methods.
3. Identify sources of energy using bio-chemical conversion.
4. Apply the knowledge of waste to energy for extraction of fuel from waste.
5. Analyse the environmental effect of waste to energy conversion.
Unit -1 Hours
Characterization of wastes, agricultural residues and wastes including
animal wastes; industrial wastes; municipal solid wastes. Waste
processing types and composition of various types of wastes;
10
Characterization of Municipal Solid Waste, Industrial waste and
Biomedical Waste, waste collection and transportation; waste processing-
size reduction, separation; waste management hierarchy, waste
minimization and recycling of Municipal solid waste.
Unit -2
Thermo chemical conversion: incineration, pyrolysis, gasification of waste
using gasifiers, environmental and health impacts of incineration;
strategies for reducing environmental impacts. Energy production from 10
wastes through incineration, energy production through gasification of
wastes. Energy production through pyrolysis and gasification of wastes,
syngas utilization.
Unit – 3
Bio-chemical Conversion: Anaerobic digestion of sewage and municipal
wastes, direct combustion of MSW-refuse derived solid fuel, industrial
waste, agro residues, anaerobic digestion biogas production, and present
status of technologies for conversion of waste into energy,
12
Design of waste to energy plants for cities, small townships and villages.
Energy production from wastes through fermentation and trans
esterification. Cultivation of algal biomass from wastewater and energy
production from algae. Energy production from organic wastes through
anaerobic digestion and fermentation.
Unit – 4
Energy production from waste plastics, gas cleanup Waste, Heat
Recovery: Concept of conversion efficiency, energy waste, waste heat
10
recovery classification, advantages and applications, commercially viable
waste heat recovery devices.
Unit – 5
Environmental and health impacts-case studies: Environmental and
health impacts of waste to energy conversion, case studies of commercial
8
waste to energy plants, waste to energy- potentials and constraints in
India, eco-technological alternatives for waste to energy conversions.
Course outcomes:
1. Understand the different types of waste.
2. Understand various energy generation methods.
3. Identify sources of energy from bio-chemical conversion.
4. Apply the knowledge of waste to energy for extraction of fuel from waste.
5. Analyse the environmental effect of waste to energy conversion.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
TEXT BOOKS:
1. P.A.Vesilind and W.A.Worrell (2016) Solid Waste Engineering, 2nd Ed.,
Cengage India.Chemicals and Power, John Wiley and Sons, USA.
2. S. Capareda, (2013), Introduction to Biomass Energy Conversions, CRC Press,
USA.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. K.J. Ptasinski, (2016). Efficiency of Biomass Energy: An Energy Approach to
Biofuels, Power, and Biorefineries, John Wiley & Sons, USA.
 MINOR COURSES under Mechanical Engineering
ENGINEERING MECHANICS
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21XXMEM401A Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture
3(L) External Marks 70
Hours/Week
Total Number of
50 Exam Hours 03
Lecture Hours
Credits – 04
Course Objectives
Students should be able to:
1. Gain knowledge on system of forces and moments and describe the various
types of friction
2. Draw free-body diagrams and solve statics problems
3. Acquire knowledge on centre of gravity and moment of inertia for different
sections.
4. Calculate velocity and acceleration of particles having rectilinear or curvilinear
motion.
5. Analyze the problems on work energy method and impulse momentum method.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction to Engg. Mechanics – Basic Concepts.
Systems of Forces: Coplanar Concurrent Forces – Components in Space
– Resultant – Moment of Force and its Application – Couples and 10
Resultant of Force Systems.
Friction: Introduction, limiting friction and impending motion,
Coulomb’s laws of dry friction, coefficient of friction, cone of friction
Unit -2
Equilibrium of Systems of Forces: Free Body Diagrams, Equations of
Equilibrium of Coplanar Systems, Spatial Systems for concurrent forces.
LamisTheorm, graphical method for the equilibrium of coplanar forces, 10
Converse of the law of Triangle of forces, converse of the law of polygon of
forces, condition of equilibrium, analysis of plane trusses (Method of
joints only)
Unit – 3
Centroid and Centre of Gravity: Centroid of simple figures from first
principle, centroid of composite sections; Centre of Gravity and its
implications. 10
Area Moment of Inertia: Definition, Moment of inertia of plane sections
from first principles, Theorems of moment of inertia, Moment of inertia of
standard sections and composite sections.
Unit – 4
Kinematics: Rectilinear and Curvilinear motions – Velocity and
Acceleration – Motion of Rigid Bodies – Types and their analysis in Planar
10
Motion.
Kinetics: Analysis of a Particle and Rigid Body in Translation– Central
 Force Motion – Equations of Plane Motion – Fixed Axis Rotation – Rolling
Bodies.
Unit – 5
Work – Energy Method: Equations for Translation, Work-Energy
Application to Particle Motion, Connected System - Fixed Axis Rotation 10
and Plane Motion, Impulse momentum method.
Course outcomes:
1. Determine the resultant force and moment for a given system of forces and
Apply laws of friction to simple mechanisms with consideration of friction
2. Draw free-body diagrams and solve statics problems
3. Determine centroid and moment of inertia of simple and composite bodies
4. Calculate the motion characteristics of a body subjected to a given force
system
5. Solve the problems using work energy method and impulse-momentum
method.
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Text Books
1. Engineering Mechanics - S.Timoshenko&D.H.Young., 4th Edn - , Mc Graw Hill
publications.
2. Engineering Mechanics-Statics and Dynamics by A Nelson, Tata McGraw Hill
Education Private Ltd, New Delhi, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering Mechanics statics and dynamics – R.C.Hibbeler, 11th Edn –
Pearson Publ.
2. Engineering Mechanics, statics – J.L.Meriam, 6th Edn – Wiley India Pvt Ltd.
3. Engineering Mechanics, statics and dynamics – I.H.Shames, – Pearson Publ.
4. Mechanics For Engineers, statics - F.P.Beer&E.R.Johnston – 5th Edn Mc
Graw Hill Publ.
5. Mechanics For Engineers, dynamics - F.P.Beer&E.R.Johnston –5th Edn Mc
Graw Hill Publ.
6. Theory & Problems of engineering mechanics, statics & dynamics –
E.W.Nelson, C.L.Best& W.G. McLean, 5th Edn – Schaum’s outline series - Mc
Graw Hill Publ.
7. Singer's Engineering Mechanics: Statics And Dynamics, K. Vijay Kumar
Reddy, J. Suresh Kumar, BS Publications
 THERMODYNAMICS
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21XXMEM401B IA Marks 30
Number of Lecture
3(L) Exam Marks 70
Hours/Week
Total Number of Lecture 50 Exam Hours 03
Hours
Credits - 04
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Enable the students to
1. Gain the knowledge on the fundamentals of thermodynamics and temperature
scales.
2. Apply First law of thermodynamics to various thermal engineering devices.
3. Understand the direction of second law of thermodynamics and concept of
increase in entropy of universe.
4. Develop an idea on properties during various phases of pure substances using
steam tables, Mollier chart and psychometric charts.
5. Acquire the knowledge of thermodynamics to air standard cycles, vapour
power cycle and the properties of gas mixtures.
Unit -1 Teaching
Hours
Introduction: Basic Concepts Fundamentals - System &
Control volume; Property, State & Process; Exact & Inexact
differentials; Work - Thermodynamic definition of work;
examples; Displacement work; Path dependence of displacement 10
work and illustrations for simple processes; various forms of
work. Temperature, Definition of thermal equilibrium and Zeroth
law; Temperature scales; Various Thermometers.
Unit -2
First Law of Thermodynamics: Definition of heat; examples of
heat/work interaction in systems- First Law for Cyclic & Non-
cyclic processes; Concept of total energy-Demonstration as a
property; Various modes of energy, Internal energy and
Enthalpy. First Law for Flow Processes - Derivation of general
10
energy equation for a control volume; Steady state steady flow
processes including throttling; Examples of steady flow devices;
Unsteady processes; examples of steady and unsteady, first law
applications for system and control volume. Compressibility
charts- Properties of two-phase systems.
Unit - 3
Second law of Thermodynamics: Definitions of direct and
reverse heat engines; Definitions of thermal efficiency and COP;
Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statements; Definition of reversible 12
process; Internal and external irreversibility; Carnot cycle;
Absolute temperature scale.
Clausius inequality: Definition of entropy; Demonstration that
entropy is a property; Principle of increase of entropy;
Illustration of processes in T-S coordinates;
Irreversibility and Availability: Availability function for
systems and Control volumes undergoing different processes,
Second law analysis for a control volume and energy balance
equation.
Unit – 4
Pure Substance: Definition of Pure substance, - Const.
temperature and Const. pressure heating of water; Definitions of
saturated states; P-v-T surface; Use of steam tables and R134a
08
tables; Saturation tables; Superheated tables; Identification of
states & determination of properties, Mollier’s chart.
Determination of entropy from steam tables
Unit-5
Mixtures of Perfect Gases: Ideal Gases and ideal gas mixtures,
Real gases and real gas mixtures and Basics of compressible
flow.
Thermodynamic Cycles: Otto, Diesel, Dual Combustion cycles,
Sterling Cycle, Atkinson Cycle, Ericcson Cycle, Lenoir Cycle –
Description and representation on P–V and T-S diagram, 10
Thermal Efficiency, Mean Effective Pressures on Air standard
basis – comparison of Cycles. Brayton and Rankine cycles –
Performance Evaluation-improving methods – combined cycles,
Bell- Coleman Cycle, Vapour compression cycle-performance
Evaluation.
COURSE OUTCOMES: On completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Identify type of thermodynamic systems in the energy perspective.
2. Solve the practical thermodynamic problems by applying first law and steady
flow energy equation.
3. Analyze the problems on heat engines, refrigeration and entropy by applying
direction of second law and illustrate the concept of entropy by using second
law of thermodynamics.
4. Calculate the thermodynamic properties of the pure substances.
5. Measure the performance of air standard cycles and vapor power cycle and
analyze the properties of gas mixtures.
QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. CO1- CO5 questions carries 14 marks each.
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Engineering Thermodynamics, PK Nag 4thEdn, TMH.
2. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics- Sonntag, R. E, Borgnakke, C. and Van
Wylen, G. J, 2003, 6th Edition, John Wiley and Sons.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Engineering Thermodynamics – Jones & Dugan PHI
2. Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach with student resources DVD
Y.A.Cengel & M.A.Boles, 6thEdn – McGraw Hill
3. Basic Engineering Thermodynamics – A.Venkatesh – Universities press.
4. An Introduction to Thermodynamics – Y.V.C.Rao – Universities press.
5. Engineering Thermodynamics – P.Chattopadhyay – Oxford Higher Edn Publ.
6. Engineering Thermodynamics – D.P.Misra, CengagePubl.
 MATERIALS ENGINEERING
SEMESTER - IV
Subject code 21XXMEM401C Internal 30
Number of lecture 3(L) Marks
External 70
hours/Week Marks
Total No Of lecture 50 Exam Hours 03
hours
Credits-04
Course Objectives:
Enable the students to
1. Classify different bonds in solids and understand crystallization of the
metals for the formation of the solid solutions and alloy phases.
2. Understand about phase diagrams to identify the number and their
variations of phases in Metallographic Structure.
3. Recognize the property requirements of a given application and suggest a
suitable ferrous and non-ferrous metal and their alloys.
4. Understand about various heat treatment processes and its microstructure
formation.
5. Understand the need for different polymers, ceramics and composites and
their uses in the engineering field.
Unit-1 Hours
Structure of metals: Bonds in Solids – Metallic bond -
crystallization of metals, grain and grain boundaries, effect of
grain boundaries on the properties of metal / alloys –
determination of grain size. 8
Constitution of alloys: Necessity of alloying, types of solid
solutions, Hume Rothery’s rules, intermediate alloy phases,
ductility, resilience, toughness and elastic recovery
Unit-2
Phase Diagrams: Methods of construction of equilibrium
diagrams, Isomorpous alloy systems, equilibrium cooling and
heating of alloys, lever rule, eutectic systems, congruent melting
intermediate phases, peritectic reaction Transformations in the 10
solid state – allotropy, eutectoid, peritectoid reactions, phase
rule, relationship between equilibrium diagrams and properties
of alloys. Study of important binary phase diagrams of Fe-Fe3C.
Unit-3
Cast Irons: Structure and properties of white cast iron,
malleable cast iron, grey cast iron, spheroid graphite cast iron,
alloy cast irons.Non-ferrous metals and alloys: Classification of
steels, structure and properties of plain carbon steels, low alloy 12
steels, Hadfield manganese steels, tool and die steels. Structure
and properties of copper and its alloys, Aluminum and its alloys,
Titanium and its alloys
Unit-4
Heat Treatments: Annealing, normalizing, hardening, TTT
diagrams, tempering, hardenability, surface-hardening methods
(carburizing, carbo-nitriding, cyaniding, induction hardening 10
and flame hardening), age hardening treatment, and cryogenic
treatment of alloys. vacuum and plasma hardening.
Unit-5
Ceramics, Polymers and composites: Crystalline ceramics,
glasses, cermets, abrasive materials, nano materials –properties
and applications. Classification, properties and applications of
10
composites, Reinforced materials, fiber reinforced materials,
metal ceramic mixtures, metal matrix composites. Structure,
properties, and applications of polymers.
Course outcomes:
1. Understand the basic crystal structures and their relationship with the
properties
2. Identify the phases, present in different alloy systems by analyzing the
phase diagrams
3. Understand the structure and properties of cast iron and nonferrous
metals and alloys
4. Analyze various heat treatment process to change in physical properties in
metals
5. Student is able to know the structure and properties of different polymers,
ceramic and composite materials
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from
each course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
Text books:
1. Introduction to Physical Metallurgy, Sidney H. Avener, McGrawHill
2. Essential of Materials Science and Engineering, Donald R. Askeland,
Thomson
3. Materials Science and Metallurgy, R.B.Choudary, Khanna Publishers
Reference books:
1. Material Science and Metallurgy – V.D.Kodgire and S.V.Kodgire, Everest
PublishingHouse
2. Materials Science and Engineering - Callister &Baalasubrahmanyam,
Willey publications
3. Material Science for Engineering Students, Fischer, Elsevier Publishers
 PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY
SEMESTER - IV
Subject Code 21XXMEM401D Internal Marks 30
Number of Lecture
3(L) External Marks 70
Hours/Week
Total Number of
50 Exam Hours 03
Lecture Hours
Credits – 04
COURSE OBJECTIVES”
Enable the students:
1. To understand different casting techniques for product development.
2. To know about the applications of special casting processes
3. To understand basic manufacturing processes of welding
4. To understand the concepts of advanced welding processes for various
applications.
5. To select appropriate metal forming and plastic working processes for a given
application.
Unit -1 Hours
Introduction: Manufacturing processes and classification.
Casting: Steps involved in making a casting. Patterns and Pattern
making: Types of patterns, Materials used for patterns, Pattern 10
allowances. Moulding sand: Molding sand composition, sand properties
and Sand preparation. Core: Core sands, Types of cores, Core prints,
Chaplets. Principles of Gating, Gating ratio and Design of Gating
systems.
Unit -2
Melting and Solidification of casting: Cupola furnace, Solidification of
pure metal and alloys, Short & long freezing range alloys. Risers: Types
function and design, Casting designs. 10
Special casting processes: Centrifugal, Die and Investment casting.
Casting defects-Causes and remedies.
Advanced Casting Techniques: Stir Casting, Squeeze casting
Unit – 3
Welding: Introduction, classification of welding processes, types of welded
joints and their characteristics. Gas welding: Different types of flames
and uses, Oxy–Acetylene gas welding, metal arc welding, sub merged arc
10
welding.
Advanced weldings: TIG & MIG welding. Resistance welding: Spot welding,
Seam welding, Projection welding, Upset welding, and Flash butt
welding.
Unit – 4
Special welding processes: Thermit welding, Friction welding, Friction
stir welding, Electron beam welding, and Laser beam welding. Soldering 10
and Brazing, Welding defects, causes and remedies.
Unit – 5
Metal Forming: Nature of plastic deformation, Hot and cold working.
Rolling: Principle, Types of rolling mills and products, Forces in rolling
and power requirements. Extrusion process, Hot extrusion and cold
extrusion, Impact extrusion. Forging, Tools and dies, Forging hammers,
10
Rotary forging. Wire and tube drawings.
Sheet metal forming: Blanking, Bending, Piercing, Stamping, Drawing,
Coining, Embossing, Stretch forming, Hot and cold spinning. Blow and
Injection moulding.
Course outcomes:
1. Students able to understand the knowledge of various casting processes
2. Students should be able to identify various casting technique parameters and
their design effect on processes.
3. Students should be able to understand the equipment to complete specified
welding processes efficiently and correctly
4. Students should be able to apply knowledge of welding safety standards to
both field and factory environments.
5. Students should be able to understand the metal forming and sheet metal
forming processes and their relevance in current manufacturing industry
Question paper pattern:
1. Question paper contains 10 Questions, 2 from each course outcome.
2. The student must answer 5 full questions by selecting one question from each
course outcome (Internal Choice)
3. All questions carries 14 marks each
4. Each full question will have sub question covering all topics under a course
outcome
TEXT BOOKS
1. P.N. Rao,Manufacturing Technology, Vol I, TMH
2. Kalpakjian S & Steven RSchmid, Manufacturing Processes for Engineering
Materials, 5thEd.PearsonPubl.
3. B.S.Raghuwanshi, Workshop Technology, Vol I, Dhanpatrai& Co
4. Kalpakjain S.& Steven R Schmid,Manufacturing Engineering and Technology,
4th Ed., Pearson Publ.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. P C Sharma,Production Technology, S. Chand
2. R.K. Jain and S.C. Gupta, Production Technology, Khanna Publishers
3. Production Technology, H.M.T. (Hindustan Machine Tools).